Home

USER MANUAL

1. O Gereral technica settings Intenpolstion midmum deviation foo cm SES 4 General Ceeign Technical Colors Digear Plotter Keyboard Ferma acsistance j Stenddeed etch Standand notch hype i Hatch Cross Standard nctch lengir i am j Gtd mob width l refy p Seam slowance value Initial width fi cm alter every mociticstion I Depla waring al pecas check Max deviation al poklineaizatice O01 cm Maimun width deviaton t 1 er Allow the automate change Of thes seam SvSsnce comers hype in the case of an error Lasd default settings Accept Gat Options CCC Explanations Symbol types used to display graded points Here you can select the symbol that will be used to display the graded and points on a curve points or the points on a curve The symbols can be X cross square Standard notch Standard notch type Standard notch length default 1 cm Standard notch width default 1 cm General technical settings Interpolation maximal deviation default 1 mm Piece check Seam allowance value Initial width default 1 cm Maximum width deviation on adding the seam allowance default 0 1 cm Allow the automatic modification of the seam allowance corner type in case of an error default checked Here you can set notch type length and width Interpolation is a function that insures that the curves that have been tr
2. 1 13 4 Printing patterns on a plotter RS274D file export The pieces in the designed model can be directly printed on a plotter at 1 1 scale in order to be checked on shape and dimensions or to generate a product based on this pattern You can use a large wide plotter e g for printing the markers for cutting or a smaller plotter under 1 m wide in order to print the pieces one by one according to the printer working area To print the model on the plotter you must first to select a piece to be printed If you must print all pieces you don t have to select any piece The piece selection has to be done in PIECE mode Hold down SHIFT key and click on each piece to be selected Selection can also be done by circling the pieces by a left click on the mouse and dragging a contour around the pieces to be selected Click on Export as PLT the selected files button The print on plotter ms P window will open Here you must select what and how you want to print ge aSr E A First you have to check if the print paper size corresponds with the Export as PLT the selected pieces We program settings if the paper width and length are properly set then the previsualization region on the screen will fit exactly with the print These settings must be checked in Plotter settings frame that opens when you click the Settings button in the Export format PLT window 312 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Desig
3. Relative angle or Absolute angle You can edit the angle value only if you have chosen Relative angle or Absolute angle if you uncheck the box near the message Notch the new added notch will be displayed as an X on the piece contour If the option is checked then the notch will be displayed as notch if you want a notch to be cut on the cutter you must check the box near the message Cut on CNC machine to validate any change in the properties menu you must click on the Apply button Operations that can be done on the distance notch 1 Transform a notch into a point A notch can be transformed into a point You must first click to the notch to select it and then click on the button Transform to point in the lower part of the right docker Near the notch will appear a grade point Transform to point Delete notch To transform a notch into a point you must first select the notch Move the cursor over the notch and click with the left mouse button Click on the Transform to point button located in the lower part of the right docker Near the notch will appear a grade point The new created grade point becomes the mark point for the selected notch 139 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 2 Delete a notch First select the notch then press Delete notch button or DELETE on keyboard To delete a notch first click on the notch to select it
4. Description Size set name etc Size set description Accept Exit Editing a size set At opening of Edit Size Set window the program automatically generates size 1 To change the name click in the corresponding box from alias column write the new name of size and then click in the box from Sizes column and write the size name To automatically complete size name in Sizes column when modify the name in alias column you must check Generate automatically option Pe from Size name settings group In the column Grade is automatically generated an index corresponding to the order of each size in Size Set New sizes will appear in the table each having a different color These colors will be used to display the contour of the graded pieces If you want to change the color click on the colored box and choose another one Edit size set cm fez Groupi Sizes inder r r To add new sizes in Size Set press Add a new i button Add a new size Shift Ins size DULON New combined size Combined name 42 At pressing of Add a new size button New combined size appear where the user insert the size name in the field next to Combined name label Grade index is completed automatically but can 2 lo Spec index lo be modified To accept insertion of new size press Ja Grade index Drop index Ok button To abort insertion
5. Absolute To the previous line W Length fi a5 cm Apply Check both settings Angle and Length and then fill both fields the angle and the length with the desired values for the next segment defined by the first and the second drawn point from the arc that will be drawn next When the angle is defined it means that the direction is indicated This setting together with the length is giving precise coordinates for the next point position Press Apply to draw the segment according to the given coordinates or return with the cursor in the work space to fix the pint position by click 93 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Next point to be drawn A A lt lt First drawn point a mi S Cai Next point Me 7 to be drawn ee New segment length Next segment length Next point to be drawn NS First drawn ee e A gee point KS B Draw arc by two points and angle by constrain to the next point To draw assisted by the program using coordinates of the next point you have to check next point option from right side menu from Draw Tool After you check this option the fields where you can enter the coordinates of the new point become active You have two possibilities to indicate the coordinates for the next point of the curve 1 X and Y coordinate relative to piece origin point 2 dX and dY coordinates relative
6. I notches ware detected in irrvalid position This notches cannot be jinmoned Sade bye Ae f Pieces piace Eros Probleme Quit W Seve subomaticsly in Piece micemshons 1 13 6 Export a project in another standard DXF format EuroCAD Pattern Designer can export files in standard formats as DXF DXF AAMA and in DXF format for INVESTRONICA LECTRA GERBER or ASSYST To export a file in DXF format open the Project menu and then the Export submenu A list with all exportable DXF file types will open After you select the preferred DXF file type from the list an export page will open The export page contains a preview window for the exported file and some options for the format and content of the exported file Projecte Piece Shape Draw Garment Gradir New project Ctril h Open project trl Close project Save project Otrl 5 Import e Export OFF JAAMA Files h j 331 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer aport DYE files trip bases cine Foamat Each am at a diles pation 1 Base sie and grading table in different files Aec Coniours fer Ergal cut res Espat seam ine DHF profile General settings for export You must select the export file format the measurement unit the scaling factor for the quotes the acceted deviation and the DXF
7. mode click to select the incomplete piece then enter again the DRAW TOOL mode then click on one of the ends of the piece contour the drawing will continue as previously described D pe Tool Move the cursor over To continue drawing a contour end When Enter the DRAW Select the pattern to TOOL mode and be continued select one of the drawing functions the contour end is Continue drawing the reached the cursor piece as previously indicates this by a described red circle Click on this end point a pattern with an open contour first enter the PIECE mode 75 IC4D User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 4 Use CTRL SHIFT and ALT keys for free drawing Even if it is fast and easy to use the free drawing as described in chapter 1 7 2 must be assisted because you cannot create accurate pieces with precise dimensions only by free drawing To obtain higher accuracy in new point placement you can use CTRL SHIFT and ALT keys If you hold down one of these keys while drawing a new line some constraints appear regarding the absolute or relative line angle or the position of the next point If you hold down CTRL key as you draw the next segment will be perfectly horizontal vertical or oblique oriented on predefined angles 15 30 45 60 75 degrees from the workspace coordinates point If you hold down CTRL key as you Hold down draw the next segment can be rotat
8. 1 12 7 1 7 How to adapt a direct designed pant for automatic grading 1 12 7 2 How to adapt a direct designed skirt for automatic grading C 1 12 7 How to adapt a direct designed product for automatic grading 1 12 8 Getting a size set for a model that was created by parametrical design 1 12 9 Made to measure size How to create an atypical size or the work on demand 296 1 12 10 How to create a classic skirt pattern in the Parametrical mode o lt General functions in EuroCAD Pattern Designer gt Edit dependency groups for the patterns in a model Edit the project technical sheets Print project and pattern technical sheets Printing patterns on a plotter RS274D file export DXF Gerber Assyst Lectra or Investronica file type import Import DXF and XF AMAA files User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Import Gerber native files tmp Import native Assyst files zip pd Import native Lectra file iba and vet pe Import native Investronica EXP files Import native Investronica files from database 1 13 6 C 1 13 7 General program settings C Export a project in another standard DXF format General Settings Design settings Technical elements settings Colors settings Settings for plotter printing f 1 13 8 Check the patterns prepared for cut 1 13 9 Check selected patterns ee Remote Assistance Sy EuroCAD workstation Hardware Specifications Appendix Using Calcomp cursor wireless
9. 260 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer After selecting the points the pieces will appear with overlapped starting points and a dialog window is opening In the Walking pieces window you can choose to normalize seams length to simulate closed darts or to leave pieces in position at the end of the simulation The simulation will be done according to the defined step you can set this step in the Walking step field To view simulation you must click on the button Walk piece forward If you want to see simulation backward you must click on Walk piece backward These buttons are placed in the lower part of the Walking pieces window You can view the simulation by sewing simulation point by point Now the walking on the contour will not depend on the simulation step but on the points on the piece contour Point by point walking pieces can de done on the initial defined direction by a click on the Go forward to the next point button For a backward simulation you must click on the Go backward to the previous point You can view the simulation by sewing simulation notch to notch In this situation the walking on the contour will not depend on the simulation step but on the notches on the pieces contour The simulation notch to notch can be done by a click on the Go forward to the next notch For a backward simulation you must click on the Go backward to the pr
10. Attention For a point derived grading it is absolutely necessary that the point whose grading you are using to be part of a grading group that includes the set for the point to be graded For a point to have derived grading you must define the derived rule to be used for this purpose The used rules can be identical with the point in the right side docker in the corresponding field you must edit the point from which you will assume the grading When you change the grading of the reference point then the destination point grading used for this derived grading will change automatically This point has the same grading as the SLAT point Grading Point gradin geometical grading a avy grading derived grading fo nranertineal with fhe nnne The program calculates automatically the point grading based on the grading rules of the nearby points according to the distances from the modified point to the two mark points Grading Point gradin geometrical grading Os grading derived grading Derived gradin Type of derived the rule f identical with the point f cumulated from the points proportional with the points Transform the derived rule l fips C tip I rotate 180 rotate 90 I rotate degrees Sizes Group aes User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer cumulated from the points in the right side docker you m
11. Set properties fo f next line t ext point Badius 94 es B Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Check the Angle setting and then First drawn Tangent point insert the number a eT of degrees After inserting the fie angle press Enter to apply the value Establish the starting angle T angen for the J Angle tangent starting from 49 Degrees The arc tangent the first drawn position will be i constrained by point angle and the tangent edge point will slide along this direction Second drawn point 1 7 22 Draw spiral In EuroCAD Pattern Designer spirals can be created directly For this you have to enter in Draw Tool and select Draw spiral function In EuroCAD Pattern Designer can be created two types of spirals Before starting to draw a spiral the user has to decide the type of the spiral to create The two types are 1 Closed spirals 2 Opened spirals 1 Closed spirals To create a closed spiral after applying the Draw Spiral function you have to select Closed option from Spiral type in properties area right side of Draw Tool A closed spiral is composed by two elements a main pattern and an auxiliary drawing Auxiliary drawing Draw spiral Upened To draw a spiral you have to In properties area you have to The drawn spiral is a closed one filled enter in Draw Tool and check Closed option
12. Size name Generate automatically J Use separator Description Size set name Size set description Accept Exit Generate automatically a combined size set Define grade size set Define drop size set Define spec size set Define extra size set Use separator poa SCS Ma ja B a Generate Cl uik For creating automatically a combined sizet set press Edit size set button from Grading tool In the appearing window press Edit size set button After pressing Edit size set button a new window Generate automatically a combined size set appears In this window you have to enter the sizes for each size set grade drop spec extra separated by space In the given example the combined size set was created using Grade Drop and Spec tables For this you have to enter the sizes in the Define grade size set Define drop size set and Define spec size set fields If you want a character used as a separator between sizes enter this character in the Use separator field After entering all the sizes press Generate button 235 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer After pressing Generate button a new size set will be created composed by combined sizes Edit size set cm ee SES GROOT SEE index Gatos index falias inder ato 40 576 407M AA 40 M 6 42 524 42 5 56 garhi AT kd A ta Di ion step Edit size se
13. C Hest point t Badius Setting the length for the next Setting the length and the segment defined by the first and the angle for the next segment defined second drawn point of the current by the first and the second drawn drawn arc point of the current drawn arc Set properties fo Set properties fo Set properties fo f nest line amp next line amp next line C Next point Next point C Next point Radius Radius Lin Setting the angle for the next segment defined by the first two points which defines the current drawn arc Iv Angle I Angle 30 Degrees fo Degrees 30 Degrees f Absolute f Absolute f Absolute To the previous line To the previous line f To the previous line Lenght J Lenght I Lenght fo cm j35 cri 13 5 cm Apply Apply Apply f 88 B Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Check the Angle setting and then fill with the angle value the corresponding field Press Enter after completing the angle Check the Absolute setting if the angle is defined related to the workspace coordinates When the cursor returns in the work space the line determinate by the first and the last drawn point is constrained to the set angle and the next point to be drawn will slide along this direction Next point to be drawn point Check the Length setting and then fill with the desired dimension for length the corresponding filed After this press En
14. If you click on the DXF layers table button a new window is opening here you can modify only if required the value for a layer from which an 5 x Symmetry anig fE element is read The layer number for any imported 5 a g DXF block Eais fa Pieces contour element must be introduced according to the DXF TA Grade points Grain ane file structure Hatches Inema ines To get back to the default settings you must click on Default settings button Cuve points Tent elements It is possible that some DXF or DXF AAMA Dril holes Grade ines imported files show some errors regarding the technical elements import notches axes grading Thus these files must be checked carefully before Uk Cancel further usage 319 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Possible problems on DXF file import The number of the imported pieces can differ from the number of pieces in the project saved as DXF file The piece number must be checked DXF files or DXF AAMA files does not include information regarding the fabric type In some cases there is some information regarding the fabric but you must always check and fill in the fabric name for each piece You must carefully check the construction line internal seam line or cut line The import of DXF files using the function Files DXF AutoCAD R12 2000 dxf it is used in the situations in which the dxf files can t be imported with
15. Piece and point movements using the keyboard arrows A selected piece or point can be moved by using the arrows on the keyboard Here you can set the movement step for arrow usage and the micro movement step for the usage of the arrows while holding down CTRL key see chapters 1 5 2 and 1 6 6 default movement step 10 mm micro movement step 1 mm Grading step modification using the keyboard A point grading can be adjusted using the keyboard arrows see chapter 1 10 8 Here you can set the grading step increase decrease default while using the keyboard arrows and the grading step micro movement grading step modification 1mm using the keyboard arrows while holding down the CTRL key grading step micro movement 0 1 mm Precision print settings The printed quotes on the product file can be rounded off and can default have a precision that differs from the current one You can do this by printed quotes precision 2 decimals setting the printed quotes precision You can also check to set the Round off the latest decimal of the printed round off the latest decimal of the printed quote cote quote Default settings for new pieces Piece design is usually done on the internal seam line as patterns on The new designed pieces are by default which the seam allowance will be added Here you can set if the new operated on the internal seam line or on designed pieces can be considered by default operated on the internal the external cut line sea
16. Register product You can select the server from this window Click first on the field extension black dart to open the server list and then choose the server name to select one of the five Servers 345 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Remote assistance server sel Eo Server Eurocad Server 1 training jar Eurocad Server 1 training Eurocad Server 2 training Evurocad Server 3 training Evurocad Serer d service Remote assistance server sel lt Server Eurocad Server 4 service an To establish the connection click on Accept ODDE button after selecting the Server If the connection was successfully established in the right down corner will appear the black G with eara S706 Am orange background The icon will remain in this position as long as the connection is active ma gi Steps to be taken to close the Remote assistance connection 05 AM To close the Remote assistance connection make a right click on the orange icon from the right down corner and then choose Close from the opened menu If you want to find information about the Remote Assistance function you must choose About option from the opened menu After this a new window containing information about about the application will be displayed on the screen 346 B EURO Remote Assistance System Faarnohe athens cee BS TOS TAA 1h onmin
17. ep Gece E aaja 206 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer In point grading table the ma rk eae a rs passing from define grade table to another is done by left click on desired table from menu grade drop spec and extra Displayed table is the selected one Note When activating a grading table using the TEE from the second tool bar the program will display automatically the grading for this type of grading This grading will remain displayed on the piece and you cannot hide it using the check button from the second tool bar To do this you will have to show a different type of grading using the check button from the second tool bar corresponding to that grading and then activate the corresponding table for the last one Now you can hide or display grading for all grading types Description of the point grading table O O 1 09 iF 00e O 325 O ME e ne ae 4 5 EE 1 00 O G EA 5 42 2 ee aot SeVu REE O Tat 1 08 7 08 The point position movement from the anterior size is memorized on Step X and Step Y columns this is the grading step on horizontal and on vertical If the point has a uniform grading the step will be the same between all sizes If there is a gap between
18. the workspace the Set properties fo f next line Ao point Set the length and the angle for the segment defined by the first and the last point from the curve that will be drawn Set properties for 0 next line next point Line W Angle 23 degrees Absolute To the previous line J Length fi 35 cm Apply i Check both Angle and Length set the corresponding length and angle for the next segment By setting the angle direction and 80 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer angle is expressed from the previous line the corresponding segment length is coerced to the given length and the end point of the curve slides on a circle whose radius is the same with segment length length the new segment is already fixed on the workspace To apply the next segment click on Apply button or move the cursor back on the workspace the point will be completely immobilized and will not follow the cursor anymore and click on the left mouse button click you must check option When you go back with the cursor on the workspace the direction for the curve you are drawing is constrained to the given angle and the end point of the curve slides along this direction The pomi ihai E _ Wil be added pe The paint tha z r Wil ba added le nA en oe a f Yi e i Fi gt a The point thet will 7 4 a be added The legh af fe na zagre Last
19. will be imported and the files created in AutoCAD Corel or are imported files which imitate the original AutoCAD format It is recommended that at the import of these files not to be checked the option Rearrange the imported patterns in this way it is possible to correct easier the errors that result from the different way of construction It is recommended that when you will import dxf files that result from programs AutoCAD CorelDraw etc to be tested alternative the standard DXF settings Use standard dxf format is checked when you know for sure if the file results from AutoCAD or if you don t know the provenience of the file is unknown Use pattern reconstruction Even if the pattern is imported in preview window it is ok to test the import of t he pattern and with this function Major differences can be seen in case if the pieces are spread all around the file By using the option Use detection margin you can avoid the import of the patterns with the open contour For example these margins have very small values 1 2 mm and you don t have to ignore it Information about DXF file if Preview pattern DF file information Author Date Units DF Layers Table Ignore undefined layers You can also preview some information regarding the DXF file to be imported Thus you can observe the author name the CAD system for the imported file the export date and the used measurement unites DYF Layers
20. window After activating this function you must insert the desired dimension in the field corresponding to length and then press Apply When this function is active and Lenth Fa you press Alt Ctri all the a 6 m x internal points will become Langh Jf si er nN i ae i active together with the possible trajectory that the points can have according to the radius that you have set by inputting the length In this case the trajectory becomes a circle around the internal points One Advanced magnetizing using an offset Advanced magnetizing using lengths 111 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer circle for each internal point You must check the third option from the right side menu of the Advanced magnetize to use this type of magnetizing After activating this option you must insert the desired dimension in the field corresponding to the length and then click on Apply Keep Ctrl Alt key combination pressed while this option is checked to be able to activate all internal points from existing patterns together with the possible trajectories that the internal points might have according to the length that you have set In this case the trajectory becomes a circle having the radius equal with the length that you have set Note If you are in Draw tool mode and you are using the Length advanced magnetizing type together with the drawing constrained to the next point or to t
21. 72 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Flipping a french curve The french curves are always extracted with the 2 selected points aligned horizontally in the View french curves window even if the piece or the contour to be extracted is in a different position It is possible that by adding it to the selected piece on the position from the preview window the french curve is not on the position wanted by the user For having it in the desired position it can be flipped horizontally X and vertically Y in the View french curves window To flip select a french curve and press Flip X or Flip Y After pressing one of these buttons the new position can be seen in the View french curves window and on the piece also When the french curve is in the desired position press Ok to save the modifications neckline back armhole back In the left side of the window View fench curves you must select the name of the curve that you need to apply on the piece In the right side of the window you can see the shape of the selected curve After selecting the french curve you will make click on Flip X or FlipY button from the bottom of View fench curves window If you will press the button Flip X the curve will be mirrored along X axe To validate the modifications you must press OK button If you don t want to validate the modifications you must press Cancel button I
22. After this select the Windows XP operating system from the list below 4 Check the Run as administrator setting after settings the operating system where it is necessary Open Open file location Run as administrator Pin to Start Menu Add to Quick Launch Restore previous versions send To Curt Copy Create Shortcut Delete Rename Security General E you have problems wilh this program and i worked comectly an an earner version of Windows select the compatiolgy mode that matches that eater wersion Compatibility mode F Run this program in compatibility mode for Miindows XP Senice Pack 2 Fj Settings Run in 256 calors Runin 40x 460 screen resolution Digable wisual themes L Disable desktop composition Digable daplay scaling on high DPI settings Povidege Level 350 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Appendix 01 Using Calcomp cursor wireless EuroCAD Alpha digitizer positioning Cross 4 button for graded points aa technical Rasen points an commands mo jyy 4 3 button rol panes as for internal technical points Wireless pointer IMPORTANT before usage the digitized must be ON thus you have to switch the ON OFF button located back on the upper right side of the digitizing table check the computer cable to be connected After entering the DIGITIZE mode and the digitizer is connected you will not work
23. Edit cut line Rotation type Clockwise C Anti clockwise Dart 0 178 7 Rotate dart Close dart Cut over dart Transform to folded dart 9 Delete dart Dart Properties Angle 23 degrees Operations Edit cut line Rotation type Clockwise C Anti clockwise Dart 0 178 7 CLICK Rotate dart Rotate the selected dart witt S Cut over dart Transform to folded dart 3 Delete dart In GARMENT TOOL mode click on the piece to select it then click on the piece peak When the cursor is over the dart so the dart can be selected by a click on it near the cursor appears DART After click on the dart to select it the dart cut line became visible Dart Properties 1 In the dart list on the right o EA side menu click on the dart to be Operations rotated Edit cut line Rotation type f Clockwise C Anti clockwise 2 Replace the initial dart angle with a smaller angle of a chosen Dart 0 23 value NEW poe 3 Click on Rotate dart button 4 In the dart list the original dart will assume the new chosen ___ Rotate dat angle while a new dart appears Close dart The new dart temporary Cut over dart assumes the difference from the Transform to folded dart original dart angle 4 Delete dart Dart rotation can be repeated even on the two resulted darts According to Clockwise or Anti clockwise rotation type one dart will widen and other one will shri
24. Files DXF AAMA dxf b Import Gerber native files tmp Native Gerber files has a TMP extension and can include projects and or pieces These files can also be found as ZIP archive files Alike DXF files the native Gerber files are used only for patterns They include all information from Gerber application except those regarding the notch dimension and definition the notches dimensions can be set from the EuroCAD Pattern Designer Import window There are two Gerber file types that can be imported in EuroCAD Pattern Designer Piece and Model The Piece file type includes a piece with a size set grading internal line auxiliary pieces Such a file does not include information regarding the fabric type and how many times it appears in the project The Model file includes all information about the project piece number and type fabric type The Model file can be imported in EuroCAD Pattern Designer only if it is associated with Piece files Import Gerber files ig E me E E E t heen Gete lie Fite Mada m Husnber of medee 1 Harber of pieces 7 Frit aT 3 rimp singa oooO S iena dsg pears pes 1 Motch teres I mgpa aliiona dri ARAS E a eia eeh E Gran aeg Huis pines Burocad Pattem Designer appir s on E Gpr aie o mpy deih peoe ath ite pan ble otis P abar ere fe Tet bee C maipi pera scocondoey bo the mia
25. counter clock wise Create more points from a selected point The new point was created at the introduced value measured on the contour line In order to create a number of points at a certain distance from a selected point the user must select the point and than press Create a new point at a given distance from a selected point In the window that will appear the user must type the distance between the selected point and and the points that will be created These distances will be separated by space than will be pressed the button Accept For each of these distances will be created a new point The distance is measured on the contour line in clock wise If the user wants to add new points in counter clock wise than the distances introduced should be negative values 60 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Create a point from multiple selected points In order to create a point from multiple points the user must select the points and press the button Create a new point at a given distance from a selected point In the window that will appear the user must type the distance between the selected points and the points that will be added than press Accept If the user wants to add the points in counter clock wise than should be introduced negative values d Create more points from multiple selected points In order to create more points from multiple selected points the user must sele
26. er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer click on the fixed edge You must select the side that remain fixed You must move the mouse cursor over this edge and click on it while it becomes red and the OK appears near the cursor Fullness Curent length of the conta maze After selecting the three elements involved in this to apply fullness type of bulging a new window opens Here it is displayed the current length of the segment to be Fullness i lengthened You must fill in the value for the bulge distance then press Accept The first selected segment will bend and increase with the distance that you have typed the second selected segment will also bend but will keep the original dimension 1 6 28 Add a French curve to the selected piece A French curve is a drawing tool composed by several curves with different shape and is used for drawing flat curves In Shape Tool you have the possibility to add a French curve on a piece This function is useful for an easy drawing of contours like armhole sleeve curve neck curve the shape of the side seam Before adding French curves on a piece a collection of the most used shapes has to be created This means that first the user draws the pieces which contain the contours to be used later on other pieces then he saves each contour in a library From this library he can always load the saved contours to use on other pieces To add a French curve on a piece the follow
27. intersection see chapter 1 5 17 New points are added there where rectangle to select it press on the rectangle intersects the piece SHIFT key and click to select contour together the piece New added points can be used to declare a new fold see chapter 1 9 17 This fold will have the folding lines perfectly parallel The fold rotation and width are equal to those of the original rectangle used to create it Similarly instead of rectangle we can use other geometrical shapes parallel or oblique sides New intersection points required for a fold design are created from these shapes Create a sequence of separate folds In order to create a sequence of separate folds on the pattern must be added the points that mark the folds Are necessary four pints for each fold Add on contour the points that mark the folds In order to create a sequence of separate folds on the pattern must be added the points that mark the folds Are necessary four points for each fold half of the points on one side and the other half on the other side These points can be points that already are on the piece or new added points Adding new points on the piece contour will be done from Shape Tool mode by double click on the piece contour or by using the function Add new point see chapter 1 6 2 163 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Define folds After were added the mark points for folds select Garment Tool
28. 2 for Notches can be digitized by direct usage of the 2 pointer button Notch digitization can be done at the same time with pattern outline digitization or after the outline has been completely digitized These operations have to be completed BEFORE pressing the STOP button for the current pattern Second method for notch digitization with previous notch statement digitize notches First click on DISTANCE NOTCH e Doou Place the pointer on DISTANCE NOTCH or PERCENT Place the pointer on the notch and press NOTCH according to the notch type to be defined then press the O pointer button 0 pointer button Replay operation for each notch on the piece B Grain axis digitizing There are two ways in which you can digitize the grain axis directly by placing the pointer on top of the grain axis and click the C button from the pointer to indicate the first point of the grain axis and then place the pointer on top of the second point of the grain axis and click one more time on C button or using the sticker click first on the GRAIN AXIS button from the sticker using O key and then place the pointer on top of the first point of the grain axis and make a click using 0 key from the pointer and the same for the second point of the grain axis 122 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer l st method for digitizing directly the grain axis EN Place
29. Dartedge_ side menu you must define it as matching point Button hole ___ D Hook hole Fastener hole__ Button hole Internal point The matching point has two elements an anchor that Propertie can be placed only on the interior of a piece and the Type Matching point matching point itself that can be placed either out of RE the piece by declaring the offset The initial matching B point will display both elements overlapped For the matching point on the right side there is a v e7 om special menu that differs from the others This menu offset allows you to set the position of the anchor and the Ds fo om offset for the matching point ll As for the other interior technical points you are able DANAE to set the piece origin in the matching point Ape Delete internal point Set origin While during the first step the two elements of the matching point appear overlapped it is recommended to set a certain offset to visualize them separately By setting the offset you decide the exact matching point position on X and Y axis according to the matching point anchor After typing new values for the matching point offset you MUST click on Apply button or to press ENTER key Delete internal point Set origin By setting the Position you define the precise anchor placement on X and Y axis After changing the initial values for the position you MUST cli
30. Dat edge Angle 360 degrees a Angle 360 degrees O hole Apply Apply Apply Appl ppt Fastener hole__ Delete internal point Delete intemal point Set origin x _ toin Matching point_ set origin Click on the Select the Select the pocket Set Delete internal point E 7 _ Delate inten point F 2 Butoh Delete internal point ee Set cite the pocket Set the X Y Pocket opening length rotation angle coordinates for the pocket pocket position technical elements list technical element IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 23 Create a sequence of internal points In Garment Tool working mode you can create a sequence of internal points on a piece This means that you can create many internal points in the same time To create a sequence of internal points you must select the piece first and than the Create sequence of internal points button The cursor changes into selection cursor After this you have to indicate a range along which you want to create the sequence of internal points This range can be the contour of an auxiliary piece or internal axes like a dependent line a translated contour a parallel to the contour a text axes or a grain axes The auxiliary pieces used to add a sequence of internal points can have a opened contour or a closed contour To select a auxiliary piece with open contour it is necessary to select two points from it The sequence of p
31. Ef Desktop 708 RAUL File 19 03 2007 2 30 2 5399 ALL File 19 10 2007 2 191 End 3 Floppy A lag Local Disk C All types kd e 6 NO Warning If the number of selected points is different from the number of saved tables in the file x you will be warned by a message and the grading load will not proceed 211 a as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 10 7 Operations for fast grading modifications Grading linearization If the grading rule for a point has different grading steps between the sizes and you want to standardize these steps you can use the linearization function Select the point or the points chosen for rule linearization then click the Linearize point grading button The program will calculate the mean of the grading steps and will apply a common step between all sizes from active table By example if a point has grading on Grade and Drop and active table is Grade at pressing of linearization button this operation will be carried out only for Grade To do this operation for Drop select Drop grading table as active table and press Linearization button Select the point which grading will be linearizate Select as active table one of four grading table of the point which will be linearizate To select active table we have two possibilities 1 select with left click one of the tables from grading toolbox in Grading mode or 2 open point grading ta
32. EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 12 Automatically create a dart using 2 points You can automatically create a dart on a piece starting from 2 points These points used to create a dart can be used as follows One point for dart opening An internal technical point that defines the dart depth and its direction To create such a dart you must click the Create dart using 2 points in GARMENT TOOL mode A dart created by this procedure must be checked and adjusted in order to fulfill the two conditions that defines a dart see chapter 1 9 9 To automatically create a dart using 4 F i F K points you must first click on the Create eats dart using 4 points The cursor will change to point selection cursor On the Create dart using 2 points bottom bar you can find the explanations for each point to be selected Fa z gt First you must mark the point on the contour required for dart open ng poini al dart opening When near the cursor appears OK you ee must click the left mouse button Then you must select the second point that must be an internal technical point This point will become the dart peak and will define the dart depth and direction nt ernal ig ch po t Dart opening oS iB The opening type is gt Dart M Automabe creation Dart After selecting the points used for a new dart creation a j Folded dart new dialog window opens Here you must define the f Clockwise bulge type the dart opening
33. Hold down the SHIFT key and click to select the point where the grading rule will be copied Copy the horizontal grading rule Click to select the point to copy the horizontally grading rule from SHIFT Hold down the SHIFT key and click to select the point where the grading rule will be copied ar Copy grading on X y Copy grading on Y Gee Copy grading on X and Y Click on Copy vertically the grading rule button lt Copy grading on Y A Copy grading on X and Y Click on Copy horizontally the grading rule button Copy grading on X and Y Select as active one of the four point grading tables of the reference point by selecting one of the four activation buttons from toolbar in Grading mode The vertical grading rule of the first point was copied and applied to the second point You can see that the first point is graded also horizontally while the second point is not K W The horizontal grading rule of the first point was copied and applied to the second point You can see that the first point is graded also vertically while the second point is not 219 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Copy grading rule horizontally and vertically between two points on the same piece Click to select the first point to copy the horizontally and the vertically grading rule from or Copy grading on X 73 Copy grading on Y H Copy grading on X and Y CLICK SH
34. In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you can create 4 types of notches Distance notch applied at a given distance from a mark point Percent notch applied between two points at a specific percent ratio for the distances between the two points Intersection notch applied on the intersection between an internal axis and the piece contour Corner notch applied on a piece corner on a defined direction To create a distance notch first click on the piece to select it Then click on the contour approximately where the notch will be added Then click the button Create distance notch The new distance notch will have as mark point the closest point considered counterclockwise After creating a notch on the right side docker appears the properties menu for notch parameters In the setup menu we can apply the exact distances for the notch to be placed We can also modify the mark points on which these distances are measured set a precise notch length and angle according to the contour line Create a distance notch To create a notch first click on the piece to select it When the piece is selected the grade points become visible marked in red Click on the contour approximately where the notch will be added The precise distance from several points will be set after notch creation by editing notch properties To create a distance notch on the marked position click Ily gl a Ki 22 on Create distance notch button The mark point w
35. Remote files Browse onnect Disconnect MEN SUIT ANT Emidio Tucci Tailoring MEN SUIT LIN Emidio Tucci Uoma Secondo tessuto Tailoring MEN SUIT SHE Emidio Tucci Tailoring SHIRT MEN ENT Tintoretto Uoma Shirt SHIRT MEN GEN Tintoretto ome cit TROUS LYCRA GEN Donna Young TROUS SPORT FOR Mito Uoma Trouser TROUS SPORT GEN Mito Uomo Trouser PyJAMA WOMEM ENT Kizer Fashion l Pyjama SHIRT SHE BOL Tintoretto SHIRT SHE CAH Tintoretto Toke SHIA T SHE CAR Tintoretto Flap SHIRT SHE DEL Tintoretto SHIRT 5HE ESF Tintoretto Back SHIRT SHE MAM Tintoretto Sleeve SHIA T SHE PAL Tintoretto Collar SHIAT SHE PUM Tintoretto Cuff SHIRT SHE TIF Tintoretto Assure that in the Server Option settings the IP the User and if necessary the Password used to connect to data base are correctly set Server options If the data base is on the same computer and if you have no connection IF to a network the IP field must remain empty Click on Connect button to connect to database and on Disconnect User sa to disconnect from database if you are connected Password If the IMG folder containing the piece and model files is available in the Remote files network the user has the possibility to connect on it by setting the path For this the user must check the Remote file and then click on Browse HIG button In the new opened window you can set the path for the IMG folder in th
36. Sound fies dighzshon path C Program FilagiEurecadiEurocad PattomDeaignorSounds sites Load defauk setings Dacep Quit 1 8 2 Digitizing a pattern outline The paper pattern should be fixed on the digitizer using paper adhesive tape The adhesive paper must not cover the pattern corners the notches or other interest points There are no special requirements for the parts position and rotate on the Digitizer The software will automatically align the digitized parts along the grain axis The pattern is fastened on the digitizer The fastener must not cover the notches or the grade points The The pattern is fastened one side then outspreaded to digitizing surface must be kept dry and clean for an the opposite end accurate fastening ATTENTION The Digitizer workspace is smaller than the total table surface and is marked by small inserts that marks the workspace corners The fastened parts must not cross the workspace Large parts that cannot be placed inside the workspace can be digitized in two steps Click on the A key from the pointer or place the pointer on top of START button from the sticker and click on 0 key from the pointer 117 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Before staring to digitize a pattern click on the A key from the pointer or place the pointer on top of START button from the digitizing table sticker Place the pointer on top of START butto
37. The saving path can be selected only if the option Save security files installation folder in the same directory with the original files is unchecked Increasing decreasing zoom step By pressing F2 or F3 keys you can zoom in or zoom out the project size on the screen You can also set the zoom step increase or default 10 decrease Reset tables position The measurements table position will be displayed in the upper left side of the desktop This button is verry usefull for the users that are working with the 336 es B Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer French curves By using this button the user has the possibility to manage the French curve list Use error acoustic messages If you check this option then the error messages will be accompanied by acoustic signals b Design settings fe ee i ie General Design Techracal Colors Digitizer Pisite Keyboard Renoa ectistance F Working ares r Pieces and pomis movement using keybosrd snows r Messurement unk em Moving step amowel fi om Grid see fio cm Micro moving step arows CTAL 0 1 cm Page wack 1000 cre aa c Guading sep increase using tha keyboard Page lnc te S Grading step increase arovs 0 1 om Dimensies precision 2 decimals o Grading slep micscrincrease scrows CTA O O1 cm Cursor sensitiviby fa pikel Snap cumar seretiviy fig piels Precision pent setlings Mouse move protection E pikak Di
38. This point is created at a distance x Pt 8 0 5 and y 10 cm from the point P1 Pt waist length After you have created the points you must display both parametrical and piece layer by using the mix view interactive cursor thus both layers will be displayed parametrical and pieces In the previous example the skirt was designed for the size 44 and after entering the size set it remained selected the base size 42 You must enter the GRADING mode and select the base size 44 In PIECE mode you must select the front piece and then you must click to select the front mid point then you must drag the selected point to overlap the point P1 of the parametrical design during dragging you must hold the SHIFT ALT key combination in order to magnetize these points If you hold the SHIFT ALT key combination you can magnetize the selected points to be overlapped a guided overlapping on the chosen geometrical points If the piece points are overlapping on all geometrical points of the parametrical design then in the SHAPE TOOL mode you must select all the points of the designed piece and by holding the SHIFT ALT combination you will magnetize the piece points over the corresponding points in the parametrical layer If the piece points are not overlapping on the points of the parametrical design and you need an automatic grading process and to preserve the shape of the designed piece you must proceed as follows in the SHAPE TOOL mode
39. You must create the point P10 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the hip point This point is created at a distance x 0 3 and y P2 P4 cm from the point P8 P2 P4 segment length defined by the points P2 and P4 4 You must create the point P11 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the back mid point from waist This point is created at a distance x 4 11 and y Pt 4 cm from the point P8 Pt waist length 5 You must create the point P12 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the point on the hip line mid back This point is created at a distance x Ps 4 0 5 and y 0 5 cm from the point P10 Ps hip length 6 You must create the point P13 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the internal end point This point is created at a distance x Lpt 2 5 and y 0 cm from the point P9 Lpt pant bottom width 7 You must create the point P14 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the interior hip point This point is created at a distance x 2 87 and y Lip cm from the point P9 Lip pant inseam 293 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer After you have created the points you must display both parametrical and piece layer by using the mix view interactive cursor thus both layers will be displayed paramet
40. back me To save the measurements names from a kont AKA 208 watcher click on the right mouse button inside of ihe clickeee it front yoke Measurement table mm No Current measuremen Short Piece name C wW sake Near the mouse cursor appears a small menu in which you must click on Save names Add measurement 528 37 523 57 Add compose measurement 5B 6 Load names a 100 Save names k Show delta for measuremen ee Click 256 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Save As Save int E al After you select Save names will be displayed a window from which you select the way where you want to save the names from the table the name of file will contain these names after you press Save button The files have dm extension File name mesurements Save as ppe Dimensions names nal Cancel Load the names measurements from the watcher Measurement table mm No Curent measuremen Short Piece name _ Right click To load many measurements names in the watcher press the right mouse button inside of it Add measurement Add compose measurement Delete measurement Near the mouse cursor appears a small menu in edie S which you must click on Load names Save names oa Click Roeser Wee eel irae mea ce TEESE Co Show delta For measurements Look in B Measurements g E Measurements dm After you select Load names will be displayed a win
41. background back armhole 1 back 4r yoke armhole yoke S front armhole front Measurement added Armhole in the watcher z eeve pemanenan m by the designer Dock rect SES oF displayed on white d 10 front neck front background 111 Back neck yoke 124 eck Composed measuremen eaetrement expression r3 r4415 4 Free field which Formula field to calculate can be used to add composed measurement The base size measurements new measurements are displayed on black background The most important advantage of the watcher is that the measured and displayed distances are permanently and automatically recalculated each time when you modify the piece shape piece gradings thus the designer can watch in real time any measure adjustment even during piece modifications Also the measures added to this table together with the quotes taken from the size set are printed in the product technical sheet In the watcher the first rows with yellow background are displaying the first quotes in the size set On the first column in the left side the table displays the current number the next column titles represent then quote or measurement names The next columns display the measured value for each size The column that displays the base size is displayed on black background The watcher dimension can be increased on the right side to see more sizes or down to see more measurements or can be decreased in order to keep the optimal workspace The table
42. counterclockwise To display the seam allowance width in a point you must select the piece enter the GARMENT TOOL mode click on Edit seam allowance button and click on the point Point with defined seam allowance width If the seam allowance width is defined in a oo comma Counterclockwise width clocwise width certain point its clockwise or counterclockwise Intersection v defined undefined 2 75 cm 275 em value is displayed on white background To change the seam allowance values in a point in GARMENT TOOL mode you must click on Edit seam allowance button left click to select the point and enter the value for the counter clockwise width and press ENTER key then enter the clockwise width value and press ENTER key If you click now on Show hide seam allowance button the new values will be displayed If the seam allowance width is defined in a certain point its clockwise or counterclockwise value is displayed on gray background If you change these values the seam allowance width in that point will automatically become a defined width If you add a point on a segment with variable seam allowance in that point the seam allowance width is undefined and will be automatically calculated from the neighbor points with defined width The shape of the seam allowance is automatically modified each time the piece shape changes 176 aes User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer If the piece is cut
43. has a closed contour so it will be not filled To close a piece perimeter you must find and select the first and the last point on the contour see chapter 1 7 2 and select them to join the first and the last points on the contour you must use the Join selected points and close perimeter button To reverse operation piece contour opening you must select a point where the contour will be opened and then you must click on Open piece contour in the selected point button just near the joining button The piece with an open contour is Click on Join selected points and The result is a piece with closed unfilled Select the first and the last close perimeter button to close the contour it will be displayed filled point on the contour piece contour 1 6 20 Change Bezier curve length EuroCAD Pattern Designer offers another function rarely met on other computer aided design programs for clothing Exact changes in a Bezier curve length This function allows the accurate adjustment for the seam lines length so as they will fit perfectly when the pieces are sewed together To change the Bezier curve length you must first select the curve segment from the piece contour The actual curve length will be displayed down the right side docker The value in the specific field can be changed after changing it press ENTER key to apply changes IMPORTANT length adjustment must respect some limits otherwise the piece shape can b
44. mode click on the piece in order to select it than select the button Create a sequence of separate folds The cursor will become a selection cursor Will be made a click on the points that form the fold in order two by two on the folding line In order to create one two or more folds on same piece will be selected the points that form the fold Select the second peak point of the fold Select the first bottom point of the fold Select the second bottom point of the fold First point that will form the first fold Select the first peak point of the fold Select the first bottom point of the fold Select the second bottom point of the fold OK Second point that will form the first fold The user will select the second peak point of the fold Select the first peak point of the fold Select the second peak point of the fold Select the second bottom point of the fold Third point that will form the first fold The user will select the first point of the back fold 164 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Select the first peak point of the fold Select the second peak point of the fold Select the first bottom point of the fold Forth point that will form first fold The user will select the second point of the back fold Select the second peak point of the fold Select the first bottom point of the fold Select the second bottom point of the fold First point that will form second fold The user
45. the first button bar of EuroCAD Pattern Designer application By mouse dragging on this cursor you can switch the two layers Check Settings Windows Help APL EE al Miao amp e or Te VIEW zoom gi 100 pieces 100 geometric 0 pieces 100 geometric 100 pieces k geometric If you place the cursor in the position only the piece layer will be displayed You can also place the mouse pointer over the cursor and right click to open a menu from which you will select the option 100 pieces O geometric in order to display only the piece layer If you place the mouse cursor on a parametrical point a message will be displayed it indicates the parametrical rule used to create this point and the scenario step where it was created yeck Settings Windows Help 100 pieces 100 geometric O pieces LEI geometric 100 pieces 0 geometric If you move the cursor toward one of its ends or one layer will become more visible than the other You can also place the mouse pointer over the cursor and right click to open a menu from which you will select the option 100 pieces 100 geometric in order to display both layers or O gt pieces 100 geometric If you place the cursor in the position only the parametrical layer will be displayed You can also place the mouse pointer over the cursor and right click to open a menu from which you will select the opt
46. with alignment restrictions for other pieces This function supposes that the piece placement on maker should be defined from the design step This piece placement will be defined by the dependency groups between pieces structured initially in dependency groups on horizontal and vertical Either in horizontal dependency group or in the vertical one the pieces can be grouped in free pieces pieces aligned to stripe and plaid or independent groups The pieces edited as free pieces can be placed anywhere on the marker If some pieces are set as pieces aligned to stripe and plaid they will be placed with the matching point on the stripe line of the horizontal or vertical group If two pieces are set as part of a group other than free pieces group or the group of pieces aligned to stripe and plaid those two pieces will be dependent only between them according to the matching point placement the first piece can be placed on any position on the marker and the second piece will be placed according to the first one For the double mirror pieces to appear identical on the product they have to be included in both horizontal and vertical dependency groups To define dependency groups for the pieces in a model click on Edit Edit piece dependency groups piece group dependency button in the upper menu Thus Edit dependency groups window is opened 304 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer In the left side of the Edit
47. x distance from mid front to the dart 11cm y dart width 8cm H point coordinates x distance from mid front to the dart 1cm x 12cm E 0 60 D 25 60 y 0 l Y 355
48. 0 key from the pointer How to end up digitizing using the direct method Click on B key from the pointer to end up a pattern digitizing Click on F key from the pointer to sign out from the Digitizing mode How to end up digitizing using the sticker After the pattern digitization is finished place the pointer over the STOP label then press the 0 pointer button To digitize another pattern click again on START To exit the digitization process press EXIT 128 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer After contour technical elements and pattern name digitization click on STOP label The STOP command acts only on the current pattern while the program remains in DIGITIZE mode To digitize a new pattern click again on START To exit the DIGITIZE mode click on STOP button for the last pattern and then click on EXIT 1 8 7 Edit the digitizer settings profile Due to multiple different settings for different digitizers EuroCAD Pattern Designer allows you to set a new digitizer type If you have different digitizers e g if you have bought a digitizer together with another CAD system you must set the Digitizer Profile Geneval Design Technical Digitizer Plotter Keyboard Server E You can set the digitizer profile in Didier gerard sa the Settings window of EuroCAD Nees ets coe rarer New prale Pattern Designer in the Digitizer me ew poi
49. 1 12 2 or you can load an already saved size set In the near example you can see how to adapt a skirt obtained by direct design for automatic grading we have considered a size set from 42 to 48 with the following dimensions body length waist length hip length skirt side seam and bottom Edit size set cm ux ine ee eee ee ea ee Edit size set Dimension step fo e JV Hide unused grading sets Size J Many grading groups can include the same size J Generate automatically JV Made to measure size J Use separator Description Size setname DIMENSIONS FOR LADIES Size set description Accept Exit After entering the size set you must mix the parametrical and the piece layers by the interactive mix view cursor thus you must have the parametrical layer in front and you click the GEOMETRIC button Parametrical design for the front piece 1 You must create the point P1 by a click on the Free point button this point will be defined as the front mid point from the waist 2 You must create the point P2 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the point on the product hemline from the center front This point is created at a distance x 0 and y Lpr 1 cm from the point P1 Lpr product length 3 You must create the point P3 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the point on the product hemline from
50. 2 then select the contour the french curve to be added on between the 2 selected points 3 Yiew french curves side seam front After these steps the View french curves window armhole front neckline front appears where you can visualize the list library of french curves Initially no french curve from the list is selected If you select one of the french curves from the list on the left side you can view it on the right side of the window You can also see the shape of the piece updated with the new contour The selected french curve can be flipped horizontally Flip X or vertically Flip Y to be added in the desired position on the piece To add the selected french curve on the piece press Ok button If you do not Flip 2 Flip want to add the french curve on the piece press Cancel button Ok k Cancel After pressing Ok button the piece contour between the 2 selected points takes over the shape of the selected french curve Attention after adding a french curve on a piece the points of the new contour will not be graded 70 DCAD User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer The dimensions of the piece which the french curve is added on does not have to be the same with the dimensions of the piece which the french curve was extracted from If the pieces used for extracting and adding french curves have different dimensions the dimensions of the added french curve will be c
51. 45 47 49 51 Edit size set 155 160 164 167 169 171 173 175 177 i ss i AA In the Edit size set window in the button bar you M Many grading groups can include the same size Spread must select the Load a size set from file F2 M ats button in order to open the window to select the Description Size setname SET MAS DAMA MTM size set Size set description a1 E Ci LJ i EJ i L a 1 1 1 t L L iy t In the Size set selection window you must choose the path on the hard disk and the file that contains the size set to be loaded Here you can preview the sizes in a size set their name and details After you select the size set you must click on the Accept button 297 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Edit size set cm In the Edit size set window the new size set is loaded together with the new quotes When you click on the Accept button the pieces in the project are regarded according to the new size set and the new quotes By the simple size set loading the project will be sae resized and graded so as it will correspond to the ieee r new quotes Description Size set name Dimensiuni de produ l Size set Dimensiunile lungim Sa informative BEL Cotele de produs cai 1 12 9 Made to measure size How to create an atypical size or the work on demand For any model created by parametrical des
52. Accept Exit __ _ Description Size set name women shirt Gize set women shirt basic pattern description User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer After adding a quote you must insert the values for each size You must click in the boxes that correspond to each size and you must type the values for each of them If the quotes values have a constant increase decrease step you don t need to edit the values for each size You must enter the quote for a single size and then set the quote step near the Dimension step and click on the button Spread with a value the selected dimension After you click this button the quote values will be calculated and displayed automatically for all sizes ATTENTION in case when sizes are combined and between these sizes for a certain quote the step is not constant cannot be used the method of writing the quote step but will be necessary to input the value for each size in corresponding field To delete a quote in a size set you must select one of the corresponding values then click on Delete the selected dimension from the size set button In the same editing window you can enter the size set name and description in the Size set name and Size set description fields 202 T D as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Save and load a size set Rix After all sizes are introduced and their names completed the size set can be
53. Add a French curve to the selected pattern Activate the Add French curve to pattern contour function from Draw tool mode Move the cursor in the position where you want to add the new French curve from the French curve collection and make a click This point position can be established by giving precise coordinates using the right docker The View French curve window becomes View french curves displayed after indicating the points From this eee window the user can select the desired French curve E When opening the window none of the French w Blouse back arm whoe curve is selected When one of them is selected you FEM S RER EE can see its shape in the right side window and in the ore Blouse front neck whole W Blouse back neck whole same time the piece will have the French curve shape YW Blouse collar stend curve in the selected section The chosen French curve can be used as it was saved or you can use it flipped on X or Y In the View French curve window besides flipping the French curves you can make some other operations like delete and rename move up or down a ial Rename Up Flip Flip French curve see 1 6 28 Chapter Click on Ok button to apply the selected French curve on the pattern If you want to quit applying the French curve click on the Cancel button au oll een cue k Frm u After applying the function by making a click on Ok button the piece
54. CN o ae ae a fag 375 os 270 075 a oze 1 10 6 Operations on the grading table a How to modify a value in a box The values in the grading table can be modified directly You must click on the box where you want to change a value type the new value then press ENTER key or click on Accept button The changes will be applied automatically and the new grade sizes are displayed 0 6 TA ia on UG 1 2 0G 1 24 U1 ts A Nt 124 Es E b How to select multiple boxes in order to modify the values simultaneously If you have to change the values simultaneously in multiple boxes in order to have the same value you must click on each of them while Hold down holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key If you hold down the SHIFT SHIFT key all the boxes between the first and the last clicked in the column will be selected If you hold down CTRL key the boxes will be to select multiple boxes in a column by selected one at a click randomly The selected boxes will have a clicking on the first and the last box green background After the boxes are selected you type the new value then press ENTER key ATTENTION while typing the new value it appears only in the first selected box After you press the ENTER key the value appears in all selected boxes c How to modify all values in a column simultaneously For a fast selection of all boxes of a column you must click in the box on top of the c
55. Ci You can draw a new point PN at a distance D from the point PA located on the circle CA and measures clockwise or counterclockwise In the near example it was drawn the point P3 on the circle C1 at a distance D from the point P2 clockwise The distance must be always a positive number Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point F28 at 12 em from point FiS on the circle Cl measured Parallel to line clockwise To draw a new point by this function you must assign the following parameters the circle CA the point PA the distance D clockwise counterclockwise option You can build two new points PNA and PNB that define a parallel line at a distance D from the line defined by the points PA and PB The points P3 and P4 define the parallel line to P1 P2 placed at a distance D to the left or to the right side from the last selected reference point Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create two new points P29 and F30 that define a parallel line at the distance 4 om from the line defined by points Pils and Fi4 on the left side Point on tangent to circle You can draw a new point PN at a distance D on the tangent in the point PA at the circle CA clockwise or counterclockwise The point P3 was placed at a distance D on the tangent in the point P2 at the circle C1 The function parameters are the reference points
56. Designer as B How to use chord pointer buttons to digitize a piece H LON ANV LNIOd Javas LNIOd AAYND AILNANODAYS GAllddV l LNIOd LYVLS LNIOd 3AV H9 LYVLS NOLLNG LYVLS NO A9119 NYsaLLVd JHL ONIZILISIG 3X0444 SLNIOd SAND gt a LNIOd AJAYNND H LON ANV LNIOd SAYNND GO SO O Java pp LNIOd TVOINHOAL YOIMSLNI dallddV SIXY NIVED NO MONO LSY JAV a ON OOOO O 000 OO INIOd bn LNIOd BAN LNIOd aavuo INIOd JAUNO SIENS a3JAYYVN LSV1 OOO o 354 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Appendix 03 Application Assigning XY coordinates for a front skirt pattern WC waist circumference 74cm HC hip circumference 96cm PrL product length 60cm Y dart value 2cm dart width 8cm rK12 0 F 10 0 x A 0 0 B 21 5 1 in A point the XY coordinates system is attached x 0 y 0 B point coordinates l x WC 4 1 2 21 5cm where 1cm quote G 11 8 to move lateral sewing line backward y 1 correction value for waist line on hip direction E C points coordinates pC x HC 4 1 25cm 25 18 y distance for hip measurement 1cm y 19 1 18 D point coordinates x HC 4 1 25cm PrL 60cm E point coordinates x 0 y PrL 60cm F point coordinates x distance from mid front to the dart 1cm 11 1 10cm y 0 G point coordinates
57. Draw a new pattern CLICK CLICK a DEA DN DAANA np Repeat previous operation at each click a Move the cursor to new point will be added the next point and During the drawing click with the left process the user can mouse button choose any function from draw tool mode mentioned above Click with the left mouse button in a free workspace area The first point is set Click on Draw free or assisted with points and lines button To end pattern drawing Close pattern contour by clicking on the first point If you click the right mouse button the pattern contour will remain opened and the pattern will stay unfilled 74 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Finish the drawing of a new piece R A z Y Bi s Right click Z 1 choice finish drawing by pattern contour closure you 2 choice finish drawing without pattern contour closure must continue the drawing to reach again the first point click with the right mouse button after inserting the last when the cursor overlaps the first point near it appears point the piece contour will remain opened and the piece the perimeter closure symbol click on the first point will stay untilled to close the piece it will fill with the default color 1 7 3 Continue to draw a piece A piece with an open contour unfilled can be continued by drawing new points and lines First enter the PIECE
58. Draw arc by 3 points Move the cursor to Make a click in the Move the create the third point and work area to create the cursor and make a make a click in the desired first point from the click to create the position An arc shape will pattern second point be drawn between the first and the last points Make a click on the Draw arc by 3 points button Make a right mouse click to end up the arc drawing In this case the piece contour will be opened and it won t be filled with color To continue drawing the piece with no interruption select another function from Draw tool bar The new element will be drawn connected to the arc created previously 1 7 11 Use CTRL SHIFT ALT keys to draw freely an arc by 3 points To draw more precise an arc you can use the CTRL SHIFT and ALT key You can draw the arc by constraining the absolute angle or the angle between the line defined by first and last drawn point and the third point position by keeping pressed one of these keys Keep CTRL pressed during drawing the arc to constrain the angle between the line defined by the second and third drawn point from 15 to 15 degrees related to the work space coordinates If you hold down CTRL key as you draw the last Hold down two points which forms the arc the line CTRL between the last drawn point and the next one as you draw for the next can be drawn rotated point to be directed under a only on fixed angles precise angle f
59. Import DXF and DXF AMAA files EuroCAD Pattern Designer program is able to import projects saved in DXF or DXF AMAA format DXF files Data Exchange files are used for patterns only and contain pieces for each size DXF AAMA files are accompanied by a RUL or TXT file These DXF AAMA files are used also for patterns only and they include only the pieces on the base size The grading rules for the pieces in a DXF AAMA file can be found in the RUL or TXT file The pieces in a DXF or DXF AAMA file can be imported on the seam line or on the cut line but never on both Sometimes the seam line can appear inside the piece but as auxiliary piece DXF and DXF AAMA files does not include information regarding the piece number and the fabric used In some cases there is some information regarding the fabric type but this information accuracy must be checked To import one of those file types Project Piece Shape Draw Garment Grading Check Settings Windows Help you must click on Import option L ees Role Ctrth ley Fy AIF in the Project menu A submenu ss PST project Ctr o er will open it contains the file types 1 Close project that can be imported by EurocAD VEY RIL EBs Ceres Pattern Designer In this list you fp Save Project ase O 00000000000000 must choose the file type to work l Gerber fies tmp with If you don t know the DXF file ib Export DXE tual Files Assyst Hes zip that will be imported you m
60. In MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode click on Assembly button The cursor will transform into selection cursor Click on the first matching point on the mobile piece to be pasted Click on the second matching point on the matching point to be pasted Click on the first matching point on the fixed piece that corresponds to the first point on the mobile piece Click on the second matching point on the fixed piece that corresponds to the second point on the mobile piece 258 aes User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer After selecting the 4 matching points the program rotates and translates the mobile piece for a perfect paste on the fixed piece The same function can be used to overlap two pieces 1 11 13 Overlapping points in different pieces MARRY In MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode you can move a piece without rotating it up to a point selected on the mobile piece overlaps on a selected point on a fixed piece cursor i In MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode click on Marry button H The cursor will transform into selection cursor Click on the matching point on the mobile piece that will be pasted Click on the matching point on the fixed piece that corresponds with the point on the mobile piece 259 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer After selecting the two matching points the program translates the mobile piece without rotation for a perfect paste on the fixe
61. Operations Transform to point Press Delete notch button in the lower part of the right docker Delete notch 1 9 5 Corner notch The corner notch is defined in a piece corner on a specified direction This type of notch can be defined only on seam allowance To add a corner notch you must first click to select the piece and to display the seam allowance Then click on the Create corner notch button and select the point that corresponds to the corner where you want to add the notch The corner notch will be created on the seam allowance that recedes or follows the corner according to the parameters set in parameters menu in the right side docker After you have created the notch on the right side docker appears the parameters menu Here you can define the notch length width type support line and the angle from the contour line according to the notch type Create a corner notch To create a notch first show piece allowance In order to do this click on the piece and than select the Show hide seam allowance button located on the first toolbar of EuroCAD Pattern Designer application Click on the Create corner notch button Click on the point that defines the corner where you will define the notch When the cursor is over a grade point near the cursor appears OK The corner notch will be designed on the seam allowance according to the parameter settings 140 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern
62. Pattern Designer realizes their symmetrization to obtain the final patterns EuroCAD Pattern Designer program considers a piece as symmetrical if it fulfills two conditions To have a declared symmetry axis The Symmetry half box in the piece properties to be checked To simplify the declaration process for a symmetrical piece when you declare the symmetry axis on a piece the Symmetry half option will be automatically checked At the final model verification before extracting the patterns for cutting it is better to verify if the mentioned conditions are fulfilled To declare the grain axis on a piece in GARMENT TOOL mode click on a piece to select it then click with the cursor on the contour segment over which the piece will be symmetrized then click on Create symmetry axis button IMPORTANT The segment that is declared as symmetry axis must be always a straight line Symmetrization cannot be done over a curved line Declare the symmetry axis for a piece In GARMENT TOOL mode click to select the Click on the contour segment chosen to be the symmetry piece on which you will declare the symmetry axis axis This segment MUST be a straight line Mirrored double piece j Piece designed on Internal seam line Piece designed on the external cut lire Piece auxiliary Create symmetry axis Click on Create symmetry axis button The symmetry axis was created and marked by a red dotted line A
63. T WS 30 degree CUNE A Fa ira vay 110 degree Curve 1 6 12 Add new point delete a point You can add and delete a point in Shape tool mode SMOOTH points There is a single tangent on the smooth point This tangent has two control points whose movements are symmetrical If the point separates a curve from a line then the control point from the curve side can move only along the line so as the corner remain smooth SMOOTH points can be used between 2 curves or between a curve and a line They cannot be used between 2 lines 90 defined cusp points The angle between the two tangents in a point or between a tangent and a line is fixed to 90 and is maintained independent from the control point movement These points can be used between 2 curves or between a curve and a line They cannot be used between 2 lines DECLARED CUSP angles The angle between two tangents or between a tangent and a line is fixed and maintained independently from the control point movement It is useful to create corners with complementary angles or 90 corners even if a curve starts from that corner These points can be used between 2 curves or between a curve and a line They cannot be used between 2 lines To delete a point click to select the point and then click the Delete selected points button or press on DELETE key A point can be rapidly deleted by a fast double click with the left mouse button After deleting a
64. The cursor in this mode is gt 1 10 1 Introduction To grade a piece you must specify either the increase decrease step for each grade point on the piece contour or the difference from the base size The contour lines and the curved points change the shape and position according to the grade points movements in order to create the modified shape for each graded size In each point grading table are stored grading rules in four tables corresponding to each category of sizes from Size Set and vice versa for each size category from Size Set is corresponding a table in grading point table A step by step point movement from a size to another is called the rule for grading point This rule can be memorized and edited using a grading table The elements of a grading table and their usage are described below 1 10 2 Size set To grade a model you MUST define the sizes set to be used for grading The size set is only a list of conventional names 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 small medium large extra large S M L XL XXL Naming the size does not involve the model dimensions These names are simply conventions for sizes and can be different according to a specific country or producer The most important part of a size set is the sizes name list EuroCAD Pattern Designer allows you to save other information related to these sizes as real model dimensions for each size on the set size distribution on grading groups with differen
65. The digitizer looks like a design table and can have various dimensions Near the digitizer you can find a tool called pointer that helps you follow the contour of the pieces to be digitized The digitizer is connected to a computer where EuroCAD Pattern Designer is installed and converts the geometrical shapes followed by the pointer and the technical elements declared by the user For details regarding the digitizer installation and configuration please refer to EuroCAD CAD equipment installation guide DIGITIZER IMPORTANT before use start the digitizer from the ON OFF switch in the backside lower left corner of the digitizer please check the connection with the computer SETTINGS AREA LIMIT OF THE DIGITIZING as f Digitizing table 115 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Positioning cross Green led for sign ii Red led that is lit cnec when the pointer is close to the digitizing surface To check if the digitizer 0 button for digitizing graded joints is on and functional watch the technical elements le ert 8 button for digitizing technical points green led to be lit also when and commands pocket type you get the pointer close to the 1 Dutton for digitizing curve poin 9 button for digitizing symmetry axis working surface the red led on 2 button for digitizing notches e f A button for starting to digitize a new the pointer
66. To finalize the pattern shape you must follow the same steps as for the direct design transform lines to curves define angles etc 1 12 7 How to adapt a direct designed product for automatic grading For the preexisting models that were created by direct design or by digitization you can create a simplified parametrical anchoring system used only for automatic grading Thus you can use the benefits of the automatic grading either on products that were not created by parametrical design To do this you must create a simple geometrical structure usually rectangular on which you must create for example only points of type center upper face center down face waist point hip point point shoulder to neck point shoulder to recess etc These points are created in a blink of an eye usually by geometrical functions type XY see chapter 5 3 design function 2 Basically the newly created geometrical points based on the quotes in the size set should overlap the corresponding points on the base pattern if the quote table is respected The corresponding points on the base pattern can be associated to these geometrical points Their grading is borrowed with the geometrical points movement IMPORTANT if the position of the geometrical points that are created based on the quotes does not correspond to the point position on the pattern it means that there is an error either on the original pattern that does not respect the quotes in the table or
67. a parameter to another you may press the Enter key or to select the function to be completed by a mouse click Points If one of the parameters in the function is a point e g point at X Y from another point and you want to edit such a parameter you must click to select the chosen point in the script area alternatively you must complete the full name in the lower field in the Description of the selected geometrical operation window and then you must press the ENTER key to edit the next parameter To switch from parameter edit to another you can simply select another space to be completed instead pressing the Enter key If the used function has a point as parameter and it is completed by selecting the point in the script area you will not need to press the Enter key while the next space to be completed in that function will be selected automatically Values If you want to edit a value for a specific parameter of the selected function you must click on that parameter and to complete the field in the lower part of the Description of the selected geometrical operation window with the desired value Quotes To use a quote or a measurement in the measurement table as parameter for a function you can choose from two options 1 you may click on the space marked by a red line where you want to input the quote and you will edit by the keyboard in the lower field of the Description of the selected geometrical operation window
68. a standard width of 10 mm on the whole piece perimeter The width of the seam allowance on specific segments can be modified To modify the width of the seam allowance on a contour segment enter the GARMENT TOOL mode click on the piece click on Edit seam allowance button Then click on the contour segment on which the seam allowance width has to be modified In the box on the upper side menu type a new value for seam allowance width The new width is applied on the contour between the two grade points The seam allowance can be of three types fixed variable or step Change the width of the seam allowance for a segment In GARMENT TOOL mode click on the piece then click on Edit seam allowance button 10 Corner type Seam allowance typ width T zj f fixe C variable step ir emi Click on the segment on which the seam allowance width has to be changed Check the seam allowance type fixed variable or step and fill in the corresponding values for chosen seam allowance then press the ENTER key The new seam allowance width is applied on the contour segment between two grade points The operation can be repeated for other contour segments On these segments the new seam allowance can be larger or smaller then the standard value of 1 cm Fixed seam allowance A segment has a fixed seam allowance if the latter width between the two segment points remains the same Create change the fixed seam allow
69. actions NOTCHES add delete distance change grade point change angle change length change DARTS define delete close open rotate cutting on dart edit the dart cut line transform the dart to fold and reversely from fold to dart FOLDS define delete GRAIN AXIS create delete rotation change position and length change TEXT AXIS create an axis on which size and name of the piece will appear CONTOUR inner contour translation rotation change parallel to the contour cutting on parallel or on translated contour LINES free or dependent create delete position change angle grade point distance piece cutting following a line SEAM ALLOWANCE change allowance width on each contour segment change finishing type for seam allowance on corners SYMMETRY AXIS define delete INDEPENDENT POINTS define delete position change dimensions rotation symbol type grade point buttonhole pocket dart peak hook hole fastener button etc In GARMENT TOOL mode some technical elements could be hardly visible EuroCAD Pattern Designer facilitates the specific actions by emphasizing the technical elements While cursor is placed over the technical elements near it appears the specific element type For example if near the cursor appears NOTCH this means that the cursor is over a notch and this notch can be selected by a simple click on it 131 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 2 Create a notch
70. any parallel from the existing patterns 5 x To use this type of magnetizing you must activate the last function from the Advanced magnetizing list When this function is active if you will keep pressed the Ctrl Alt key combination all parallels to the contour from all patterns will become active The next drawing or repositioning operation can be made using these active parallels 113 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer If you are in Draw tool mode and you are using the advanced magnetizing presented previously together with the drawing constrained to the next point or to the next line you can notice that beside the parallels there are also some points active points displayed on the parallels These points represent the intersection between the trajectories that the next drawn point can have with the parallel 114 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 8 DIGITIZE mode DIGITIZE mode is used to convert the printed or cut patterns on the computer for this purpose you will need a digitizing tablet In this mode you will not work with the mouse or keyboard but with the digitizing table and the digitizing pointer To enter this mode click on DIGITIZE button in the left toolbox The cursor in this mode is 1 8 1 Digitizer The digitizer is a tool that helps you convert the printed or paper patterns into an electronic form
71. as you draw the arc points and the next drawn point will be attracted and overlapped on the points from other pieces __ Click Hold down ALT as you draw to overlap the next point on the existing points on other pieces You can use an arc created by three points if you want to enlarge the neck whole The arc points will be overlapped over some shoulder points and an internal point Keep Alt key pressed to overlap perfect the arc points over the front side points 84 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 12 Draw arc by three points using precise quotas and dimensions Warning the quotas and formulas refer to the line determinate by two drawn points and not to the curves dimensions placed between the two points There are two ways to create an arc by three points A Precise the length and the angle for the arc lines defined by the first and second drawn point and for the lines defined by the second point and the third point The defined angle can be related to the workspace coordinates or related to the line determinate by the first and the second drawn point Constrain to the next line Or B Precise the vertical and horizontal coordinates related to the piece origin or related to the last drawn point for the next drawn point Constrain to the next point A Draw arc thru three points by constraining to the next line Set properties for Check the next line option from the right side menu to
72. between the trajectories that the intersection point might have and the next drawn point position according to the settings that you have made for the next point 112 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 34 Contours magnetizing rede points Intersect points internal points Contours atom Paralals If you want to place or reposition points according to the other patterns contour you must activate the Contours function from the opened list Keep Ctrl Alt pressed when you want to apply this function to be able to link the new point to the other patterns contour Apply Clase To use this function you must activate the fourth option from the Advanced magnetizing window If you will keep Ctrl Alt key combination pressed when this option is active all the patterns contours will become active and you will be able to use them to place the next point The next drawing or repositioning operation can be made using the active contours Advanced magnetize 1 7 35 Parallels magnetizing Graded paints Interseck ponks If you want to place or reposition points according to the other Internal points patterns contour you must activate the Parallels function from the opened list Keep Ctrl Alt key combination pressed to be able to use this type of magnetizing When this key combination is active you can apply this type of magnetizing on
73. can be placed anywhere on the workspace To add a measurement to the table you must perform the following steps Display the watcher by a click on the Show hide measurement table Perform measurement for perimeter direct distance between two points or for angles see chapters 1 11 1 1 11 2 and 1 11 4 Just after measurement while the results are still displayed in the upper menu click with the right mouse button on a free row in the watcher If the added measurement is a composed measurement made with SHIFT or ALT SHIFT keys and can not be added in the selected field it will be automatically insert in the last free row Near the mouse cursor appears a small menu in which you will click on Add measurement option In the table will appear the measured values for the base size and for the graded sizes on the corresponding table columns If you must operate an important measurement to be kept for printing in the product technical sheet click in the box where the measure name must appear in order to insert the specific name To delete a measurement from the table click with the right mouse button on the row where the measurement is displayed Near the cursor appears a small menu in which you have to click on Delete measurement option Add a measurement to the watcher 232 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Measurement table cm ee E ea 101105 Check on the first column boxes to print the selecte
74. can include the same size Generate automatically E gt i Accept button to save the last changes Made to measure size P Use separator Description Size set name man sack coat Size set MSC description Accept Exit After you have clicked on the Delete a size at the beginning or ending of an existing size set a warning window will open The message warns you that some of the grading steps will be loosen If you want to accept the changes make a click on Yes button if not click on No The deleted sizes will not be displayed anymore in the right side menu and the remaining sizes are not influenced by the deletion of the extremes 1 10 17 Cancel a point grading Cancel the grading on a model You can cancel the grading into a point only for the active table in addition before starting to cancel grading into a point you will have to set as active table the table for which you need to cancel grading After activating the table pick up the Cancel the grading of the selected points and then follow the message from the new opened window or from the left bottom screen if the setting Show function steps is unchecked To cancel the whole model grading click on Cancel grading button Activate first the grading tables from where you want to cancel grading 237 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer KERTA Click on the point to cancel the grading You can
75. cancel changes you must click on Quit button nacte To fill info on the selected pattern in Pattern mode Ausiliary piece you must click on Pattern information button Piece information table Piece infa Pace macaca OOO O A window opens Here you will fill the needed poen is cominued 2 em in font from ihe information If you want the info printed in the pattern file half eyr malical mack see chapter 1 12 2 you must click on yea i Cot i Accept button If you want to cancel the introduced data you must click on Quit button IMPORTANT All these information are important and must be considered consequently Any mistake made in these options can seriously impair pattern printing and cut planning operations 1 5 28 Multiple pattern properties visualization and modification in the same table In PATTERN mode you can visualize and change properties for multiple patterns at the same time in a specific table called Pattern properties In the right side docker click on Pattern information table button If no pattern was previously selected this table contains the properties for all patterns in the current project If only a pattern is selected then in the table you will find only the properties for the selected pattern If you want the table to display only the properties for some patterns e g only the patterns from the base material the
76. desired grading rules the number of selected points in which you are copying the grading rules must equal the number of memorized grading rules the destination point selection order must correspond to the order or the origin point selection warning ee x If the number of selected points is The number of grading tables From the loaded File is different different from the number of saved From the number of selected points to which the tables are meant to be assigned tables in the file you will be warned by a This grading File will not be loaded message and the grading load will not proceed 217 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Select as active one of the four point grading tables of the reference point by selecting one of the four activation buttons from toolbar in Grading mode Select the origin points for grading copy You can select multiple points by click and drag a selection rectangle of by holding down the SHIFT key while you click on the points After selecting the points press Copy point grading in clipboard button or the CTRL F key combination to memorize the grading rules Select the origin points for grading copy You can select multiple points by click and drag a selection rectangle of by holding down the SHIFT key while you click on the points The selection order for the origin points is important for grading rule copy while it must correspond with the selection order of the desti
77. digitizer from the ON OFF switch in the backside lower left corner of the digitizer please check the connection with the computer To check if the digitizer is on and functional watch the green led to be lit also when you get the pointer close to the working surface the red led on the pointer is lit Now the digitizer is ready to use If something does not look to work please check the cables the digitizer ON OFF switch and the pointer to be plugged in the right place At the first use for the EuroCAD wired digitizer it must be configured according to the user manual This operation is done once on installation Enter the DIGITIZE mode If the digitizer is plugged correctly then you will hear a short beep thus the digitizer informs you that it is ready to use If the digitizer is not connected or the computer connection fails an error message will appear on the screen Check connections and restart procedure After entering the DIGITIZE mode and the digitizer is connected you will not work with the mouse or keyboard anymore now you will use the digitizer To supervise the correct piece conversion by digitization we recommend Place the monitor to be at least partially visible from the position the user takes while working on the digitizing table Computer speakers to be turned on in order to hear the messages from the EuroCAD Pattern Designer program during digitization 353 User manual EuroCAD Pattern
78. distance and dart angle If you have chosen for an automatic dart creation must check the box near Dart message you must decide if ete ah ce T the new dart will be automatically declared or not If you have decided to create a fold then you can also set in this window if the fold will be closed clockwise or counterclockwise C Folded dart t Geuriercdockiwise 156 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Dart opening The bulge type is Dart Unprocessed contour M Automatic creation E Smooth contour Faded da i Dart Clockwise Folded dart Counterclockwise Bulge is done with Angle degrees f Distance lo pity Bulge settings The bulge type i Unprocessed contour I Automatic creation Smooth contour ie Dart e Gockwise Folded dart Counterclockwise Bulge it done with Angle f 0 degrees f Distance F E an Bulge settings x The bulge type iz Dart Unprocessed contour I Automatic creation Smooth contour Faldedda i Dart e Clockwise i Folded dart Counterclockwise Bulge is done with Angle i 0 degrees Distance 1 9 13 Operations on the dart dart rotation multiple darts If you know the value of the opening angle for the dart you must check the box near the message Angle and must fill in the value Then you must click the Accept button If you know the opening distance for the dart you must check the box near
79. distances the specified coordinates 1 7 6 Draw curves curves Draw free or assisted with points and PILCE In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you can draw curves To do this you must access Draw Tool and press the button Draw free or assisted Draw free or assisted with points and curves with points and curves Click with the left mouse button in a free workspace area A new point is set this will be the origin point of the new piece Move the cursor by moving the mouse to the next point and click again on the left mouse button After each cursor mouse movement at each left mouse click a new point will be applied and it will be automatically joined with previous by a curve Between last two points will be drawn temporary a straight line The shape of the curve will be defined by the last a added point 78 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Draw new piece CLICK CLICK YS Oh G E braw Free or assisted with points and curves a es CLIC KI AFAT Bil CLICK CLICK Click on Draw free or Click with the left Move the cursor Repeat previous operation at each assisted with points and mouse button in a free to the next point and click a new point will be added curves button workspace area The click with the left Between drawn points will be created first point is set mouse button curves To end piece drawing Close piece contour by clicking on the
80. draam isurre Last drawn cure B1 rca Cure J ye es rt eye Sk j a E fi P Lasi dawn pairi f E LEE LA F Last drawn Lat draam point paint B Draw a curve by constraining to the next point Set properties Por next line For a computer assisted drawing based on the parameters of the next point you must check the next point option in the right side menu Set properties for After you check this option the specific option boxes are activated and you can enter the coordinates for the new point according to the piece origin or to the previous point eich There are two options to set the next point position X Y coordinates from the piece origin point displacement dX dY from the last placed point Draw a new point on specified Draw a new point by setting the coordinates from the piece origin distance from the last placed point Paint Paint aee ki cm sd 16 7 yo B42 After entering the coordinates click on Apply To draw a new point on the specified coordinates cm cm dx J45 cm dy 44 cm Apply sia To create a point based coordinates from the piece origin click with the left mouse button in one of the boxes that corresponds to X Y axes enter the coordinates for the new point and then click on Apply button A new point will appear on the workspace on the specified coordinates To create a point at a distance from the last placed point click
81. draw assisted by computer constraining to the next line When the next line setting is checked the fields where you can complete the angle and the length becomes active Setting the angle for the next segment defined by the first and the second drawn point which defines the current drawn arc Set properties fo 0 next line C Next point M Badius f Absolute To the previous line Check the Angle setting and then fill with the angle value the corresponding field Press Enter after completing the angle Check the Absolute setting if the angle is defined related to the workspace coordinates and the To the previous line setting if the angle is defined related to the line defined by the first and the last drawn point When the cursor returns in the work space the line determinate by the first and the last drawn point which defines the current drawn curve will be constrained according to the given angle and the next point to be drawn slides along this direction Setting the length for the next segment defined by the second and the third drawn point of the current drawn arc Set properties fo f next line C Nest point C Radius Degrees f Absolute To the previous line fv Lenght fi 34 Cm Apply Check the Length setting and then fill with the desired dimension for length the corresponding filed After this press Enter to validate the given dimension When the cursor r
82. drawing The old piece points will become magnetic and will attract the new points to overlap them on 76 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 5 Draw a line using quotes and precise dimensions For a precise pattern drawing with exact quotes you have two options A for the next drawn line you will be able to set the length and angle according to system coordinates or to a previous line Set properties for next line or B for the next point you draw you will be able to set the X and Y coordinates to the piece origin point or to the last placed point Set properties for next point A Draw with coercion to the next line For a computer assisted drawing based on the parameters of the next line you must check the next line option in the right side menu Coerce to After you check this option the specific option boxes are activated and you can enter the length and Set the length for the next line Aah the angle and length for the next angle for the next line Set the angle for the next line Set properties tor next line O next point de W Angle 23 Angle Absolute degrees To the previous line Length fo cm Apply Check Angle then type the angle value and press ENTER If the angle is set according to system coordinates you must check Absolute while if the angle is expressed from the previous line you must check the corresponding option Wh
83. during working process you must save Save project changes by clicking on the Save project button The program creates a backup file each time you save a project on a new name This file mj named backup of model_name PAT contains the previous project content Backup means a spare copy Thus if you have operated changes and then you have saved the project but you want to go back to the previous project state and content you may open the backup file 21 IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer EuroCAD Pattern Designer can automatically save the model at a predefined interval usually 2 3 minutes Even if the computer is blocked or resetting you will loose only the changes operated in the last minute max 2 minutes so as the changes can be easily recovered To avoid loosing a PAT file even if it was never saved an auto backup file is created At the first time save you must enter the project name on further saving the program will save changes in the same file If you want to save a file in a new folder in the Save window you must click on the button Create e new folder in order to create a new folder on the hard disk here you can save the PAT file ou Undo cancel last Undo cancel last changes and go back to the initial state operation If you want to cancel the last operation and to bring back the patterns on the state before operation then you must click on Undo button EuroCAD Pattern Designe
84. each pattern must have a specific name to help the user to identify the pattern and the category Pattern name is written in the upper part of the right side menu After you have entered the pattern name press ENTER key to apply changes The pattern name appears in the workspace overlapped to each pattern on the grain axis or on the text axis 1 5 28 Edit pattern properties If you want to operate changes on the patterns on the pre production step you must memorize important elements regarding the pattern itself In Pattern mode you must enter the following info for a pattern Piece name platca Fabric type ll fabric i Rotation restriction 180 t Flip restrictions Hone jw Rotate entire bundle Madificatio Piece properties S Feo Fe Fap hepp Ww Symmetric half iw Piece designed as internal seam line Piece designed as extemal cut line Cut on CNC M Ausiliany piece Piece information Piece information table 4 c4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Fabric type field will be filled with the fabric type for the selected pattern e g liner tweed etc Fabric type iner If the fabric type was already filled for one of the other patterns the specified mi fabric type can be found in the list that opens when you click on the small arrow near the Fabric type button Rotation restriction up to grain axis on pattern placement on the fabri
85. enter the size set name and description in the Size set name and Size set description fields 265 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 12 3 Explaining the workspace in the parametrical mode Generalities IMPORTANT in the parametrical mode you can only create and modify the anchorage parametrical layer Over this layer you must draw the patterns that will be anchored on the parametrical layer points by using the other design methods in the program Paapect Pee fee eer Geet Ga Omk Piby Gide Hep Oul oa Hl Go EE ANE FECES ee KE ASIN a See hea WORKSPACE BUTTONS FOR THE GEOMETRICAL DESIGN FUNCTIONS ee ees eee oe oe Foom point Pit CCAATE k paoe eel to che Hire defined bF prist fit ami W eale on this porceliel naw point PILO TT GTliGth G 5a gm Fra port ee e Pea he pd Pari sihir Fore erota piri Pant aY hore another pori Poet fhe her Gee pater Part a hr Fare arches pori iieii GEOMETRICAL OPERATION IE NRE DESCRIPTION AND EDITING AREA THE QUOTE LIST AREA 266 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer A The workspace The workspace is the area where the parametrical figures resulted from the design functions is displayed In the workspace you can visualize either the parametrical layer or the pieces layer or both layers superposed at the same time Mixing the parametrical and piece layers can be done by an interactive cursor mix view located in
86. group Group name ffront pocket 7 cea To introduce or to delete pieces in a dependency group you have to select the piece and to drag it by the mouse in the desired group tdi dependency groups ania Werosl Gy Free pieces CETT The unselected pieces or groups has the corresponding icons in yellow When l ras these pieces or groups are selected the icons become red PE at i waist band ourle plackel placket as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer ATTENTION If you want the same design on double symmetrical pieces then you have to assign these pieces in the same dependency group both on horizontal and vertical When you select a dependency group in the right side of the Edit dependency groups window the pieces in that group will be displayed together with their matching points and the horizontal or vertical alignment according to striped and plaid fabric L deponie pr x al E E EE a sew oa Operations that can be done on a dependency group If you click on the right mouse button on an added dependency group it will appear a menu with the following options add group delete group rename group If you want to add a new dependency group click to choose Add group option Delete group If you want to delete a dependency group click to choose Delete group
87. index names the user must press the Update indexes button in order not to be changed the existing grading Enter quotes for a size set dee Extra Add anew dimension in thes size set Ctrl ins To add quotes on a size set you must click on Add new dimension to the size set button Dimension mame A window opens here you will enter the quote name and its abbreviation Dimension nams chest perin Sheet name for dimension max 4 chars Attention It is important to fill in the abbreviation of PAHO maximum 4 characters If the abbreviation is not filled in the Accept button remains inactive Dimensioni type Length C Ange After filling in the quote name and its abbreviation you must click on Accept button To cancel quote naming click on Cancel button 201 es B Dimension step fo Edit size set Many grading groups can include the same size oo Soo Accept Exit Edit size set cm E V Use separator Size name IV Generate automatically Made to measure size Description Size set name Size set description 21x Edit size set Dimension step 4 e Size name lS Many grading groups can include the same size Iv G Spread with a value the selected dimension Made to measure size JV Use separator fi Description Size set name women shit description
88. interest point entry point 261 38 degree Segment length or Bezier curve length fo cm Point name In the field under the message curve angle tangent exit point the curve angle tangent exit point is measured counterclockwise In the field under the message curve angle tangent entry point the curve angle tangent entry point is measured counterclockwise To visualize and change a Bezier curve length click on the segment for which you want to know the specific size The segment 2egment length or length will be displayed in the right side bezier curve length docker Changing a Bezier curve size in this a He cm field is recommended only if you intend a fine adjustment You can enter a name for the selected point in the specific field Point name The Point name point name can have maximum 10 characters wast 52 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 6 9 Set piece origin in a point A piece origin can be moved in any point of the piece without any change in the piece shape Changing a piece origin from a point to another will induce the point coordinates recalculation from the new origin The origin point can be identified by the horizontal and vertical axis that crosses it Set this point as a piece origin The piece origin is located in the Then click on Set origin button in The piece origin has moved in the lower left point To move the piece the lower
89. lateral This point is created at a distance x Ps 4 3 7 and y 1 cm from the point P2 Ps hip length 4 You must create the point P4 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the center point from hip line This point is created at a distance x 0 and y Ls 1 cm from the point P1 Ls hip length 5 You must create the point P5 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the hip point This point is created at a distance x Ps 4 0 5 and y 0 cm from the point P4 Ps hip length 6 You must create the point P6 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the lateral hip point This point is created at a distance x Ps 4 0 5 1 38 and y 1 33 cm from the point P1 Ps hip length 7 You must create the point P7 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the first point of the front dart This point is created at a distance x Pt 8 and y 0 cm from the point P1 Pt waist length 295 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 8 You must create the point P8 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the second point on the back dart This point is created at a distance x 1 38 and y 0 cm from the point P7 9 You must create the point P9 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the peak of the front dart
90. measurement Move the cursor and click on the final eF Click point or notch to measure the distance The result for the composed measurement is Poa displayed in the upper side menu The V pensa inchisa ik measurements are made for all graded sizes ee Measured distances are displayed with red color on the contour pieces The distance 249 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer measured on the base size is displayed on black background while the distances measured for the other sizes are displayed on white background If the model has many sizes measurements the current table will not be able to show all in the sizes in the upper side of the screen In order to see all the sizes measurements on the edge of the table click left mouse button depending of the situation in the right or left side in order to role all the size measurements For a faster view of all the sizes measurement keep pressed left mouse button and the sizes will role continually 1 11 4 Show hide distances on the pieces If you want to dysplay the segments dimentions on the pieces you must activate the Show hide distances on the pieces function As long as this button is active you will be able to see its dimentions on the pieces To hide segments dimentions you must desactivate this function by making another click on the Show hide distances on the pieces button 200M Click on Show hide distances on t
91. next to be drawn arc The result will be an arc defined by two points and a starting angle Drawing a new piece click as is A tangent will be linked to the first drawn point Move the tangent by mouse drag to establish the starting angle into the desired position and then make a click to finish drawing the arc Move the mouse and make a click Make a click in where you want to Activate the Draw arc by two the work space to create the second points and arc button draw the first pint point An arc will be for the new piece displayed between the first and the last drawn point Make a right click to end up drawing the arc The piece contour will be opened in this case The piece won t be filled with color Select another function from the second tool bar in draw tool mode if you want to continue drawing with no interruption When the new function is selected the cursor remains connected to the last drawn point and the user can continue to draw by using the new function 91 c4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 20 Use CTRL SHIFT ALT keys to draw freely an arc by 2 points and angle To draw more precise an arc you can use the CTRL and ALT key By keeping pressed on of these two keys you can constrain the angle determinate by the line defined by first and the second drawn point and the work space coordinates Keep CTRL pressed during drawing the second point which defines the arc t
92. obthes with grading stepa C houl oreching steps wansfoemed into axis Seam lines If you check Separate pieces the seam line and the cut line will be defined as two separate pieces If you check Internal contour the seam line will be defined as an auxiliary piece inside the piece designed on the cut line Notches with grading steps Here you can choose the export mode of the graded notches if you will check the option export without grading steps all the notches will be exported without grading roles if you will check the option transformed into axis some of the notches will exported as text axis if you will check the last option not exported the notches with grading table will not be exported Attention It is recommended that when you export Notches with grading steps at Notches export mode to use the option transformed In DXF fie structure settings the user must define the settings related to the file header the polygonal lines design and file info You have also to define settings for points notches grain axis and other settings related to the grading elements layer Shrocture settings General General settings DYF file structure sallings DHF layer setting File heading settings Export heading tables Polline settings fe Doubs first point for cloched pobirat fe Cios pohines through leer Firat patama corta Seam line Cut ine
93. of the parametrical design by holding the SHIFT ALT key combination in order to magnetize these points You must anchor next the other points of the piece at the parametrical layer After anchoring on the parametrical design the piece is automatically graded the grading can be displayed or hidden by click on the Show Hide grading button 1 12 8 Getting a size set for a model that was created by parametrical design If you want to create models for a new size set and you already have a size set for those models you don t have to define a new parametrical layer You just have to load the new size set and the model will be automatically redimensioned and graded so as it will correspond to the new quotes For a correct transfer the new size set MUST contain the quotes used in the first step and must have the same abbreviations short names To load a new size set you must enter the GRADING mode and click on the Edit size set button in the button bar In the opened window you must click on the Load a size set from file button and then you must select the new size set and click on the OK button How to add a size in the Edit size set in GRADING mode Edit size set cm PS 30 31 5 33 34 5 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 5E 32 34 36 38 0 42 44 46 48 50 j5 24 5 26 27 5 29 30 5 32 34 36 38 245 26128 130132 laa l la la 1a I In GRADING mode you must click on the button 36 5 38 33 5 41 43
94. on the Copy button To select more steps in a script you must hold down the SHIFT key and click on the first and the last step for a continuous list selection or you must hold down the CTRL key and click on each step to be selected To select all steps in a script you must press CTRL A key combination To paste the copied step s in the script you must click to select the step over which you want to add the clipboard content and then click on Paste button Eal To delete the selected step and to copy it in the clipboard you must click on Cut button Che 1 12 4 6 Save or load a script A project script can be saved on the computer hard disk or on a storage media CD zip external FF drive SDcard if you click on Save script button To load a script saved on the computer hard disk or on a storage media CD zip external drive SDcard you must click on the Load script button t 1 12 4 7 What means the step colors Script steps 4 Mo Operation Draw de 4 Z eT eur k i Point ate from another point n Point at from another point ms Point at from another poje n 45 Parmrarsremraaher point a 46 Free point k 47 Font ater from another poirit ks Sido dineert a new operation here gt ni 43 Font atar trom another point n ao Free paint gt x wt in th Moin new step for which there is mno defined SOM parameters are design function not defined yet Green o indicates the
95. on the pattern During unfolding the program automatically adds notches in the fabric folding points button to display the unfolded pattern l l Folded pattern Temporary unfolded pattern 31 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 5 10 Unfold in a new pattern A folded pattern can be definitively unfolded by creating a new pattern On the new unfolded pattern the program automatically applies notches on the fabric folding points The new pattern can be modified and looses the properties of a folded pattern Click on button to definitively unfold in a new aha m pattern l l Folded pattern Definitively unfolded pattern by creating a new pattern 1 5 11 Extract the external cut line on a new pattern Click on Click on button to extract external cut line with gradings Usually patterns are designed on their cut line and the pattern cut line is obtained by adding of the seam allowance EuroCAD Pattern Designer automatically adds the seam allowance according to designer specifications regarding the corner width and finishing Sometimes you need to work directly on the pattern cut line that button to extract contains the seam allowance To do this you must select the external cut line pattern and click on a new pattern on the Extract the external cut line on a new pattern button if you want to extract the pattern without gradings or on the Extract the external cut line with gradings
96. option If you want to rename a dependency group click to choose Rename group option If you want to a subgroup to the selected dependency group click to choose Add subgroup option A new window will open and you can enter the name for the new subgroup to be added Add group After you have established the dependency groups and the pieces inside each group you must click on Accept button in the lower right part of the Edit dependency groups window If you want to cancel the creation of the dependency groups click on Quit button 306 es B Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 13 2 Edit the project technical sheets The project technical sheet contains auxiliary information that goes together with the pattern and the drawing of the final product The purpose of these data is to identify and group the model according to model name season client order designer and also to provide technical specifications regarding the product realization indications on the fabric accessories finishing process To edit the information in the product file click on Edit the project technical sheets The project technical sheet editing window is opened and you can enter the needed information in the corresponding fields In the project technical sheet editing window on the first page you can enter general information for the product on the other two pages you can enter drawings and technical specifications fo
97. overlap a point over another more precisely by magnetization User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 6 14 Point alignment vertical horizontal rectilinear The points on a piece contour can be aligned To align two or more points you must select them It is important to remember that the last selected point remains fixed and the other points will be aligned after it Point alignment is very useful to adjust and correct the digitized pieces Align points horizontall Align points verically Click on Align points vertically button Align points rectilinear On rectilinear alignment the first and the last point selected on the piece contour remain fixed while the other points are aligned on the line defined by the two points ar A BAA Align points rectilinear m Click on Align points rectilinear All points are aligned rectilinear Select the points gn p between the first and the last button selected points 56 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 6 15 Divide a segment in a given number of parts A line or a curve between two points on a piece contour can be divided in a pre established number of equal segments To do this click to select the contour segment to be divided in smaller parts and then click the Divide a segment in a given number of parts button A window will open there you must enter the number of parts maximum 20 then
98. pattern by 45 90 180 degrees ALT If you hold down ALT key while moving the rotation center you can magnetize it on any point so the point will become the rotation center To paste the rotation Using the rotation center magnetization by holding down ALT key is useful when you want center over other to check the pattern joining in a specific point points by magnetization In Pattern mode click to select the pattern click again for the rotation symbols to appear in the corners i Grab the pattern in the point to be pasted hold down ALT key and drag near the point of the destination pattern where you will paste the source pattern Zi User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer By magnetization the patterns will perfectly overlapping point over point Click to select the pattern rotation center and hold down ALT key then drag up to the point where you want the magnetization to occur Rotation center magnetization in the point where the two patterns are overlapped allows pattern rotation so as the joining can be checked 28 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 5 5 Resize patterns It is rarely used Patterns can be stretched or shrink or proportionally resized To resize a pattern click to select it hold down SHIFT key and drag the corner and lateral resizing points with the mouse If you drag the corner points the resizing process is proportional if you drag the lateral points t
99. pattern symmetrical will be built if you set a symmetry line to a pattern it will be automatically set as symmetrical half if you remove the symmetry axis the pattern becomes simple Multiple D is a pattern that appears many times identically in the final project without mirroring the resulting patterns Symmetrical flipped Fx Fy Fxy are patterns that appear many times in the final project but that are mirrored from the original pattern Pattern designed on internal seam line is a pattern with the contour representing the pattern seam line EuroCAD Pattern Designer will automatically add the seam allowance to this type of pattern before cutting and according to designer specifications Pattern designed on the external cut line is a pattern with the contour representing the pattern cutting line no seam allowance addition is needed generally the digitized patterns are checked as designed on the external cut line Auxiliary pattern is a pattern used only in the design step These patterns are not imported in EuroCAD Spread amp Cut Planner or EurroCAD Automarker programs Pattern type can be set in PATTERN TOOL mode Points A pattern contour is formed by multiple points connected by lines and or curves The points can be corners or can be located on curves and lines Each point has 2 coordinates on horizontal and on vertical from the pattern origin point Pattern origin can be any po
100. patterns to align the grain axis horizontally Interpolate all pattern segments Choose pattern color R ER a i a O a nE i a n er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 14 er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Extract the internal seam line with gradings Extract the external cut line with gradings Create seam line inside the pattern m SHAPE TOOL mode toolbar Join selected points and close pattern perimeter Open pattern contour in the selected point Set the selected point as CUSP Set the selected point as SMOOTH Set the selected point as 90 DEFINED CUSP Set the selected point as DEFINED CUSP ANGLE Transform selected curve into line Transform selected line into curve Convert polygon segment into Bezier curves to smooth contour Bezier interpolation for the selected segment Add a point on the contour Delete selected point Align selected points horizontally Align selected points vertically Align selected points rectilinear Divide segments in a given number of parts Round selected corner Rotate selected group of points around the last selected point Create a new point at a given distance from a selected point R R E E E E E E E E a a 15 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Rotate pattern until the line determined by the selected two points becomes horizontal Bulge pattern by cleaving and rotation between two points Bulge close Fullness A
101. piece Any grading from the copied piece that is not in the size set of destination model will be inserted for all pieces from the model The gradings that are in the model and are not in the copied piece will be automatically added on the copied piece For example if there are two projects first with the sizes 38 1 40 2 43 3 and the second with the sizes S 1 M 2 L 3 XL 4 and you need to copy one piece from the second model to the first one after copying the result size set will be 38 1 40 2 42 3 XL 4 All the time on the size set of the destination model will be added the sizes with different indexes from the copied pieces And all the time the copied pieces will be automatically graded on the sizes from destination model In the previous example because the number of sizes from the two size sets are different and because part of the sizes have the same indexes first three sizes from the second size set will take the name of the first three sizes from the size set of the first model destination model The fourth size will be inserted with it own name because in the size set of destination model does not exist any size allocated to this index All pieces from destination model will be graded automatically for the fourth size too XL 4 Another example is if there are two projects first with the sizes 41 0 5 and 43 1 5 with the base size 41 and second project with a combined size set 42S 42M 44S 44M the grad
102. point and then make a click on the 7 key from the pointer Pocket point digitizing Place the pointer on top of the pocket point and then make a click on the 8 key from the pointer You can set later the pocket length and angle from EuroCAD Pattern Designer application in Garment tool mode in the properties table from the right side of the screen see 1 9 22 chap 125 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Internal points digitizing using the sticker To digitize inner points move the pointer over HOLE on the Digitizer control panel then press the O pointer button Place the pointer over the inner point then press the 0 pointer button E Digitizing internal lines You can digitize the pattern internal lines directly using the 5 key from the pointer For this make a click with 5 key on each edge point from the internal axes that you want to digitize F Digitizing the auxiliary patterns In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you have the possibility to digitize the auxiliary drawings from patterns Click on D key from the pointer to start digitize an auxiliary drawing drawn on a main pattern The digitized auxiliary drawing will be automatically attached to the last drawn pattern After making a click on the D key you can start digitizing the auxiliary pattern as when you digitize a main pattern by following the pattern contour using the same buttons Any element that y
103. press Cancel button Extra index Basic colors Each new size inserted has a color assigned automatically in the Dimensions column These colors will be used further for showing the grading on HE si i im fl fal the screen for graded pieces contour l The user can change the color by clicking on the E E E E Oo i colored box and choosing a new color AE EE Egg 198 B JO se M t zlO0 es Ble Grade Drop Spec index alias index alias index alias linden _ amp aias 40 1 2 3 44 4 5 h 6 50 click for check uncheck sizes Edit size set Dimension step jo e check to hide unused sets size name Many grading groups can include the same size Generate automatically Made to measure size ia Use separator oOo Description Size set name Size set description e Ee Sa ae Delete the selected size from the size set Shift Del or alias inden alias index aos 40 Editing a combined size set h Edit size set Many grading groups can include the same size Made to measure size Define gade size pat Define drop size set Bm Delne spec size sel Defne extra size sel Use separator User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Size names can be composed by numbers and letters as shown in the picture Is important to know that this names are arbitrary different names can be used according to the cou
104. press the ALT key all graded points on the other patterns will be marked The selected point can be magnetized over any of the marked points Hold down ALT to paste the selected point by magnetization over other points Drag the selected point by moving the mouse up to the point where you want to paste the pattern While patterns are getting closer they are perfectly overlapped point over point by magnetization 1 5 4 Pattern rotation setting a rotation center magnetization of the rotation center 26 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer A pattern or a selected group of patterns can be rotated with the mouse Select the pattern and click on it once again the rotation symbols appear in the pattern corners and the rotation center symbol appear on the pattern The rotation center can be moved with the mouse in any position so as the pattern will rotate around that position If you Hold down drag the rotation symbols in the pattern corners you will rotate the pattern or the group of selected patterns around the rotation center CTRL While rotating a pattern to rotate it with exact angles 45 90 180 First the rotation center will be The rotation center can be moved to centered to the pattern another position the pattern will rotate around the new position To rotate a pattern by exact 15 hold down CTRL while moving the mouse You will be Hold down able to fast rotate the
105. script steps that determine the drawing of a geometrical element Rad o ss the steps marked in red has some parameters that are not defined yet Back marks a new inserted step for which there is no declared design function 270 c4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 12 5 Design functions 1 12 5 1 The list of the used design functions g E C ee a Eee E 6 Point on a vector reported to horizontal axis A parme O E S tame S E A fei pem E eee A e 271 es B U ser manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer mem Eee ere Eee Er ooo E aoe ES Ee Ete Ete E pame o pamane o Eater Eater coment gL Ee een 212 IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 12 5 2 How to complete a function To design a geometrical element you must choose the design function and then you must edit its parameters The editing of the function parameters will be done in the Description of the selected geometrical operation area in the spaces marked by red lines When you drag the mouse pointer over such region the cursor will become a hand An When you click on the space underlined in red that space will become underlined in blue in the lower part of the Description of the selected geometrical operation window will appear a field in which you may fill the value the points the quote or the formula required to calculate the selected parameter To switch from
106. select multiple points by circling and mouse drag or by holding down SHIFT key during selection The grading table for the point was cancelled all values has been deleted Click on Cancel the grading of the selected points button Obs To cancel the grading in the other grading table of a selected point select the active table select the point and press Cancel grading for points Attention When Cancel all grading function is selected from the menu that appears when the right arrow is pressed will be deleted the grading from all the patterns from the model the set size as well 1 10 18 Grading the internal technical points Grading the axes The technical interior points can be graded as any other graded point Click to select the piece select the technical interior point and click on the right mouse button to display the grading table By the same method you can grade the points that define the grain axis Even if the grading of the grain axis rotation seems to be useless it can be important to maintain this grain axis parallel to a specific contour segment that changes its position by grading This is illustrated in the following example nmm S You can grade an internal technical point or the axis points only for the active grading table Because of this e v Ioe w P aw you will have to activate first the table for which you want to grade the technical points After activating the grading table
107. selected patterns can also be moved by the keyboard arrows On each keyboard movement horizontally arrow press the patterns will move with 10 mm if you hold down CTRL while pressing or vertically keyboard arrows the movement step will be smaller 1 mm The step length can be changed in the Settings module To place the pattern origin in one of the grid points while dragging the object with the Use arrows mouse hold down ALT key This tip is very useful to paste two patterns in a single point To do this the points to be overlapped will be declared as origins for the two patterns to move patterns more accurately as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Hold down ALT to place patterns with the origin in a grid point The two pieces to be pasted Hold down ALT and drag each piece until the origins are fixed in 1 5 3 Pattern paste point over point In Pattern mode you can paste patterns point over point A faster and more efficient paste method point over point for two patterns is represented by the placement by magnetization using ALT key Grab the pattern from a point hold down ALT key and drag up to the point where the patterns will be pasted By magnetization the patterns will be perfectly positioned point over point In Pattern mode click to select the point to be overlapped This point will appear with a small red circle around it Hold down ALT key When you
108. step os m product length L pr JV Hide unused grading sets Size name I Generate automatically F Use separator Many grading groups can include the same size JV Made to measure size Description Size set name DIMENSIONS FOR LADIES Step 2 Define and design of the geometrical points in the descition ee Made To Measure module aay ra Before designing the geometrical points you must display the parametrical layer To do this you must get the interactive cursor mix view in the appropriate position see chapter 1 12 3 A P1 is a free drawn point you must click on the free point button to create the point P1 that will be considered as the mid point on the back from the waist From this point you must trace the waistline P2 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x 0 and y 20 cm from the point P1 From this point you must trace the hip line P3 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x 0 and y Lpr cm from the point P1 From this point you must trace the hemline P4 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance de x C s 1 and y O from the point P2 This point delimitates the mid front on the hip line P5 point created by a click on the poin
109. the cut line for each size These pieces will also have different grading groups In Assyst you may create intersection notches These notches cannot be created in EuroCAD Because you cannot create intersection notches in EuroCAD Pattern Designer when you import a piece that includes such a notch on the contour we recommend that you make the change in Assyst and then re import the piece Attention EuroCAD Pattern Designer can import only archive files ZIP format exported by Assyst Bullmer for Windows d Import native Lectra file iba si vet Native Lectra files have the extensions IBA VET or MDL and include projects and or pieces In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you can import IBA and VET files These files are used for patterns only and include all information from Lectra Project Piece Shape Draw Garment Grading Check Settings Windows Help New project Ctl h i a o o Al P The IBA file includes a piece with size set grading Open project Crl o ee internal lines and auxiliary pieces Such a file does Close project Ry i TA T m and how many times it appears in the pattern Obs For exported pieces to have auxiliary figures you must check Internal lines generation option form the export settings You can visualize the Sots es ae export settings from Lectra if you make a click on Cut Corley the sign from the front of Export garment option Capy from the File menu not
110. the dart is selected the cut line appears Dart Dart Dart Dart Properties Properties Properties Properties Angle 104 25 degrees Angle q degrees Angle 0 degrees Angle 104 25 degrees 1 In the dart list on the right side E docker click on the dart that will be perations Operations Operations Operations Edit cut line Edit cut line Edit cut line Edit cut line tempora rily closed for checking operation Rotation type Rotation type Rotation type Rotation type Clockwise Clockwise Clockwise Clockwise C Anti clockwise C Anti clockwise C Anti clockwise C Anti clockwise Dart 0 bs 04 25 CLICK Rotate dart Close dart Cut over dart Transform to folded dart 1 Delete dart Dart 0 104 25 Rotate dart Close dart Cut over dart Transform to folded dart 9 Delete dart Dart 0 104 25 CLICK i Rotate the selected c Cut over dart Transform to folded dart Dart 0 151 51 Dart 1 104 25 Rotate dart Close dart Cut over dart Transform to folded dart 4 Delete dart 2 In the box for angle values type O degrees in order to close the dart 3 Click on Rotate dart button 4 In the dart list the original dart will have a 0 angle and a new dart will appear The new dart has temporarily assumed the angle of the original dart 3 Delete dart The original dart was temporarily closed by clockwise contour rotation over the dart Rotation is done by cleaving the piece al
111. the internal seam line ao as graded auxiliary draw starting from the cut line To extract the seam line as auxiliary draw you must click to select the pattern and then click on the button JL Create seam line inside the pattern To create seam line Attention For an accurate accomplishment of this operation first you must set the seam inside the pattern allowance width for each segment in order to obtain the seam line ee E SE ee en ae New created e auxiliary piece Original pattern including the seam allowance Seam line created as auxiliary draw with grading 33 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 5 14 Cut off a pattern with another Trim Click on various operations on the patterns For TRIM operation you need to select two patterns that overlap partially The first selected pattern will be the source pattern and the second one will be the trimmed pattern target object The source object trims button to cut off a the part of the target object it overlaps pattern with another To obtain complex models with patterns derived from base patterns you can execute Ln s a a Click to select a pattern Hold down SHIFT key Click on Cut off a The result is a trimmed the first selected pattern and select the second pattern with another pattern will be the cutting pattern pattern target pattern source blue Click on button to intersect two patterns
112. the next point or related to the work space coordinates are the same You have two possibilities to enter the coordinates of the next point of the curve 1 X and Y coordinate relative to piece origin point 2 dX and dY coordinates relative to last entered point Adding a new point of the arc Adding a new point of the arc using coordinates relative to the piece using coordinates relative to the last origin point entered point Pune x flO em yo gan K dx fio cm dr 20 cm Aplica To add a new point using To add a coordinates relative to the piece origin coordinates relative to the last entered point you have to click with the mouse in point you have to click with the mouse X or Y fields enter the coordinates of in dX or dY fields enter the the new point and press Apply button coordinates of the new point and press The new point will appear on the screen Apply button The new point will at the coordinates entered by the user appear on the screen at the coordinates entered by the user new point using 1 7 18 Draw arc by two points and radius by constraining to the radius Check the Radius option after creating first two arc points to constrain the thirds point to a given radius When the Radius setting is checked the radius length field becomes active You can insert here the radius dimension for creating the next arc Check Length setting and then insert the r
113. the point position on its contour You can move the point by mouse drag by the keyboard arrows or by the precise coordinates setting It is important to mention here the difference between the graded points and the curve points movement If you move a graded point then all the curve points on the two sides of the graded point will be moved symmetrically on the pattern contour so as the pattern shape is conserved At the same time the tangent control lines for the Bezier curves are changing symmetrically to the curve length so as the shapes will be conserved 49 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer J When you move a graded point the adjacent curve points are moved automatically up to the next graded When you move a curve point the other points remain point The shape defined by the curve points is on place so the pattern shape changes conserved These rules regarding graded or curve point movement are the same both for the mouse dragging and for the position setting by keyboard arrows movement or coordinates setting 1 6 5 Moving a point by mouse drag use ALT CTRL or SHIFT A point can be rapidly moved by the mouse To do this you must enter the Pattern or Shape tool mode The movement is done directly by mouse drag To make this movement more accurate hold down CTRL key that will limit the point movement to vertical or horizontal direction If during point movement you hold down SHIFT key the point will m
114. the pointer on top of the grain axis and click on C a cas l n button from the pointer to digitize the first point of the grain a ie eunon j om the pointer to digitize the second point of the grain axis ll nd method for digitizing the grain axis using the sticker Place the pointer on GRAIN AXIS Divas pi ald ele carl a Place the pointer on the ending and press 0 pointer button g p point of the grain axis and press pointer button the 0 pointer button C Symmetry axis digitizing There are two ways to digitize the grain axis directly by placing the pointer on top of the segment which represents the symmetry axis and by making a click on the 9 button from the pointer Click first on the Symmetry axis button from the sticker using 0 key from the pointer and then place the pointer on top of the segment that needs to become symmetry axis and make a click using the same key from the pointer l st method for directly digitizing the grain axis Place the pointer on the segment that you want to become a symmetry axis and then make a click on the 9 key from the pointer 123 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer ll nd method for digitizing the grain axis using the sticker SYMMETRY AXIS Place the pointer on SYMMETRY AXIS and Place the pointer on the outline segment that represents the press the 0 pointer button symmetry axis and press the 0 pointer butt
115. the points P1 and P2 Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new segment Hetween points P40 and P42 The function parameters are the points that define the segment Circle defined by center and radius E You can draw a new circle CN with the center in the point PA and R radius The circle C1 was defined by the center P1 and the radius R a Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new circle Cl having the center in point Ple and a radius of 5 cm SE SS The function parameters are the point Pa the circle center the radius R If the circle center is defined you can hold the SHIFT key and the radius R value is assigned from the screen and 29 applied automatically in the operation text Circle defined by center and contour point E You draw a new circle CN with the center in the point PA and that crosses through the point PB on the contour The circle C1 was defined so as the point P1 represents its center and the point P2 is on the contour 285 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new circle C2 having the center in P40 and passing through the point The function parameters are the point PA circle center the point PB on the contour 30 Circle defined by diameter a You draw a new circle CN whose diameter i
116. to be selected must be the opening dart point on the piece contour When you move the cursor over a point that can be selected for this purpose an OK appears near the cursor now you must click on the left mouse button to select this point Then you must select the first fixed point that will be used for hinge When you move the cursor over a point that can be selected for this purpose an OK appears near the cursor now you must click on the left mouse button to select this point Then you must select the second fixed point that will be used as hinge When you move the cursor over a point that can be selected for this purpose an OK appears near the cursor now you must click on the left mouse button to select this point The last point to be selected will be the internal technical point This will become the dart peak and will define the dart depth and direction After selecting the points used to create a dart a new window opens here you can set the bulge type with the specific settings together with the dart angle and dart opening distance By this method you can also create a bulge that can be done with Unprocessed contour or with Smooth contour see chapter 1 6 25 If you have chosen for an automatic dart creation must check the box near Dart message you must decide if the new dart will be automatically declared or not If you have decided to create a fold then you can also set in this window if the f
117. to last entered point To add a new point using coordinates relative to the piece origin point you have to click with the mouse in X or Y fields enter the coordinates of the new point and press Apply button The new point will appear on the screen at the coordinates entered by the user To add a new point using coordinates relative to the last entered point you have to click with the mouse in dX or dY fields enter the coordinates of the new point and press Apply button The new point will appear on the screen at the coordinates entered by the user C Draw arc by two points and arc by constraining the starting angle A tangent will be linked to the first drawn point after drawing the first two arc points This tangent can be used to establish the starting angle for the current drawn arc related to the work space coordinates Check the next line setting from the right side menu to activate the field where you need to insert the number of degrees for the starting angle The arc tangent will be constrained according to the given number of degrees and the edge point from the tangent the next point to be drawn will slide along this direction First drawn point Set properties fo next line Shes point Were q Seb coercion bo the next point After you entered the coordinates of the new point press Apply button to see the new point on the screen at the entered coordinates
118. tool mode when you will try to reposition a point from the pattern contour according to other points position from the model patterns or in Draw tool mode when you want to draw a new point according to some other already existing points positions or according to the other patterns position 1 7 31 Graded points magnetizing If you want to create or reposition points according to some Advanced magretire E joj xj graded points positions you must activate the Graded points function from the opened list A new menu will open when this function is active in the right side of the window Using this menu mise pans j you can set the magnetizing type that you want to use from all Contours four existing Paraki Keep Ctrl Alt pressed when you want to apply this function to be able to see all points that you can use to magnetize in Note The last type of magnetizing that you have set can be used also when the Magnetizing window is closed and it can be used by keeping pressed Ctr Alt key pressed To use this type of magnetizing you must check first type of magnetizing from the right side of the Advanced magnetize window When this function is active if you will 1 keep pressed C rl Alt key combination all graded points from all existing Normal advanced magnetizing 4 j patterns will become active marked with lt lt Ctrl alt f grey crosses The next drawing or repositioning operation
119. unit we recommend the usage of a single decimal Cursor sensitivity During the design process the cursor overlapping over a selectable element point axis contour does not have to be perfect There is default 4 pixels some tolerance for the cursor during element selection If you increase this tolerance the selection process will be easier but with less precision If you decrease this tolerance the selection process will be more precise but the overlapping of the cursor to the selected element will have to be more exact Snap cursor sensitivity If you hold down ALT while moving a point you can perfectly overlap one point to another by magnetization effect Here you can select the default 2 pixels magnetization allowance for a point to be perfectly overlapped on another see chapter 1 6 5 The same precision will be applied while placing a piece with the origin on a grid point See chapter 1 5 2 Protection for mouse movement If you select an element point axis piece by a direct click it is 337 IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer possible that a sudden piece movement to happen by an accidental default 2 pixels mouse movement Here you can set a minimal distance for movements to be ignored Number of undo redo levels When you want to set more levels of undo redo you can obtain 99 default 10 levels levels Set piece name font size Here you can set the font size for the piece name default 8 pixels
120. which the new point will be placed Create a new point P4 on the line defined hy The distance D from the new point points Pil and Pe at S50 cm from point and the reference point PS on the right side The reference point To draw the point you must also define the direction right or left Attention the direction must be considered starting from the reference point To avoid confusions try first both variants then choose the correct direction Point on a vector reported to horizontal axis From the PA point you draw a line at U angle from horizontal on this line you create a new point Pn at a distance D In the near example from the P1 it was draw a line under U angle from the horizontal on this line it was created a new point P2 at a distance D from the P1 point B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation To draw a new point by this function you must From point PSO create a line at 30 degrees assign the following parameters angle reported to horizontal axis and create on this line a new point F54 at 10 ecm from reference point the first point m the angle from horizontal measured in degrees U the distance between the reference point and the new point D If the reference point is already defined you may hold down the SHIFT key and click the left mouse button at the current position the U and D values and the place
121. will be according to the Y axis of the coordinate system Because of that the measurements values introduced on the measurements table will be updated in function of the rotation of the pattern It is the same situation when the measurement is made from a piece to another piece starting point of z Can press the CTRL key for set the precise measurement direction After select the starting point of measurement if you press CTRL key the measurement can be precise directed from 15 to 15 degree The measurement result is displayed in the upper menu The program executes the measurement on the graded sizes too The distance measured on the base size is displayed on black background while the distances measured for the other sizes are displayed on white background If the model has many sizes measurements the current table will not be able to show all in the sizes in the upper side of the screen In order to see all the sizes measurements on the edge of the table click left mouse button depending of the situation in the right or left side in order to role all the size measurements For a faster view of all the sizes measurement keep pressed left mouse button and the sizes will role continually E E 22 05 a O1 24 98 24 97 25 oF i E TET 29 01 30 04 aL OF 247 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 11 3 Compose measurements After you have done one measurement on the contour or in straight line if you press SHIFT k
122. will select the first peak point of the second fold Select the first peak point of the fold Select the first bottom pomt of the fold Select the second bottom point of the fold Second pint that will form the second fold The user will select the second peak point of the fold RSS Select the first peak point of the fold Select the second peak point of the fold Select the second bottom point of the fold a Ca Third point that will form second fold The user will select the first bottom point of the fold 165 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Select the first peak point of the fold Select the second peak point of the fold Forth point that will form the second fold l Select the first bottom paint of the fold Select the second peak point of the fold Select the first bottom point of the fold Select the second bottom point of the fold The folds are completely First fold Second fold declared and the folding lines are visible 166 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Create a sequence of mixed folds In order to create a sequence of mixed folds it is necessary to declare in four points only the first fold For the next folds will be done a click only on the two points that declare the bottom of the fold The fold peak will be automatically set in the points that define the fold bottom If the user wants the next fo
123. with a declared symmetry axis will be displayed and printed Auxiliary pieces if you check this option the auxiliary pieces will be printed together with the main piece Choose the pieces to be printed If you have selected only part of the project pieces but you want to print all R Exportonly selected pieces pieces you must uncheck the message Export only selected pieces e Choose printing position Print settings f as displayed rotated 90 degrees If you work in overlapped mode you can choose to print pieces as displayed or rotated by 90 degrees f Save plotter settings Plotter export settings selec aei For the users that have acquired more than one plotter type you can save the plotter Defaut settings on a separate list Before printing you must choose the plotter from the list D Aplthactiwe After the result is displayed you must click on the Direct plot button if you want to print on a plotter or Export PLT if you TEA i af want to obtain a file with plt extension If you need to print many Number of copies j1 Direct plat copies of the same drawing then before clicking on the Direct plot button you must enter the number of copies in the box near the message Number of copies If you click on Export PLT button the program will save a file with plt extension on the hard disk this file can be sent for printing to any other plotter From thi
124. with the left mouse button in dX dY box enter the horizontal vertical distance from the last placed point and then click on Apply button A new point will appear on the workspace on the specified distances 1 7 9 Add a French curve to a pattern A French curve is a drawing tool composed by several curves with different shape and is used for drawing flat curves In Draw tool mode you have the possibility to add a French curve on pattern during drawing process This function is useful for an easy drawing of contours like armhole sleeve curve neck curve the shape of the side seam etc Before adding French curves on a piece a collection of the most used shapes has to be created This means that first the user draws the contours to be used later on other pieces and then he saves each contour in a library From this library he can always load the saved contours to use on other pieces Use the Extract French curve function from Shape tool mode as it is described in the 1 6 28 Chapter 81 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer To add a French curve on a pattern during drawing process pick up the Add French curve to pattern contour and select one of the two edges from the pattern and then the second one A new window will be displayed after selecting both points where you want to add the French curve called View French curves The user can select from this window the desired French curve shape
125. with the next seam allowance and the intersection of the next segment axis with the previous seam allowance as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer It is obtained by extending the bisecting line of the corner angle on a distance equal to the width of the next seam allowance Next Bevel It is obtained by direct union of the edge points for the seam allowance of previous and next segments Joined It is obtained by rounding at a user defined distance from the seam allowances intersection Rounded It is obtained by cutting the seam allowance with a line bend at a certain angle from the bisectrix and placed at a user defined distance from the angle that defines this seam allowance type It is obtained by intersection of the seam allowances of the previous and next segments The difference between this corner type and the Intersection corner type is that the seam allowance intersection point is not necessarily on the segment extensions 1 9 22 Internal technical points To create a new interior technical point on a piece mark point pocket buttonhole dart peak hook hole fastener button matching point etc enter the GARMENT TOOL mode click on a piece to select it then click on Create interior technical point Click with the left mouse button on the piece there where a new point will be placed After creating a point select the technical element that is represented by the point Then choose the leng
126. xl entered in the Angle field at the same time separated by SPACE character 2 To apply the changes click on Accept button or press ENTER key The bulge type is 10 degrees Unprocessed contour eqrees Smooth contour Bulge is done with peeeeneeneeney 65 as Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Bulge settings The bulge type is Unprocessed contour C Smooth contour Bulge is done with C Angle fo degrees Distance Bulge settings The bulge type is Unprocessed contour C Smooth contour Bulge is done with C Angle fo degrees The bulge type is Unprocessed contour Smooth contour Bulge is done with C Angle fo degrees 6 Distance 1 6 26 Closing a bulge If you want to bulge with a certain distance check the Distance option If you enter one value this value will be split to all selected points 1 If the mobile points have different bulge values the values can be 2X entered in the Distance field at the same time separated by SPACE character 2 To apply the changes click on Accept button or press ENTER key To facilitate the designer tasks the Bulge settings window has an interactive cursor Click on this cursor with the left mouse button and drag to change the bulge distance and the piece shape The bulge distance will be splitted equally to all selected p
127. you select Show delta for measurements option from the menu that is opening when you click with the right mouse button in the watcher Measurement table cm Mo Curent messueren Shot Piece nae M lie le aoa 52 T 38 11 sleeve front i l gt AD To visualize the increase differences from back side 5 45 one size to another in the watcher click zank with the right mouse button in the collar AS back Bi watcher RIGHT Cate Measurement table cm nom 24 Near the mouse cursor appears a small back side back Add measurement Add compose measurement Delete measurement Load names Save names Measurement table cm No Curent measuremen Shot__ Piecename as e _ ss 50 back collar back back side Measurement table cm No Curent measuremenfShot__ Piece name fas as as 50 Ll back 15 1 15 38 15 66 0 28 028 collar 11 E8 1 J3 1218 Add measurement P 0 25 Add compose measurement 16 47 Delete measurement oO 7 Load names E 15 28 Save names 0 55 Hide delta For measurements DE 5359 54 62 ay w 4005 26 zelick menu in which you must click on Show delta for measurements After you select the option will be automatically displayed a row under each measurement from watcher These rows will contain the differences between sizes from one size to another for each measurement or quote from the watcher To hide the rows click on right mouse b
128. you want to unblock the pattern you must click again the Block the selected pattern button From now on the pattern can be edited again Click on Button to align two or more patterns 36 es B 1 5 21 Group ungroup the selected patterns to group patterns If you need to operate simultaneously on multiple patterns move them together without and position shifting you can group them First click to select the patterns and then click on Click button Group the selected patterns button If you select a pattern from a group all patterns in that group will be selected Moving a group it can be done also by selecting a notch ore an internal point from the contour surface of the piece You need to hold pressed the ALT key on the notch ore interior point and than using the mouse you can move the group and overlap it on the new position to ungroup patterns You have also the possibility to overlap a group of patterns on another pattern by overlapping one point from the group patterns on top of one point from the single pattern The grouping operation can be undone First you must select the group and then click on Ungroup the selected group 1 5 22 Attach or detach auxiliary patterns to the main patterns Auxiliary patterns are used to create patterns in a model and are saved together with the model however they do not participate to create the cut plan in EuroCAD Spread amp Cut Planner application and are not placed o
129. 1 11 i i C E n Ai Fies peces Froe pects uideri Got lier it o lo o e r Hone moo oo m Fras piger Fras p ths waistband Bu I DOD Rr Hone OO O00 r Free pieces Free pisces thy Gout fF 7 0 0 0 fF Hone 000 O00 j Fron pieces Fose pieces Pewee Pant pept Cancel No represent the pattern current number in Pattern properties table Name in this column the pattern names are displayed If you want to rename a pattern you can edit the name directly in the specific box corresponding to a pattern um Grading in gradings column is displayed the pattern grading group 7 If you want to change a pattern grading group or a grading group for multiple patterns you must click Commornta radi on the small arrow near the specific field and select the desired grading group in the opened submenu The grading group can be changed only if there are multiple grading groups defined in the current project see chapter 1 10 11 Sym if checked then the pattern is symmetrical and EuroCAD Pattern Designer will double the pattern by symmetrization around symmetry axis If you want to remove symmetry from the selected pattern s you must uncheck the box in this column S in the corresponding boxes of this column you must insert the number of times the pattern can be retrieved in the project in the starting position Fx In this box you must insert the number of mirror patterns obtained by horizontal flip
130. 11 In the next example 4 new points are added by double click on the left mouse button Original piece First point Second point 161 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Third point Fourth point Define a fold After adding the points that mark the fold enter the GARMENT TOOL T 7 CUISOF mode click on a piece then press the Create fold button The cursor will change to point selection cursor Click consecutively on the four points of the fold two by two over the folding lines Select the first point then the second point that corresponds on the first folding line First point l Second point Select the third then the fourth point that corresponds to the third point on the second folding line The fold is fully defined and the two folding lines are visible Third point Fourth point 162 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Add on contour the points that mark the fold by intersection with another piece oo aay l Original piece on which the fold will In DRAW mode draw a Place the rectangle on the piece be built rectangle The rectangle width will and rotate if necessary up to the be the same with the fold width right angle on exactly the same position and rotation of the fold to a E a co l a z Create points at pieces intersection a a L be built Click on Create points at pieces In PIECE mode click on the
131. 2 MB 512 MB Sound Card Pee umes not required not required not required For digitizing Ports for dongle Onboard COM port or PCMCIA adaptor hardware protection key or USB to serial adaptor USB to RS232 Converter COM port l l CD ROM For software installation ooo ooo o Forsoftware installation O Z O Z O Z O Windows XP Windows XP Windows XP Windows XP Operating system Windows 2000 Windows 2000 vvingdows 2000 Windows 2000 Windows Vista Windows Vista Windows Vista To run EuroCAD programs under Windows Vista you have to follow the steps below 349 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 Install all desired EuroCAD programs 2 If you have icons on the desktop for the installed programs make a right click on the corresponding icon and then choose the Properties option from the opened menu If you don t have an icon on the desktop you must enter the installing folder ex C Program files EuroCAD Application name and make a right click on the exe file ex for Application name EuroCADPatternEditor exe 3 A new window will open on the screen when the Properties options are active This window contents many tabs You must activate the Compatibility one by making a click on it Here you will have to select the compatibility mode that matches to our program For this check the Run this program in compatibility mode for option from Compatibility mode section
132. C Angle fo degrees Distance After you click on Bulge button the Bulge settings window opens Here you can set if the bulge is done by an angle ora distance from the hinge point and if the bulge type is unprocessed or smoothed For the unprocessed bulge type the contour between the selected points will be a line For the smoothed bulge type the contour between the selected points will be a Bezier curve If you want to bulge with a certain angle check the Angle option and fill the desired value To apply this change click on Accept button or press ENTER key If you want to bulge with a certain distance check the Distance option and fill the desired value To apply this change click on Accept button or press ENTER key To facilitate the designer tasks the Bulge settings window has an interactive cursor Click on this cursor with the left mouse button and drag to change the bulge distance and the piece shape Thus you can visualize the piece shape changing in real time In Shape Tool the Bulge function has to be selected A Select the breaking point and message window appears which MS 3 contains the operations which has to be made for multi bulge Select a fixed point different by the breaking point Select a fixed point different by the breaking point When this message window opens it Cursor contains on the bottom side only the Exit button in case you wan
133. Check selected pieces The program can automatically check the selected pieces after each operation For an automatic check you must check Check piece after every modification in the Setting window If the automatically checking option is inactive it is important to check periodically the modified pieces To check one or more pieces enter the PIECE mode click to select the piece to be checked then click the Check selected pieces button If no piece was selected while you click on Check selected pieces button all pieces will be verified Thus you can check if there are any overlapped points if there is a grain axis if the selected piece has an origin point if the origin point is located on the piece surface if the technical elements are correctly reported on points The checking of the pieces can be stopped in the verification process by pressing the Stop button which is in the lower right side of the window Assistance When you press this button the program stops the checking of the pieces this can be resume by reactivation of the button Check patterns ready to cut Check results are displayed on a list Some failures can be automatically fixed by the program For the program to automatically repair the problems on a piece click on the se Piece repair The errors that cannot be automatically fixed due to piece shape modification are visually marked on the piece by circling the points where the
134. Click to select the first Hold down SHIFT key Click on Create a new pattern this will be the and select the second pattern from patterns cutting pattern Source pattern target pattern intersection button blue yellow The result is a pattern intersection 34 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 5 16 Join patterns in a new pattern Click on button to join two patterns B a a Click to select the first Hold down SHIFT key Click on Join patterns pattern this will be the and select the second in a new pattern cutting pattern pattern button A joined pattern results 1 5 17 Create points at patterns intersection You can automatically create points at patterns intersection This function is useful to create fold opening points see chapter 1 9 17 First click to select the marker pattern hold down SHIFT key and click on the marked pattern in which the points will be created Click on Create points at patterns intersection button a P 22 M Create points at pieces intersection Patterns are overlapped Hold down SHIFT key Click on Create points at The new points are in the corresponding and click on the marked patterns intersection button created on contour position pattern in which the intersection between the Click on marker pattern points will be created two selected patterns 35 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 5 18 Hor
135. D Pattern Designer ATTENTION If a piece of the model is graded in Grading two different groups it has to appear twice in that model For example if a blouse sleeve is graded in two different groups from 40 to 46 and from 48 to 54 then two distinct pieces will be displayed sleeve 40 46 and sleeve 48 54 Thus when the model will be ready for cutting the specific program will find in the saved file both sleeve sizes for size 42 and 54 If the designer chooses for the Sleeve piece the grading group 40 46 but forgets to create another sleeve for sizes 48 54 the cutting program cannot find the 54 size sleeve and the piece set will be incomplete Name of the size set 1 10 15 Add a new size into an existing size set In GRADING mode you can add a new size at the size set that is already graded The new size can be added anywhere you need in the size set The new size place in the size set will be established according to the indexes fields The size will be placed in the size set next to the size that has the biggest index from the sizes with the index smallest than the new size index It will be graded proportionally with the neighboring sizes from the size set The grading step will be also calculated proportionally with the grading step of the neighboring sizes To add a new size in the graded size set enter the GRADING mode click on Edit size set button If you want to add a new si
136. Designer Edit corner notch properties jj The properties menu for the corner notch includes the following information Comer notch Properties the horizontal and vertical coordinates from the piece origin You cannot edit these coordinates VintNotch E the notch type can have the V or U shape outside or inside and i also the shape inside Type fi Notch the notch length Construction mode notch width for V and U type cme W the distance from the intersection point of the reference line with Bet E the seam allowance SEME Initially the corner notch is aligned to the defined line However Previous the angle under it will be placed from the seam line can be expressed as relative or absolute angle from the system coordinates To set the notch Length i cm placement angle you must choose one of the options Aligned angle Relative tL angle or Absolute angle You can edit the angle value only if you have chosen a Relative angle or Absolute angle Length fo cm if you want a notch to be cut on the cutter you must check the box near the Anal message Cut on CNC machine Construction mode Angle 160 deg Construction mode The notches can be constructed as Corner or 0 Aligned angle Mirror Relative angle Corner notch is constructed at the intersection between the reference line and the seam allowance Mirror notch is constructed from the direction and
137. Draw spiral Spiral restrictions Dimensions W Width zo em Height 20 eT W Circular spiral Step fo cr ie To draw a spiral with restrictions click on a free gth i Constrain t space in work area to specify the start point of spiral length spiral check the desired restrictions in properties f number of rotations area fill the incident fields with the desired values fo ai and press Apply button or Enter E rotations Apply x Spiral type Closed Opened Move back the mouse cursor in work area The spiral is drawn with the restrictions entered by the user it is connected to the mouse cursor in first point of spiral and can be rotated free around this point 98 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer To fix the spiral you have to rotate it until it is in the desired position and click with the mouse in work area without moving it 1 7 23 Draw a circle knowing the radius Draw circle To draw a circle in EuroCAD Pattern Designer you must press Draw circle button from Draw tool Click with the left mouse button in a free workspace area The drawn point will be linked by a circle radius If you will move the mouse you will change the dimension of this radius and of the circle from the screen To finis drawing the circle you must make a click were you want to end the circle radius Draw circle Click on Draw circle Move the mouse in the To finish drawi
138. EuroCAD Alpha digitizer 01 Keyboard settings 11 IC4D EuroCAD Beta wired pointer usage 02 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Appendix Application 03 pp EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 1 EuroCAD Pattern Designer what it IS and what it DOES EuroCAD Pattern Designer EuroCAD Pattern Designer is the main program in the EuroCAD CAD package This is the program destined to pattern design product grading and checking pattern matching for further sewing operations EuroCAD Pattern Designer helps you digitize patterns or can import models sent by the clients EuroCAD Pattern Designer insures the patterns for the next steps of the technological flow 1 2 EuroCAD Pattern Designer Design functions list EuroCAD Pattern Designer has 8 working modes each with different functions Button symbol Available functions Resize align overlap join cut intersection symmetrization fold unfold PATTERN TOOL extract seam allowance interpolation align to grain axis pattern cutting parameters settings fabric symmetry double pattern Convert lines and curves define angles in corners point alignment rotate SHAPE TOOL and change point position interpolation Technical drawing from base geometrical shapes from free lines or from i DRAW TOOL lines with predefined length and angles drawing with points with given coordinates Pattern contour digitization grain axis notches symmetry line internal pmi DIGITIZE po
139. Grain amie pellings Grain axe a firel element in bhock iv Grade grein axe Double grain ois as grading ans File details Begin paten descipior f End peltein descnpion Har pallen desciialian Other settings Grading Aements lope C paini lape C popline layer Text size 10 00 Grading note ja Faite cea Points setings Group points by their hype Parts on seam ine ard cut ire Descabead together i Seperate foreach corto Contours without point description OF C Mame points in DAF Motch settings Grouse rolches Grade rolches i Aopcondig ba he mat pari E Graded srpretey e Hohes balora mak porie Tianstam natehes mio limes DF M Trarsfoom graded matches Flo lir Pon nobcher layer onlines lapar Gradings O Revus gradings ANS Aare 29S8 che l Use special lorna veo spaces Delauk setting 334 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer In DXF layer settings you can edit the layer number on which you can define a specific element The layer number for each exported element must be inserted according to the system in which you will load the file Stroecture settings General a 5 i x Gereeal settings CXF fle dructse eating DXF layer settings DMF block oo Seam lines fia Pattes contour fi Syrer ais E Gradna points B Grain axis Po o Natchez Textelemerts BO Cure paints ia Grade ines es Dril holes na Notch w
140. Hold down as F you draw the next line which define SHIFT a 2 the curve will be perfectly perpendicular or under a predefined as you draw for the next angle from the previous line curve to be directed under a precise angle Ae The rotation step is of 15 thus from the previous line o as the angle between the new and the re previous lines will be only of 0 15 The last lt Thelast 30 45 60 75 90 from the drawn curve drawn point previous line 79 B Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer If you hold down ALT key as you draw the next point will be attracted and perfectly overlapped on the points on other pattern thus you can fit the new piece contour on a preexisting one click Create a new piece whose contour must precisely follow the contour of an existing piece For a perfect overlap of the points in the new piece over the points in the old piece hold down ALT key as drawing The old piece points will become magnetic and will attract the new points to overlap them on 1 7 8 Draw a curve using quotes and precise dimensions Hold down ALT as you draw to overlap the next point on the existing points on other pieces Attention You can set quotes and dimensions for the points that are defining the curve not for the curve For a precise piece drawing with exact quotes you have two options A For the next line which define the curve you draw you will be able to
141. IC4D User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer EuroCAD www EuroCAD org EuroCAD Pattern Designer USER MANUAL EuroCAD Pattern Designer Is part of the EuroCAD CAD application pack The complete pack contains EuroCAD Pattern Designer EuroCAD Photo Digitizer EuroCAD Spread amp Cut Planner EuroCAD Automarker EuroCAD PlotMaster 2009 Advanced CAD Technologies Itd ITN 0061 rev 01 2009 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Contents ae EuroCAD Pattern Desiqner EuroCAD Pattern Designer What it IS EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 5 10 Unfold in a new pattern 1 5 11 1 5 12 Extract the internal seam line on a new pattern 1 5 13 Create the internal seam line as auxiliary draw inside the pattern 1 5 15 Create a new pattern from patterns intersection 1 5 16 Join patterns in a new pattern 1 5 17 Create points at patterns intersection 1 5 18 Horizontal and vertical flip 1 5 19 Pattern alignment 1 5 14 Cut off a pattern with another Trim 1 5 20 Block the selected pattern 1 5 21 Group ungroup the selected patterns 1 5 22 Attach or detach auxiliary patterns to the main patterns 1 5 23 Align a pattern to the grain axis 1 5 24 Pattern interpolation 1 5 25 Pattern color change 1 5 26 Change a pattern name ci 1 5 27 Edit pattern properties 1 5 28 Multiple pattern properties vi
142. IFT Hold down the SHIFT key and click to select the point where the grading rule will be copied Click on horizontally button Copy and 1 10 8 Modify the grading with the keyboard arrows grading vertically The horizontal and the vertical grading rule of the first point was copied and applied to the second point Grading with the keyboard arrows is fast and useful especially for small adjustments of piece matching First click to select a piece then click to select one or more points Each press on a keyboard arrow increase or decrease the horizontal or vertical grading steps by 1 mm If you hold down CTRL key the step will be of 0 1 mm To grade a point directly with the keyboard arrows first click to select a point You can select multiple points either by click near piece and drag to draw a selection rectangle with the mouse or by individual click on each point while holding down SHIFT key Use arrows on the keyboard To change the grading the selected On each press the grading step will increase decrease by 1 mm The result is immediately displayed on the screen If you hold down CTRL key the grading step will be only 0 1 mm on each arrow press step for point s Select as active one of the four point grading tables of the reference point by selecting one of the four activation buttons from toolbar in Grading mode The grading adjustment with keyboard arrows is ve
143. IKINI MO Mita Sport Shell Sport Import Image 4 w lt 4 Filter for pieces name Nene e E ie Cd MEN IACK SHE O02 E midio Tucci Back MEN JACK 5HE 003 Emidio Tucci Upper Sleeve MEN JACK 5HE 004 Emidio Tucci Lower Sleeve MEN JACK 5HE 005 E midio Tucci MEN JACK 5HE 006 Emidio Tucci Back side panel MENJACK SHE 007 Emidio Tucci List Of pieces from MEN JACK SHE O08 E midio Tucci Side seam MEN JACK 5HE 009 Emidio Tucci selected model 4 Pocket Flap MEN JACK 5HE 010 Emidio Tucci Collar MEM JACK 5HE 011 E midio Tucci Collar E 4 F The models will be placed in the models list and the pieces in the pieces list In the All models option is checked the model list becomes disable and only the pieces will be placed in the pieces list There is a filter for each list which allows you to sort the files by a name In the preview area the user can see the model image or the piece shape To import the selected file you must click on Accept button if not click on quit As on importing the EXP files the user will be warned about the changes made because of the differences between the two EuroCAD and Investronica programs on the imported pieces There are many differences between EuroCAD and Investronica Some technical elements like some notch types T or Trapeze notch are not the same in both applications Even in this case EuroCAD program will import all this elements in the right position but having diffe
144. In order to be recognized as dart peak Alternately instead of dragging the peak we can by the program it has to be defined After definition the apply the precise point coordinates in Modify point dart can be checked and adjusted position on the right side menu After drawing the dart it has to be defined as dart Defining a dart supposes to indicate consecutively the dart peak then the two dart edges on the piece contour To define a dart enter the GARMENT TOOL mode click in Define dart button in the mid upper menu The cursor will change to selection cursor Click on the dart peak then on the first dart edge and on the second dart edge After selecting these three points the program will recognize the dart sketch as a real dart The three points that define the dart will be circled in red From the dart peak it appears a new line inside the piece This line is called cut line and represents the cleavage line for a new dart if current dart is closed or diminished The shape and direction for the cut line can be adjusted as explained below 149 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Define a dart Cursor a8 Click on Define dart button in the mid upper menu The cursor changes to selection cursor The bottom bar indicates what point should be clicked at a time 1 Click on the dart peak 2 Click on the first dart edge 3 Click on the second dart edge Dart cutline After all da
145. L and ALT key Keep one of these two keys to constrain the angle between the line defined by the first two drawn points and the work space coordinates If you will keep Ctrl pressed during drawing the second arc point the line defined by the first and the second drawn point will be constrained to an angle from15 to 15 degrees 15 30 45 60 75 degrees related to the space work coordinates if you hold down CTRL key as Hold down ialah you draw the second point which CTRL h forms the arc the line between the last drawn point and the next as you draw the second p one can be drawn rotated only point to be directed under a an aie on fixed angles from the precise angle from the a workspace coordinates workspace coordinates Oe se Ps a First drawn LOO point The rotation step is of 1579 N thus the angle between the new and the previous lines will be l only of 0 15 30 45 60 75 l 90 from the workspace i coordinates 87 caD User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Keep Alt key pressed as you draw the arc points and the next drawn point will be attracted and overlapped on the points from other pieces Hold down ALT as you draw to overlap the next point on the existing points on The Draw arc by two points and radius function can be used to create the other pieces trousers pocket shape First two arc points will be overlapped on points from the piece contour and the third one will
146. N that crosses the points PA and PB and has the radius R C The circle C1 was defined so as it crosses the points P1 and P2 and has the radius R Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new circle C3 passing through the points P40 and F42 having a radius of 25 Ch and its center Situated on the left the point PA Side from the line defined by the two points the point PB the radius R the left right option The function parameters are Pad If the two points on the contour are defined you can hold the SHIFT key and the radius R value is assigned from the current mouse position and applied automatically in the operation text 34 Circle defined by center point and tangent to a specific ey line gF You draw a new circle CN with the center in the point PA and that is tangent to the line defined by the points PB and PC In the near example it was defined the circle C1 with the center in the point P1 and tangent to the line defined by the points P2 and P3 287 35 36 es User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new circle C4 having as center the point P40 and being tangent to line defined by points Fi and Ps The function parameters are the point PA the circle center the points that define the line tangent to the circle Circle defined by center point and tan
147. P11 helps you to create the first dart on the front piece This point is used to define the dart length P12 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x 0 and y 13 25 from the point P10 The point P11 helps you to create the first dart on the front piece This point is used to define the dart length 301 c4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer P13 14 points created by a click on the point at XY from another point button These points are created at a distance x 1 25 for the point P13 and x 1 25 for the point P14 and y 13 25 for both points from the point P9 These two points defines the peak position of the first dart on the front piece P15 P16 points created by a click on the point at XY from another point button These points are created at a distance y 0 and x 1 25 for the point P16 and y 0 and x 1 25 for the P 16 from the point P15 These two points defines the peak position of the second dart on the front piece P17 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x C s 1 and y 0 from the point P1 The point P17 represents the center of the back piece P18 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x 11 and y 0 from the point P17 The point is located on the waistline a
148. P25 P26 help to design the ends on the front and back pieces P27 point created by a click on the Point by triangulation button This point is defined at a distance L pr from the point P7 and at a distance of 2 cm from the point P26 on the left side of the two points This point is found on the seam line on the front piece and defines the product length and width at end P28 point created by a click on the Point by triangulation button This point is defined at a distance L pr from the point P8 and at a distance of 2 cm from the point P26 on the right side of the two points This point is found on the seam line on the front piece and defines the product length and width at end P29 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is defined at a distance x 0 and y L pr P29 helps to define the end on the back piece Step 3 Design and anchor the patterns to the parametrical layer In this step you must display the parametrical layer To do this you must get the interactive cursor mix view in the appropriate position see chapter 3 1 A To design and anchor the pieces at the parametrical layer you must hold the SH FT ALT combination key and to draw after you have clicked the button Draw free or assisted with points and lines in the DRAW TOOL mode If you hold the SH IFT ALT combination key you can magnetize the points this means that the designed points will be
149. To create points on the intersection of a l ani F dependent line with piece contour first Change mark points click on the dependent line to select it then the click on Create points Cut piece button on the menu in the right side of i the screen The points will appear EEEE automatically there where the h Sieate points a dependent line intersects the piece Create points at piece intersection contour Delete the dependent line 143 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Operation Change mark points ald mi To delete a dependent line you must click to select it and then click on the Cut piece Delete line in the lower part of the 3 right side docker Instead you can click Lieste palt to select the line and press the Del key on the keyboard Delete line 1 9 7 Translated contour In order to create a translated contour the user must select the Garment tool mode and select the icon Create translated contour The operations that can be done with this function are create change distance and rotation change mark points cut the piece with a translated contour create points on the intersection of the translated contour with the piece contour and delete the translated contour To create a translated contour first click on the Create translated contour button This operation is available in cursor si Cy q K a mh ze lt GARMENT TOOL mode The curs
150. User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer If in the size set it was not declared any size set as made to measure size when you click on Quickly modify the dimensions from the size set for the client size button in the PARAMETRICAL mode a warning message will be displayed If you want to use a size in the size set as made to measure size you must click on Yes Otherwise ou must click on No If you have decided to use an existing size in the size set as made to measure size you must check in the opened list the size whose quotes were modified according to the customer dimensions After you have selected the size you must click on Accept button To cancel a size selection you must click on Cancel button The new size will be added automatically to the existing size set and will be colored in red 300 caD User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 12 10 How to create a classic skirt pattern in the Parametrical mode Step 1 Define the quotes and the size set In the GRADING mode you must click on the Edit size set button then you must input the size set and the quotes required for the skirt pattern design Quotes required for designing a skirt pattern waist length C t hip circumference C s hip length L s GS E jas body height Chest Pb Waist Pt Hin Ps __ 166 84 E 92 2 skirt width on hemline L t Edit size set Dimension
151. You can draw the points PNA and PNB as contact points of the common User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer tangent to the circles CA and CB either on the left or right side A segment PNA PNB is drawn You have drawn the points P3 and P4 as contact points of the common tangent on circles C1 and C2 either on the left or the right side A segment P3 P4 was drawn Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create two new points F23 and Pe4 as the contact points of the common tangent to the Clipe les Ci cane 22 on the left side Ce Ll The function parameters are circle CA circle CB left right option 21 Contact points of a tangent to a circle You can draw a point PN as a contact point of the tangent line from the external point PA on a circle CA either on the left or right side The point P3 is drawn on the tangent line in the point P2 on the circle C1 on the left side Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point P26 as the contact point of the tangent drawn from external point Pe4 to the circle C2 on the left side The function parameters are the circle CA the point PA left right option Attention To avoid confusions try first both variants then choose the correct direction 282 23 24 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 22 Point at a given distance on a circle Q D Pa
152. a circle having the radius equal with the length that you have set Points placed on the intersection between the intersection points Note If you are in Draw tool mode and you are using the Length trajectories and the next advanced magnetizing type together with the drawing constrained to the Grawn line dralectory next point or to the next line you can notice that beside the intersection points and them trajectories there are also some other points active points displayed on the intersection points trajectories These points represent the intersection between the trajectories that the intersection point might have and the next drawn point position according to the settings that you have made for the next point Ctrl Alt If you want to use this function you must activate the fourth option from the Advanced magnetizing window After activating this function you must insert the desired number of degrees in the eB corresponding field and then i Angle AP press Apply i ko fasl degrees A l r If this function is active when you will press the Alt Ctrl Advanced magnetizing using i key combination all the angles ge intersection points from the existing patterns will become active together with all possible trajectories that the intersection points can have considering the angle that you have set In this case the trajectory becomes an inclined line under the set angle Note Similar to the Advanced m
153. ace In the upper menu the piece surface will be calculated and displayed with and without sewing allowance folded or unfolded with or without considering the interior holes Measure a piece surface Cursor In MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode click on Measure piece surface button Click to select the piece to measure the surface In the upper menu are displayed the absolute seam allowance no holes unfolded values for the piece surface with or oo oc io a without the sewing allowance iLE o C o E o A o unfolded if necessary and considering the interior holes 1 11 7 Measurement table Watcher To show or hide the watcher click on the Show hide measurement table in the upper side menu The watcher is a very useful tool to design grade and verifying the patterns In this table you can watch simultaneously for standard a l dimensions on all sizes and the distance amp angle measurements done by showy hide measurements table the designer on the patterns see chapter 1 11 1 1 11 2 1 11 4 251 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Piece name on wich was done the Measurement name measurement Short name for dimension or measurement Measurement curent number Check to be typed on Product Technical Sheet Measurement table mm Refference dimensions INS Current measuremen Piece name from model size set 1 Chest C displayed on yelow 2 waist wi
154. adius dimension length Press Enter to apply _ this dimension The next arc will be drawn constrained vA to the imposed radius dimension You can draw the third point by making point a click when the cursor returns in the work space Next point Radius J Length fio cm Establish the arc radius dimension for the third point Apply Set properties fo C next line C Nest point f Radius to be drawn Sy Second drawn Set properties fo nest line fe Next point ds Radius After you entered the coordinates of the new point press Apply button to see the new point on the screen at the entered coordinates First drawn point Radius length 90 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 19 Draw arc by two points and angle In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you can create arcs by two points and starting angle For this make a click on the Draw arc by 2 points and angle function from Draw tool mode ESTIN Draw arc by 2 points and angle After activating this function make a click in the work area to draw a new point This point represents the first point form a new piece and also the piece origin After this move the cursor in the place where you want to create the second point and make a click to create it A curve will be drawn between the two points and a tangent will be linked to the first point This tangent can be used to establish the staring angle for the
155. age or to go to next page and ready to be printed click on Print report button If you want to cancel the printing process click on Exit viewer button To send in electronic format the technical sheets made by EuroCAD Pattern Designer these must be converted in PDF files For this you must check File option from Output Options After selecting File click on the arrow from the Format field in order to choose the file type that user wants to save From the following list you will choose Adobe Acrobat PDF To save a PDF you must press ok button from Output Options window BS o c Print project technical sheet Project Pattern Shape Drew Garment Grading Check Settings Windows Hal Paste itrHey re Se Piz Prit all pebberne bechoical sheets Lire iist charge Bags ra Redo lest change SteFe trH 2 Frit catan patera technical shasta 310 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer To convert the marker report from EuroCAD Pattern Designer in PDF file press Print project technical sheet button which is on the the tool bar or select from the bar menu the function Project the option Print technical sheets Output Options x electegd Printer WOONT SBILITS TEWanon MFS200 Series eport Destination f Printer In the new opened window Output Options must be C Preview Cc Cancel checked the File box IK Rave Snapsh
156. agnetizing using graded points when you are in Draw tool mode and you are using the Advanced magnetizing using angles together with the drawing constrained to the next point or to the next line you will be able to observe that beside the intersection points and them trajectories there are also active some other points points displayed on the intersection points trajectories These points represent the intersection between the trajectories that the intersection point might have and the next drawn point position according to the settings that you have made for the next point 1 7 33 Internal points magnetizing TP You must activate the Internal points function from the list if jamal inl you want to use the internal points as reference points When you Intenal cont a giai i activate this function in the right side of the Advanced Sania Offset x f om magnetize window you can set the magnetizing type that you can Offeet fo em want to use further Pee l You must keep the Ctri Alt key combination if you want view the points where you can apply the advanced magnetizing Length J am Note When this function is active all internal types of internal E points becomes active not only the internal technical points Thus Teak as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer when Ctrl Alt key combination are pressed by user and this type of magnetizing is active you can see displayed next type of inte
157. alculated proportionally to keep exactly the shape of the extracted contour Operations which can be made in View french curves window In View french curves window several operations can ce made with the existing french curves can be deleted moved up or down on the list and flipped These operations can be made only during an extraction or addition of a french curve because the View french curves window appears at the extraction or addition of a french curve To view this window the necessary steps for extracting or adding a french curve has to be followed select a piece press the arrow of Add a french curve to the selected piece function select one of the options Extract french curve or Add french curve select the 2 endpoints of a curve select the contour enter the name of the french curve if extraction will be done and press OK or ENTER also in case of extraction After these steps the View french curves window appears 71 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Deleting a french curve For deleting a french curve first you have to select the french curve from the list on the left side check on the right side of the window if the selected french curve is the one you want to delete if so press the Delete button After deleting the french curve and pressing Ok the deleted french curve can not be recovered any more View french curves side seam front armhole front nec
158. ally create a dart using 2 points 1 9 13 Operations on the dart dart rotation multiple darts 155 1 9 14 Operations on the dart modify a dart cut line 157 1 9 15 Operations on the dart cut a pattern over dart 158 1 9 16 Operations on the dart convert the dart to folded dart convert the folded dart to open 158 1 159 1 9 18 Create a fold 1 9 19 Straighten a piece 1 9 20 The seam allowance Set the width of the seam allowance 1 9 21 Finishing types for the seam allowance corners 175 1 9 22 Internal technical points 177 Automatic notches for the dart Create a sequence of internal points 179 Declare a pattern origin in an interior technical point 181 Matching point 181 The grain axis 187 188 The text axis Symmetry axis EEA 1 10 1 1 10 2 1 10 3 1 10 4 1 10 5 1 10 6 IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 206 206 207 211 212 213 1 10 7 C e eT 222 237 i 238 1 10 21 Automatic calculation of a point grading relative to the grading of the nearby points EK 243 1 11 1 243 1 11 2 1 11 3 1 11 4 1 11 5 1 11 6 1 11 7 1 11 8 244 246 248 NO N N A gt O N O1 NO 253 c User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 11 12 1 11 13 1 11 14 Simulate the combination by sewing for two patterns WALKING PATTERNS 260 1 11 15 IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer
159. ance but can be rotated It is important to observe the differences between the translated contour and the parallel to the contour The translated contour is obtained by moving the contour segment at a given distance and rotating it with the required angle In straight regions the translated contour will be Parallel to the approximately parallel to the piece contour in the camber contour regions the distance to the contour is not the same Respects the exact distance but cannot be rotated 148 vege eas B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 9 Define a dart A dart can be built in 3 steps Draw the dart Define the dart Check and modify the dart To draw a dart the piece contour has to be changed in order to create the cut for the dart In this step we have to look for 2 aspects position of the dart peak that will set the dart depth and the distance between the two edges of the dart that will set the dart width The length and the shape of the two dart edges can be adjusted subsequently after the dart was defined The fastest method to draw a dart in SHAPE TOOL mode apply three new consecutive points on the contour see chapter 1 6 11 then drag the mid point to the interior of the piece Draw a dart b DOUBLE CLICK clicking on the piece contour right where the dart will be cut Click and drag the mid point that represents the dart The dart sketch is ready
160. ance width for a segment Click on Edit seam allowance button in GARMENT TOOL mode select the segment to create or change the fixed seam allowance width In the toolbar for the GARMENT TOOL mode you will find displayed the values for the seam allowance Click on fixed option and fill in the allowance width values for the seam allowance After you enter the desired values you must press the ENTER key If you click now on Show hide seam allowance button the new values will be displayed 174 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Variable seam allowance A segment has a variable seam allowance if its width increases or decreases between the two points that defines the segment Create change the variable seam allowance width for a segment Step seam allowance Click on Edit seam allowance button in GARMENT TOOL mode select the segment to create or change the variable seam allowance width In the toolbar for the GARMENT TOOL mode you will find displayed the values for the seam allowance Click on variable option and enter the values for initial and final width After you enter the desired values you must press the ENTER key If you click now on Show hide seam allowance button the new values will be displayed A segment has a step seam allowance if between the two segment points the seam allowance width varies with a defined inc
161. anced magnetizing window After activating this function you must insert the desired number of degrees in And the corresponding field and then press fs degrees x x Las fl g If this function is active when you will 4 Jp press the Alt Ctrl key combination all Advanced magnetizing using es the grading points from the patterns angles E O will become active together with all T possible trajectories that the grading points can have considering the angle that you have set In this case the trajectory becomes an inclined line under the set angle Note If you are in Draw tool mode and you are using the Angle advanced magnetizing type together with the drawing constrained to the next point or to the next line you can notice that beside the graded points and them trajectories there are also some other points active points displayed on the graded points trajectories These points represent the intersection between the trajectories that the graded point might intersection between the graded points trajectories have and the next drawn point position according to and the next drawn line the settings that you have made for the next point Points placed to the Ctrl Alt 1 7 32 Intersection points magnetizing Lintersect points Internal points Contours offset x 0 cm Paralels You must activate the Intersection points function from the list if you want to use intersection poi
162. and aparing they can be opened with the specific associated programs The attached files must not be larger than 500 kb To attach one or more files to a project you must click on the Attach button in the Product technical sheet In the opened window you must select the files to be attached and then click on OK button To save one or more files that are attached to the project on the hard disk you must select the files and then click on the Save as button then you must choose the save path and click on the OK button To delete an attached file you must select the file and then click on the OK button To save the entered information click on Accept button Prr nee E14 FERMI Darra Ligeia 5 aiat 307 cD User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer In the upper part of the Product technical e a a sheet window you must select the page General product infomation page T Drawings and technical specifications page 2 Drawings and technical specifications Use this Site mae You must check the Use this page with E Jae this page pee upes lemenary specification 7 supplementary specifications box in order to be able to edit the quarters in this page In any of the two pages of drawings and specifications you can enter text or image Product technical sheet information To do so click on the arrow z 7 near the message Use that can be General product infomation page 1 Drawings and techni
163. and press Ok After pressing of Rotation button grading rule will change orientation Rotated with 45 degrees Note To Rotate several grading tables repeat for each one the procedure of selecting active table and pressing of rotation button d How to copy grading from one point to another Copy of grading of a point in another one or several is a very important operation that allows fast and accurate grading of a model Copy operation is done as follow select active grading table select reference point press Copy point grading in clipboard to memorize grading rule Select destination point points where the grading rule will be copied and press Transfer grading from clipboard button Grading rule memorized from reference point is the one from active table and this rule remain in clipboard and can be applied later to other point points by pressing Transfer grading from clipboard button Grading rule of a point can be memorized in clipboard as it In the following example the grading for the is on screen flip x flip y or flip xy For this select reference sleeve end will be copied on the gore point click on the arrow next to the button Copy point grading in clipboard button and from the unfolded menu select Copy grading grading will be copied on x and y axis as it is on the screen Copy grading with X flip grading will be copied flipped on x axis Copy grading with Y f
164. and then click on the Create text axis Click again with the cursor on the piece at the desired start point for the text axis then click on the desired end point for the text axis After you have created the text axis you can define its type If you have chosen Text or Piece name type you may edit the text that will be printed on the axis After you have created a text axis you may change its rotation length and position by entering the precise coordinates All these settings can be done in the right side docker that appears when you select such an axis Apply the text axis g228 b b 8 a22 thls esz Create text axis In GARMENT TOOL mode Click on the piece on the start point Click on the piece on the end point for the click on the piece then click on for the text axis text axis While the axis position and Create text axis button rotation are manually set you can observe a deviation from the needed angle and position The correct axis length and position can be set precisely by typing the exact coordinates x Internal line Hold down While you draw the text axis hold down CTRL key the text axis will be perfectly horizontal vertical or on 15 30 CTRL 45 60 75 90 degrees angles related to the X and Y axis Fropertie Type Text W Marrow Cut on the cutting machine while you draw the text axis in order to obtain a precise angle In t
165. ange Grade Drop Os aj gs a Vi Eo Eo 146 tee TA 50 Osz vl Last base size 42 5 In GRADING mode in the right side menu appears the sizes list used in the current model The base size is already checked and can be changed by a click on another size The base size is always displayed filled while the graded sizes have different contour colors 227 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Grup Grade a vi EE C eran ct d Last base size 42 M After you click on size 38 this size becomes the base size All following design operations will be done on this size You can observe that the shape and the dimensions of the graded sizes did not change All grading tables are recalculated starting from the new selected base size 1 10 13 Distribution of model sizes on grading groups with different base sizes If the shape of a piece varies too much between the sizes and this shape cannot be reproduced anymore only by points grading example on large sizes appears a dart you can use multiple grade sets of patterns for a model each set will have its own base size A piece in a model can be part of the general grading set or part of a partial grading set To add a new grading group to a model and to distribute the graded sizes of a model into multiple grading groups you have to edit the size set from the specific editing window Enter the GRADING mode and click on Edit size set b
166. angle Direction given by the corner type of the seam allowance The line f Clockwise given by this direction and angle is extended until it w ada cares extends the piece corner If Cut on CNC machine Apply The reference line is the line from whose extension the notch will be created You can choose as reference line Operation the Next or Previous lines Next line Mewt a represents the line that leaves the point clockwise k Previous line represents the line that comes to that Length OON point clockwise to validate any change in the properties menu you width must click on the Apply button ernioath Absolute angle Reference line Operations that can be done on the corner notch 1 Delete a corner notch First select the notch then press Delete notch button or DELETE on keyboard To delete a notch first click on the notch to select it 141 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Operations Press Delete notch button in the lower part of the h Delete notch right docker or press delete button from the keybord 1 9 6 Dependent line To create a dependent line the user must select Garment Tool mode and press the Create dependent line button The operation that can be done using this function are create change distance and rotation change mark points cut the piece with a dependent line create points on the intersection of the d
167. ansformed into straight segments on digitization are transformed into Bezier curves with an accurate following of the initial contour Here you can set the maximal deviation of the resulted contour after interpolation related to the digitized contour For a smaller deviation there is an accuracy increase but at the same time there will be no smoothing for the low precision digitized points that are near the main curve Also in General technical settings you may choose to check the piece accuracy after each modification and to display the warning messages on piece check Adding the seam allowance on curves involves complex mathematical operations that can generate small deviations Here you can establish the initial seam allowance width and also the maximal deviation on seam allowance application A larger this deviation limit leads to a fastest result If the deviation limit will be reduced the calculations are slower Some corner types for the seam allowance cannot be applied according to the corner angle and the seam allowance width In this case some errors occur together with inadequate results If this option is checked the program automatically identifies the situations where these errors occur and replace the corner type 339 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer d Colors settings A Genecal Design Techrical Colors Digitizer Fiore Keyboacd Femcte asistance Eok prot Colors be dieen intema
168. anual grading To build a new piece you must draw lines and free points and use different functions to set distances angles and movements EuroCAD Pattern Designer offers also some special functions to draw circles and ellipses together with rectangles and squares 1 7 2 Free drawing The easiest mode to create a new piece is the free drawing Enter the DRAW TOOL mode and activate the corresponding function to draw the next element Click on Draw free or assisted with points and lines button if you want to create a line Use one of the next functions Draw free or assisted with points and curves Draw arc by 3 points Draw arc by 2 points and radius Draw arc by 2 points and angle Add French curve to pattern contour if you want to draw or a add a new curve to the pattern Pick one of the drawing functions and make a click somewhere in the work space to draw freely A new point is set this will be the origin point of the new piece Move the cursor by moving the mouse to the next point and click again on the left mouse button After each cursor mouse movement at each left mouse click a new point will be applied and it will be automatically joined with previous by a line or by a curve During freely drawing you can select any function from draw tool bar For example after creating a straight line you can pick up the Draw free or assisted with points and curves to create a curve next time
169. approximation The maximal deviation from the initial piece contour does not exceed 1 mm This tolerance degree can be modified in settings module H OEL gt l D Irregular initial contour Select the points on the Click on interpolate The result is an improved segment to be interpolated selected segment shape obtained by total by Bezier curves points removal from the selected segment and by approximation with a Bezier curve 1 6 18 Change a point status curve point or grade point The points on a piece contour are of two types 1 grade points 2 curve points The main differences between grade and curve points are listed below Grade points can be defined from the piece origin or by anchoring on parametrical points If a curve point is defined from the piece origin or is anchored to a parametrical point then it transforms into a grade point Grade points have a grading table in which the point evolution from a size to another is clearly defined Curve points do not have a grading table their evolution from a size to another is calculated on the neighbor grade points When you move a graded point the neighbor curve points are moved proportionally so as the contour shape on the grade point sizes to be conserved When you move a curve point the other curve points remain stable and the contour shape changes see chapter 1 6 4 By piece interpolation most curve points sometimes all of them are removed while grad
170. ark point Click the Convert to point button located in the lower Convert k to poirit part of the right docker Delete notch Near the notch appears a grade point The new created point becomes automatically the mark point for the new notch 3 Delete a notch First select the notch then press Delete notch button or DELETE on keyboard To delete a notch first click on the notch to select it peration Change mark point Press Delete notch button in the lower part of the Convert notch to point right docker Delete notch 137 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 4 Intersection notch The intersection notch will be created at the intersection between an internal axis text axis grain axis and the piece contour To create an intersection notch first click the button Create intersection notch then click on the internal axis to select it then click on the contour After creating a notch on the right side docker appears the properties menu for notch parameters Here you can set the precise notch length the notch width and angle from the contour line according to the chosen notch type Create an intersection notch Click on the button Create intersection notch When the piece is selected the grade points become visible marked in red and the cursor transfers in selection cursor Click on the internal line chosen to realize the intersection notch When the cur
171. art The two parts are separated over the openings of the two darts 1 9 16 Operations on the dart convert the dart to folded dart convert the folded dart to open dart A defined dart can be transformed into a folded dart Enter the GARMENT TOOL mode click on the piece click on the piece peak to select it and click on the Convert to folded dart EuroCAD Pattern Designer will regenerate the piece contour on dart opening for a perfect overlap to the piece contour by clockwise or anticlockwise folding according to the checked option The same operation can be done reversely a folded dart can be converted in an open dart Click on the inner point that represents the peak of the folded dart and click on Convert to dart button Convert the dart to folded dart Click on the piece click on the dart peak and click on Convert to folded dart i Convert dart to folded dart According to clockwise or anti clockwise setting the conversion to folded dart can be different as seen on the left side example Rotation type C Clockwise 5 Anti clock wize Rotation type fe Clockwise A ranticlockwise 160 OW gt B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 17 Automatic notches for the dart EuroCAD Pattern Designer automatically adds notches that indicate how to overlap the dart or the folded dart for sewing These notches are always directed toward the dart peak or folded dart peak The d
172. art notches are automatically translated on the seam allowance when the latter is added to the pattern Automatically added notches on the seam allowance to Automatically added notches on the seam allowance to mark the overlapping points for dart closure The notches mark the overlapping points for folded dart closure The are always directed toward the peak notches are always directed toward the folded dart peak 1 9 18 Create a fold In EuroCAD Pattern Designer there are three ways to create automatically a fold Create fold Create a sequence of separate folds Create a sequence of mixed folds It is possible to add automatically a fold or a sequence of folds by selecting once the function No matter the folds number the steps to create a fold are the following Add manually on the piece contour the points that mark the fold Define the fold Create fold To create a fold on the piece contour must be added the 4 points that will define the fold These points can be added on the piece contour manually or by intersection with another pattern Add manually the points that mark the fold on the contour To create a fold 4 points are required two on a side of the piece and two on the other side These points can be chosen from the existing ones or can be new Adding new points on the piece contour is done in SHAPE mode either by double click with the left mouse button or by using the add new point button see chapter 1 6
173. as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer file It will content them but only if they ware set in Investronica To import EXP files you must click on Project then on Import and in the opened menu you must select Investronica files exp files In the opened window you must select the path on the hard disk and the file to be imported from a list If in the selected folder there are native Investronica files with EXP extensions they will be displayed in the Investronica Files list In the upper part of the file list it will be displayed the number of models and the pieces in the current folder Drvp crt Invesbronica likes a eee LOFANS Fi iratta ie eH errettrorica Fiet Fe Sy Actives cha E Sy Adrian EHE Bane medi BHJ Arty BSS DF BES Gerber E heera HES Leira mE PLT E E teste igori fe Ep Doiie fe gy Fiero EHE Inte igi BS roto HA EH eeg m a ET Humber of Fismes 1 ee cen In the Investronica File list you can view only one type of file models or pieces not both of them in the same time To display the desired type of file you must use the Investronica file filter For this you must make a click on the file filter Investronica file filter lnvestronica Files RORY BCK 1 01 extension field and from the opened list select the type of file RORY BECK 203 that you want to use RORY FART 281 01 There are ma
174. ation at once You must press the Apply button after each modification Piece name platca Resize width 120 29 cm Height 28 41 cm Resize proportional Scale x Scale fioo click Y Scale 100 Vertical mirror Horizontal mirror Modification Piece properties we Movement Dx fo cm DY fo cm Rotation Angle fo degrees Rotation center x 3 66 cm Y E 4 21 cm Apply 29 es Piece name platea Resize Width 20 29 cm Height Resize proportional Scale Scale 100 a lodification Piece properties Resize proportional Scale Scale 100 at Y Scale Ey id I YWertical mirror Horizontal mirror Modification Pje Movement Dix E cm Mis rr Horizontal mirror Movement Dis 14 cm D r D cm a R otatiorr Angle lo degrees Rotation center F otatior Angle jo degrees Rotation center 1 366 cm E E 313 cm Apply User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Resize When you select a pattern in the corresponding boxes appear the pattern actual dimensions You can modify the values in the boxes and then click on Apply button to resize the pattern to the new dimensions If you check the box Resize proportional then the program will automatically adjust a dimension proportionally to the other thus the ratio between pattern height and widt
175. ation process by pressing the Stop button which is in the lower right side of the window Assistance When you press this button the program stops the checking of the pieces this can be resume by reactivation of the button Check patterns ready to cut 343 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Click on the Check the pieces prepared for cut button The program will check each piece on all graded sizes will proceed to unfolding symmetrization grain axis alignment Check the pieces prepared for cut Assistance Pieces wih fades FRONT Verification results are displayed in a window for all pieces and sizes lf some errors appear during a piece preparation these failures are reported and the user can Supplementary information visualize the problem list in Pieces with failures field in the upper half of the Assistance window Click on every reported fauk to see details hy Verhica pietele auian Assistance To see details of the reported failures you must click on each error Part of these errors can be automatically fixed Click on every reported fault to see detais e g notches dimensions while part of the errors must be Speen tienen fixed by the user e g contour self intersection E E T The points and lines that have generated errors can be Please corect manually or delete the piece displayed by selection from the error list Ay Check aundiary pieces eeno ui 1 13 9
176. ation to be deleted then you must click on the Delete operation button x When you want to delete a step operation you will be warned that all operations that depend on the selected operation will be deleted from the geometrical layer A Would you like to eliminate this script step All geometrical elements resulted in this step and those depending on this step will disappear From the geometrical layer 269 c4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 12 4 4 Show hide the rule for a step in the script If you click on the Draw all rules button in the workspace there will be displayed the design rules used to obtain the geometrical elements point line circle Bezier curve If you click on the Do not draw any rule button in the workspace there will be displayed only the resulted geometrical elements point line circle Bezier curve the design rules are not displayed To show hide the design rule for a single step in the script you must click on the corresponding box in the Draw column of the script area If the corresponding box is marked by an X then the design rule for the selected step will be displayed if that box is not marked by an X for the selected step it will be displayed only the resulted geometrical element RIR 1 12 4 5 How to copy the script steps To copy one or more steps in a script you must first select the step in the Script area and the click
177. attern Designer If you check Auxiliary pattern then the pattern is used only during design step Auxiliary patterns are used by the designer to create patterns in the project and are saved together with them However they are not part of the cutting plan for EuroCAD Spread amp Cut Planner and are no placed in the marker in EuroCAD Automarker An auxiliary pattern must be grouped together with the main pattern on which it depends To group an auxiliary pattern with the main pattern move the auxiliary pattern over the main pattern select the auxiliary pattern hold down SHIFT key and select the main pattern in the project then click on Group the selected patterns in Pattern mode see chapter 1 5 22 The auxiliary pattern will be displayed on plotter printing according to the dependencies defined during the design step Cut on CNC machine An auxiliary pattern can be designed to be cut on the automatic cutting machine if is checked Cut on CNC machine option in the right side menu of Pattern mode This option is active only when an auxiliary pattern is selected Pattern information will be filled with information regarding the selected pattern this information will be printed on the pattern report in the specifications area In Pattern mode click on the Pattern information button in the opened window you can fill the needed information To save these specifications click on Accept button if you want to
178. attern Designer Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point P54 in the middle of the segment defined by points PSO and Poe The function parameters are reference points represented by the points that define the segment on which you place the new point 9 Proportional point on a segment hi By this function you can draw a new point PN on the ieee aFe segment defined by the points PA and PB at a specific ratio 30 ops 0 RP In the near example a new point P3 is placed at a 30 ratio on the aPhe segment defined by the P1 and P2 points The ratio is considered from the first declared point in the segment Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point F56 inside the segment defined by points P49 and PS3 at ratio The function parameters are 30 Reference points that defin the DNS segment The ratio RP Division points on a segment By using this function you can create a number N of new points r aps t evenly distributed at equal distances between the PA and PB points In the near example between the P1 and P2 points there were placed 4 points P3 P4 P5 and P6 evenly distributed Po _ i ee Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create 4 new points uniformly placed at even distances between points PSO and P amp S The function parameters are Number of poin
179. attern is displayed any modification on the base size is automatically applied on the symmetrical half Sometime it happens that on the grain axis the seam allowance to be doubled This is not a problem while on the patterns printed for production the symmetrization occurs accurately without applying seam allowance on the grain axis If you click again on the Show hide symmetrical pattern button it becomes inactive and the symmetrical half is hidden 1 5 8 Symmetrize in a new pattern Definitive symmetrization for a pattern results in a new pattern formed by duplication of the original pattern around the grain axis This new pattern looses the symmetrization properties if you make changes on one of its two halves they are not applied for the other half button to create a new symmetrical pattern Original pattern New symmetrical pattern Even if a symmetrical pattern is grouped with other patterns when you click the button Symmetrize in a new pattern a new pattern will be created by symmetrizing the symmetrical pattern 1 5 9 Show hide unfolded pattern As for the symmetrical patterns the patterns with folds can be temporarily or definitively unfolded in order to be verified For a temporary pattern unfolding first you must click to Click on select it then click on the Show hide unfolded pattern button This button remains active as long as the pattern is displayed unfolded At this time you cannot operate changes
180. awings can be selected for grain axis symmetry axis text line technical points internal figures mark lines or other internal drawings For the imported pieces arrangement you can choose an automatic rearrangement of the imported pieces Alike for DXF files import you can choose the import on the sewing line In Gerber application the pieces are defined on the cut line only Thus you must check the option Import seam line only if the pieces and not the patterns were designed in Gerber Import settings Internal drawings Miscellaneous Import all internal drawings J Rearrange automatically imported patterns Multiply patherns f import directly patterns with its own doubling settings multiply pattems according to the original model Grain aris e symmet arie J Text line J Internal points J Internal figures Free lines Other internal drawings When you import from Gerber the seam line is imported as MW Force cut line as patter contur auxiliary pattern inside the pattern which represent the pattern i Add pattern description to name There are situations in which according to the settings from Gerber the cutting line the external contour is imported like W Import gradings auxiliary piece and the seam line the internal contour is imported like main piece For a precise import of these pieces you must check the option Force cut line as pattern contour If in Gerber hav
181. ayed in the field under the message Default key combination If you want to change this key combination click on Delete button and then click in the field under the message New key combination and assign the keys for the new combination After the new key combination is displayed click on the Assign For a key with no assigned shortcut you must follow the nest steps select the command in the Command list click in the field under the New key combination message click to choose the new key or the combination key if the selected key or combination key was already assigned this mention appears in Assigned to the command field After choosing the key combination this will be displayed in the field under the message New key combination click on Assign button After clicking on this button the assigned key combination appears in the field under the message Default key combination before quitting the setting window to keep changes click on Accept button If you want to cancel changes click on Quit button If you want to recover the initial settings click on Load default settings 1 13 8 Check the pieces prepared for cut The pieces for cut are obtained by applying specific operations on the designed patterns Obtain the graded pieces by applying the grading rules Symmetrization for symmetrical pieces Folds unfolding Alignment to the grain axis Addin
182. be copied between the two selected points Click on the piece contour where the notches must be copied The program will automatically copy the notches from the region selected on the first piece and apply them on the selected contour on the second piece The notches on the second piece will be placed at the same distances from the first selection point Piece overlapping can be checked by pasting in the left side example 262 IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 12 Parametrical design mode Made to Measure 1 12 1 Introduction to parametrical design What is parametrical design Parametrical design represents a radically different method from the direct design that actually represents only simple drawing Parametrical design identically follows the design steps that can be found in any direct design manual by this method the pattern is developed point by point using geometrical functions formulas and parameters During the direct design the operator proceeds to some predefined steps drawing adjustments etc while the computer memorizes only the final result that is the drawing on the screen During the direct design procedure none of the pattern developing steps is saved into computer memory During parametrical design the designer operates some design steps that are memorized one by one by the computer These design steps are related to some basic geometrical functions each new point line or
183. be used Copy grading with Y flip button and then Paste grading button In this case gore bottom was quickly graded by copying grading from sleeve bottom Note To copy grading from several grading tables repeat for each one the procedure of selecting active table selecting reference point copy grading and transferring grading rule in destination points Copy a grading sequence To copy the rules for multiple graded points first you must select active grading table and then select the points from which you copy the grading rules After you have selected the points press Copy point grading in clipboard button or press on CTRL F key combination to memorize the grading rules To copy the memorized grading rules you must select the points the points that will take the tables and press Transfer grading from clipboard button or CTRL G key combination The point selection can be done in two ways chained consecutive or unchained random If the selection for the points from which the rules are copied is chained the rules are memorized from the first to the last point considered clockwise If the selection for the points from which the rules are copied is not chained random the rules are memorized according to the point selection order Thus you must pay attention to the point selection order for copying the grading rules When copying a graded sequence you must be sure that Active grading table is the one with
184. bine k ag Connection status monnesched I Lie nace nd sagolmad x4 4 conection bo the server could not be established Eurocad Remote Assistance User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer This window appears on the screen when accessing the About option It contents information about connection status the connected server IP user name connection time Click on the OK button to close the connection If there is a connection problem a warning message will appear on the screen while trying to access the Remote assistance application The message warns you that A connection to the server could not be established To close the message clik on OK button This message can appear on next situations if there is no network connection on the user computer or if for the moment the connection is off if the network connection on EuroCAD office is off If the EuroCAD Remote Viewer this is the application that makes possible for the EuroCAD technician to view and to control the users computer is off for the moment Even if the connection cannot be established the Remote Assistance application remains opened In this case if you try to open one more time the application a warning message will appear on the screen The message warns you that about this and it asks you to close the first opened application Another instance of EuroCAD Remote Assistance is already running Pleas
185. ble by right click and select with left click one of the tables shown in the window menu Carrie out linearize operation Can be done in two ways 1 click on Linearize point grading from toolbox or 2 click on Linearize point grading from point grading table At pressing of linearize button grading steps will be recalculate based on average value Note To linearize several grading tables repeat for each one the procedure of selecting active table and pressing of linearize button 212 b as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer How to symmetrize on X Y and XY axis The orientation of a grading point from a base size can be changed by symmetrization Symmetrization can be done horizontally only vertically only or on both axis Select the point s whose grading rule will be symmetrized select active grading table and click one of the following buttons Symmetrize horizontally the grading of the selected points Symmetrize vertically the grading of the selected points or Symmetrize the selected points grading Grading symetrization will be done for active point grading table This operation is useful if you are copying the grading from one point to another between two complementary pieces and the point gradings are identical as value and opposed as direction Select the point which grading will be symetrizate Select as active table one of four grading table of the point which will be sym
186. button 4 of the pointer ATTENTION You must digitize the piece on the base size Insert the size set in the Grading DH lte flo amp FP 5 Bi e a mode in the Edit size set window ey oe T and choose the size set If the size set contains more grading bases before starting the digitization you must select the sized set that corresponds to the piece to be digitized To digitize a point grading you must click on the button 4 of the pointer on the points that correspond to the digitized graded point on the other sizes 4 for digitizing eS Nod the point grading 1 8 5 Digitize the technical elements of a pattern After the pattern outline is digitized the technical elements on the pattern can be also digitized notches grain axis symmetry line inner drill holes Notch digitization can be done Directly place the pointer over the notch and press the 2 pointer button In this situation the notches will be defined as notches ranged away from the closest grade point First press DISTANCE NOTCH or PERCENT NOTCH according to the notch type then place the pointer over the notch and press the 0 pointer button Notch digitization can be done at the same time with piece outline digitization or after the outline digitization First method for notch digitization directly with 2 pointer button 121 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Button
187. button if you want to extract the pattern with grading Original pattern with the seam allowance added by the program The cut line extracted as a new pattern without grading The cut line extracted as a new pattern with grading 32 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 5 12 Extract the internal seam line on a new pattern EuroCAD Pattern Designer allows you to trace the seam Click on Click on line from the cut line This function is useful for the patterns obtained by pattern digitization To extract the seam line click to select the pattern and click on Extract the internal seam lineon a new pattern button to extract a button to extract a button if you want to extract the pattern without grading pattern on its internal pattern on its Extract the internal seam line with grading button if seam line with internal seam line you want to extract the pattern with grading grading without grading Attention For an accurate operation accomplishment you must first set the seam allowance width on each segment the seam allowance will be eliminated in order to obtain the seam line Original pattern including the seam allowance pattern Seam line extracted as new pattern without grading Seam line extracted as new pattern with grading 1 5 13 Create the internal seam line as auxiliary draw inside the pattern Click on the button EuroCAD Pattern Designer application allows you to trace
188. c for GRADING mode or on the button bar in the grading table In the Load window you must select the file that contains the grading rule and then click on the Accept button The grading steps from the loaded rule 209 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer will appear in the table To apply changes and Edit grading table cm to display the graded pieces you must click the Accept button in the point grading table 7 08 06 apa gl my Jb i Sal io T 1 0 2 1 1 0 ama aa 7 08 0 6 A KOR O 2a 4 pE UE 0 6 T wg T Accept ut Save multiple grading rules in a single file You can now save the grading rule for multiple points in a single rul file For this operation you must select the points whose rules must be saved and then click the Save the grading rule of the point button This button can be accessed from the button bar specific for GRADING mode or on the button bar in the grading table In the Save window you must insert the file name to be saved ex central point grading under sleeve then click the Save button If the point selection was done consecutively the save procedure will start from the first to last selected points considered clockwise If the point selection was not done consecutively the save for the point grading rules will proceed following the point selection Thus you must pay attention when loading such a saved
189. c for cutting If you check Rotate together with all size in the marker the pattern will be rotated together with all other patterns in a specific size Rotation restriction To set the rotation liberty of a pattern you must click on the small arrow near the 180 l i ea field You can choose one of the options in the opened list No rotation the pattern will have the same rotation in the marker no rotation 180 will be allowed Fs aE Pattern rotation by 180 90 or 45 allows pattern rotation in the marker with the mentioned angle No restriction allows pattern positioning in any position in the marker No restriction The most usual setting for patterns is 180 degrees freedom W Rotate entire l l Hee If you check Rotate entire bundle the pattern will be rotated in the marker l together with all other patterns for the specific size Rotate entire bundle Flip restriction mirroring on pattern placement on the fabric for cutting _ Flip restrictions To define flip restriction pattern placement on the fabric you must click on the small arrow near the field In the opened list you can find the following options Hone z None no pattern symmetrization in the marker is allowed None 8 020 0Ott stiS Flip to grain axis allow pattern symmetrization in the marker according to grain Nae DA D axis Flip perpendicular to grain axis allow pattern symmetrization in the marker perp
190. cal found over each quadrant in the page A Wo Uze this page with supplementary specifications menu will open with Text and Image Text options you can select the type of men information to be introduced If you have selected Text you will be able to enter the specific text in the corresponding quadrant To save information click on Accept Product technical sheet General product infomation page 1 Drawings and technical s I Uses this page with supplementary specifications ie z If you have selected Image then two specific buttons will automatically appear Download image and Delete image To add an image click on Download image button To save the entered information click on Accept button Download image Delete image 308 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Product berhniral sheet es 1 Pants for boys veth eaiel bard of 3 cm vith front cantered button hale 2 Lateral pockets of 3 om width 3 Front cerier pocket wilh 2 5 cm fold and zipper opening um e um Me The back packat ia sewed with iha pocket bag 309 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 13 3 Print project and piece technical sheets To print the project technical sheet click on Print project technical sheet button Click on the symbol on the right side of the button a small menu opens in which you can select three prin
191. can be realized by using the active points positions Note The Normal Advanced magnetizing is very much alike to the simple Alt magnetizing The difference between these two types of magnetizing is the fact that in the second case with the Alt key the program will activate also the intersection points beside the graded points 106 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 2 Advanced magnetizing using an offset f Length Re 6 cm Note The intersection points are those points that you can find on the intersection between tow patterns and they becomes active only when you are using the simple magnetizing using Alt key not when you are using the advanced one for the graded points Advanced magnetizing using lengths Points representing the f intersection between the trajectories that the graded points might have and the next drawing point position If you want to use this function you must activate the second option from the Advanced magnetizing window When this function is active you must insert the two offsets x and y These two offsets can be positive negative or 0 according to the point positions that you want to obtain After filing both fields click on the Apply button While this function is active when you will press C trl Alt key combination all grading points from all model patterns will be active together with the new possible position that they can have a
192. can find also the buttons for operations on the symmetry axis Operation Edit the symmetry axis Delete symmetry axis Operations that can be done on a percent notch 1 Edit symmetry axis To edit the symmetry axis for a piece you must declare this symmetry axis on another segment Thus you must first click to select the symmetry axis then click on the Edit symmetry axis button and then click on the segment that must become the new symmetry axis for the selected piece Click to select the piece and click to select the piece symmetry axis The symmetry axis is marked by a red dotted line while in the right side docker it will be displayed the menu properties for the symmetry axis Operation cursor dit the symmetry axis In the right side docker you must click on Edit symmetry axis button The cursor will transform into a thick horizontal arrow called selection cursor Delete symmetry axis You must move the cursor over the segment that will become the new symmetry axis when the cursor gets over a segment that may become a symmetry axis near the cursor appears an OK Click on this segment The cursor will get back to the normal shape in GARMENT TOOL mode and the selected segment will become the new symmetry axis and will be represented by a red dotted line 194 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 2 Delete a symmetry axis To delete a symmetry axis you must first select it and then click
193. ccording to the offset that you have set The next operation can be applied using the grading points position or the position that they may have according to them offset from the Advanced magnetize If you want to use this function you must activate the third option from the Advanced magnetizing window After activating this function you must insert the desired dimension in the field corresponding to length and then press Apply When this function is active and you press Alt Ctri all the grading points will become active together with the possible trajectory that the point can have according to the radius that you have set by inputting the length In this case the trajectory becomes a circle around the graded points One circle for each graded point Note If you are in Draw tool mode and you are using the Length advanced magnetizing type together with the drawing constrained to the next point or to the next line you can notice that beside the graded points and them trajectories there are also some other points active points displayed on the graded points trajectories These points represent the intersection between the trajectories that the graded point might have and the next drawn point position according to the settings that you have made for the next point 107 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer If you want to use this function you must activate the fourth option from the Adv
194. cel Edit size set cm nae ee eee ae a SSS Grupi_ Sizes Pindex alias _ Dimensionss gt 42 42 2 z After a new column is added you must check the Made to measure size option The Made to measure size will be marked in red Made to measure size quotes color that you cannot edit anymore Any size in the size set can be declared as made to Edit size set Dimension step fo e measu re S ize Iv Hideous grading sats aaam The quotes in a size can be modified also in the I Many grading groups can include the same size Generate automatically bl di t i t H Uassa oOo o table It SIZE SET Description Size set name DIMENSIONS FOR LADIES Size set description Accept Exit In the PARAMETRICAL mode you must click the Quickly modify the dimensions from the size set for the client size button a wa e oe anergn as In the opened table you must enter the dimensions for the special customer After you input the new values you must click the Accept button it will result automatically the pattern that corresponds to the new entered dimensions If you want to discard the new entered values you must click on the Cancel button 299 Warning There is no Made to measure size in the size set Do you want to change a size From size set into Made to measure size Grup C 40 L 42 C 44 46 Client
195. ch first select the piece then the notch In the lower part of the right docker click the Change mark points button The cursor will change to a thick horizontal arrow Move the cursor over the new mark point and click left mouse button Select the piece Click on the notch whose mark point has to be changed The notch and the actual mark point will be selected and turn to red Operation Cursor j In the lower part of the right docker click on Change J mark points The cursor will change to a thick horizontal arrow called selection cursor point Convert notch to point Delete notch 136 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Place the cursor over the second new mark point When the cursor is over a graded point that may become a mark point for the selected notch near the cursor appears OK Click on this point The cursor gets back to the normal shape in Garment tool mode and the mark points for the notch will change The notch position remains the same and the percent for placement is calculated correspondently 2 Convert a notch to a point A notch can be converted to a point First click to select the notch then click Convert to point button in the lower part of the right docker Near the notch appears a grade point To convert a notch to a point first select the notch Place the cursor over the notch and click the left mouse button Operation Change m
196. circle is created by procedures based on point and geometrical elements created during the previous steps When the project is saved the computer memorizes not only the final pattern but also all the steps required to realize the pattern By parametrical design method there are defined the coordinates of the main geometrical points in the pattern Then the designer will draw a pattern by the direct method this pattern will be anchored on the geometrically defined points REVIEW Parametrical design supposes some successive steps through which the essential points of the pattern are created by geometrical procedures using formulas and parameters After defining these parametrical points you must draw an overlay pattern whose points will be anchored on the parametrical points that were previously defined The main advantages of the parametrical design for a product There are two main advantages resulting from the parametrical design of a pattern both of them related to the product grading the patterns anchored on a parametrical layer can be automatically and fully graded in a blink of an eye by using the standard dimensions values for each size in the size table for made to measure production the patterns anchored on a parametrical layer can be automatically modified to fit the individual dimensions of each client These two main advantages are compensating the effort and the supplementary time required by the anchor parametrical la
197. ck on Apply button or to press ENTER key You have two options either you match one piece at a time or you assemble the pieces over the sewing line and follow the overlapping of the matching points The latter is the most recommended method assembly pieces 185 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer over the sewing line For the given example you must first join the two parts of the face and then you must overlap the matching points Add a matching point also on the second part of the face and set its coordinates similar to the first matching point After you have set the position and offset for the matching points you will join the pieces that must compose the flower In PIECE mode hold down the ALT key and drag one of the matching points with the mouse until perfect overlapping with the second one After joining the two parts of the fabric front you must look for a perfect overlapping of the two matching points If you hold down the ALT key while dragging the two points will be magnetized and perfectly overlapped Hold down ALT to magnetize matching point over other points For the striped fabric you must follow the same steps By placing the matching point on the fabric front you will set the coordinates for the matching point To add and set matching points you MUST follow the same steps as for the flower fabric model Setting the matching point on the fabric A piece may co
198. click on OK The selected segment will be divided by adding curve points BI al vox tem DE st Click on the Divide The segment was Select the segment l i Enter the number of segments 4 i 7 segment in a given number of divided by adding to be divided then click on OK parts button grading points If you want to divide a line or a curve in several equal segments you must select besides the end points all the points between them if any Therefore the segment or the curve will be divided in the required number of parts ignoring the already existing points If a new point has the same position with an already existing point one of them will be deleted Select all the points in the area that will be The selected area was divided by adding divided grading points the already existing points being ignored 1 6 16 Smoothing a part of the piece contour by Bezier curves If a digitized piece has a segmented contour and the curves appear irregular EurcoCAD Pattern Designer offers two possibilities to improve the piece quality Smoothing the polygon by transforming the lines into smooth curves Interpolation of the polygon lines into one or more Bezier curves The main difference between SMOOTHING and INTERPOLATION during smoothing no point on the curve is deleted while during interpolation there are removed as many points as possible To smooth a part of a piece contour you must select the points on the segment and then click
199. coercion to the next point Set properties for next line For a computer assisted drawing based on the parameters of the next point you must check the next point option in the right side menu Coerce to After you check this option the specific option boxes are activated and you can enter the coordinates for the new point according to the piece origin or to the previous point There are two options to set the next point position X Y coordinates from the piece origin point displacement dX dY from the last placed point Draw a new point on specified Draw a new point by setting the coordinates from the piece origin distance from the last placed point Point Point ka cm ka cm After entering the coordinates click on Apply To draw a new point on Y fi cm dx 233 cm dy fi2 cm To create a point based coordinates from the piece origin click with the left mouse button in one of the boxes that corresponds to X Y axes enter the coordinates for the new point and then click on Apply button A new point will appear on the workspace on the specified coordinates TF Ad 2 cm dx J45 cm dy 44 cm Apply ate To create a point at a distance from the last placed point click with the left mouse button in dX dY box enter the horizontal vertical distance from the last placed point and then click on Apply button A new point will appear on the workspace on the specified
200. ct the pints from which will be created the new ones and press the button Create a new point at a given distance from a selected point In the window that will appear the user must type the distance between the selected points and the new points that will be added spared by space than button Accept must be pressed Ver ee ex Bl yPRRESS 0 Ditlence 4 bo the mer caeahend pomt Select de points from which Press the button Create The values for adding the new points The new points were will be created the new ones a new point at a given are typed with space between them created the distance was Points selection will be done distance from a selected and after that will be pressed Accept respected on the contour by window selection ore by point button line selecting each point and It is possible to introduce negative keeping the SHIFT key values in order to change the pressed direction of adding the point Create a new point at a certain percentage between two selected points Saal Create a new point at a certain percentage between 2 selected points f This function is helpful in order to create a point at a certain percentage between two selected points The user must select two points by the selection window or by keeping SHIFT key pressed and click each point After selection the button Create a new point at a certain percentage between two selected points In the new window tha
201. cut lines can be curved After the cut line shape was modified click on End editing CL button CL cut line Modify the shape of a dart cut line Operations Edit gut line Rotation tyg Edit Click on the piece then the piece peak to select it then click on Edit cut line button A new working mode similar with SHAPE TOOL mode is started Position and shape for the cut line can be modified All shape modifying functions available in Cursor SHAPE mode can be used The cut line contour point can be moved to other position some points can be added or moved on the cut line the curve shape can be modified The dart obtained by cleaving the piece over the cut line will be perfectly built for sewing regarding the side length and the edge points overlapping 159 c4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 15 Operations on the dart cut a piece over dart A piece can be cut in two parts separated by the dart and the cutting line The parts can be separated by the two darts if we deal with a multiple dart Enter the GARMENT TOOL mode click on the piece then on the piece peak to select it and click on Cut over dart button Cut over dart Cut piece over a selected dart Select piece click on the piece peak then click on Cut over dart button The piece will be split in two parts either over the cutting line for a simple dart or over the openings of the two darts double d
202. d also a single piece but the size set will contain a single size in this case the size will be called BS the pattern will not be graded The option Import on the internal seam line must be checked according to the DXF creation method If the file includes the pieces on the seam line you must check this option if the pieces on the cut line you must leave the message unchecked Important pieces rearrangement can be done automatically if you check the message Rearrange the imported pieces In order to import the internal drawings for the pieces in a DXF file you must check the Import internal drawings option If you check Round the pieces contour on DXF file import part of the points on the piece contour will be smoothed Only the points whose smoothing does not coarsely affect the piece shape will be smoothed If you check Only curve points on DXF file import only the points on the curve of the piece contour will be smoothed If you will checked the option Use margin then the contour of the imported pieces it will have a smooth contour in the points with a deviation toward the initial position equal with the introduced value in the field of this 318 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer option When is checked the option Use special rounding algorithm the contour of the pieces will be rounded after the algorithm of drawing curves If you check Switch the sign of the grading rules the sign for the grading steps
203. d piece in the selected points 1 11 14 Simulate the combination by sewing for two pieces WALKING PIECES By clicking the Walking pieces button in MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode you can visualize dynamically the combination between two pieces Thus a piece will rotate around another piece starting from the selected points in the direction that you choose First you must select the starting point on the fixed piece and then the point that indicates the direction to be followed by the fixed piece then you must select the corresponding points on the mobile piece Sewing simulation can be done by walking on the contour with the darts closed or opened point by point notch to notch with an adjustable simulation step You can also simulate a folded sewing At the end of the simulation you can choose to keep the pieces in the simulation position In MEASURE AND CHECK mode you must click on the button Walking pieces The cursor will transform into a selection cursor You must select the starting point on the fixed piece and then select the point that will indicate the piece rotation direction on the same piece You must click on the point when near the cursor appears the OK sign You must select the starting point on the mobile piece and then on the same piece you must select the point that indicates the rotation direction You must click on the point when near the cursor appears the OK sign
204. d sizes on the product technical sheet v First measure a perimeter a direct distance or an angle see chapters 1 11 1 1 11 2 and 1 11 5 Just after the measurement while the results are still displayed in the upper menu click with the right mouse button on a free row in the watcher Measurement table cm No furent measwemer Shot 44 lae e S052 54 Ea 27 2775 28 23 235 24 5 521 521 5 21 4 Waist band 8g 97 101 105 5 Suto 5 QRMMMss 35 35 35 7 type name ENTER If you must operate an important measurement to be kept for printing in the product technical sheet click in the box where the measure name must appear in order to insert the specific name Type the measurement name then press ENTER key For the base size the measurement column is displayed on back background EAEE table m E EJ EEEE E fark a undersleeve sleeve collar 75 21 3 a Click with the right mouse button on the row where is located the measurement to be deleted Measurement table cm No Curentmeasuremen Shot__ 44 46 4e a0 5254 de eal 25 255 O 265 27 27 5 21 215 WJ 23 23 5 523 52 521 521 5 21 81 85 89 93 97 101 Add compose measur gent Load names Save names Near the mouse cursor appears a small menu in which you must click on Add measurement option The measured values will appear in the table for the base size and for the graded sizes on the corresponding table columns Measur
205. d to correspond with the size set ofthe main piece the from those in the main pattern you will be grading for the current sizes in both sets willbe kept warned by a message that explains how will Proceed behave the sizes for the auxiliary patterns No If you copy a main pattern grouped with one or more auxiliary patterns then the result will be another main group with attached auxiliary patterns 37 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Detach a main pattern from the auxiliary patterns in PATTERN mode click to select the main pattern that is attached to one or more auxiliary patterns To detach auxiliary patterns from the main pattern you a ee By a RB Br m E Y must click on the Detach a main pattern from auxiliary patterns button Detach a main piece from auxiliary pieces Attention This button becomes active only when you select a main pattern with attached auxiliary patterns An auxiliary pattern can be designed for cutting to CNC machine for this w Cut on CHE must check Cut on CNC machine option from right side menu in machine Pattern mode This option is active when you select an auxiliary W Ausiliany piece pattern 1 5 23 Align a pattern to the grain axis After digitization or after various operations during design process the patterns can be rotated from the standard position in which the grain axis is oriented horizontally or vertically It may be difficult to do ope
206. d while holding down CTRL key No as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Simultaneous changes for multiple patterns To change a property on multiple selected patterns first select the patterns then set the change only for a single pattern from the selected The same property will automatically change for all selected patterns Sach ty piece name Eo correspondingly To apply changes you f must click on Accept button For example if patterns 1 2 3 4 and 5 are not symmetrical and you want to make them symmetrical you must click to select them as previously described and then check the box in row 3 Sym column automatically the boxes in rows 1 2 4 and 5 are checked in Sym column then click on Accept button Similarly if the user wants to change into double the patterns 2 and 3 which now are symmetrical double meaning they will appear once simple in the marker as they are displayed on the screen and once flipped on Y he will have to select both patterns using Ctrl saat ala or Shift key and then he will have to cies Vv 0 M change only for one of them for ex for EME v o0 Patient propere 1 1 pattern no 3 the quantity on the S am 2 0 1 column from 1 into 2 and on FY cup on 1 column from 1 into 0 After this the user a 1 must press Accept button to save all these changes In the same way all the settings from this table can be chan
207. dd a French curve to the selected pattern pannu DRAW TOOL mode toolbar Draw free or assisted with points and lines Draw rectangles Draw ellipses Draw free or assisted with points and curves Add french curves to pattern contour Draw arc by 3 points Draw arc by 2 points and radius Draw arc by 2 points and angle Draw spiral ee Draw circle Trace mode drawing around the contour of the existing patterns Digi Pen digitize a GARMENT TOOL mode toolbar Create a percent notch Create a distance notch Create intersection notch Create corner notch Create a dependent line Create an interior line by translating a part of the contour 16 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Create an interior line by a parallel to a contour segment nm Create symmetry axis ssa omen comm C Create fold Create a sequence of separate folds Create a sequence of mix folds Declare dart Create dart using 4 points Create dart using 2 points Edit seam allowance and corner finishing type Create a sequence of internal points a GRADING mode toolbar Edit open size set TR t 4 Edit the grading table of a point Edit point grading on direction Linearize grading steps in the selected point Align temporary grading sizes to the selected points Align permanently grading sizes to the selected points Align graded sizes to the grain ax
208. dent line can be rotated with an certain angle related to the given direction 142 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer The dependent line can be rotated by an angle related to the direction Properties given by the mark points To do ni this change the angle values on A Dependent line Distance 4 are E ooro the right side menu and click the nce Apply button Rotation pivot p 2 position can be changed as Ary percent along the segment between the mark points Cutting the pattern with a dependent line 5 Percent The pattern can be cut in two different patterns after the dependent line To cut the pattern first click on the Operation dependent line with the mouse l than press the Cut piece Change mark points button After cut the resulting parts remain superposed on the Cut pie original piece To observe the result the pieces have to be a moved to avoid superposition Changing the mark points Mark points of a dependent line can be changed Changing the mark points will modify the line position and rotation these parameters will be recalculated from the new mark points Operation Change mark points To change mark points click on Change mark points button and click on the first then on the second new mark point Cut piece CLICK Create points on intersection of the dependent line with piece contour Operations
209. dependency groups window are displayed the horizontal and vertical dependency groups and the pieces from these groups To display the vertical dependent groups and the pieces inside them click on Vertical button To display the horizontal dependent groups and the pieces inside them click on Horizontal button Initially only Free pieces and Aligned pieces to stripes and plaid dependency groups are displayed and all pieces in a model are part of the free pieces group as To display the pieces in a dependency group you must click on the small square with the sign i near the dependency group name or you must click on Show dependency group pieces button in the upper part of the Edit dependency groups window To hide the pieces and display only the horizontal or vertical dependency groups you must click on the re small square with the sign near the dependency group name or you must click on Hide dependency group pieces in the upper part of the Edit dependency groups window Edit dependency groupes For the style with multiple fabric layers de ex fond coating insertion etc you z G can edit the dependency groups either for a single fabric or for all fabric layers Thus you must use the filter near the message Fabric You must click on the small arrow on the right side of the box and must select from the displayed list the fabric for which you will edit the dep
210. direction 288 37 CAD Us Circle with contour point and radius tangent to W another circle You draw a new circle CN that crosses the point PA is tangent to the circle CA and has the radius R In the near example it was defined a circle C2 with radius R that has the point P2 on the contour The circle C2 is tangent to the circle C1 er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation The function parameters are Create a new circle CY passing through the point F42 being tangent to the circle Cl the point PA having a radius of 22 cm and the center the circle CA situated on the left side from the first the radius R point the left right option that will place the circle center aside from the point PA on the contour TE Attention To avoid confusions try first both variants then choose the correct direction 1 12 6 Draw a pattern and anchor to the parametrical layer By the parametrical design there are defined the positions of the important geometrical points in a pattern Then the designer must draw by the direct method a pattern and anchor it on the points that are parametrically defined Concluding after defining the main geometrical points a pattern must be designed on the overlay the pattern points will be anchored on the geometrical points that have been already defined To do this you must check first that you are displaying either the pa
211. direction after making the first click into a point you must select the segment who indicates the direction In the place where you make the click a green mark arrow appears pointing the new direction Note If you will make a click beside the point the shape of the draw won t follow the shape of the old piece If you want to copy many section from different piece to create together a single piece you must do the next steps first arrange the pieces into the desired position then start drawing the shape of the new piece on top of the old piece Note When you pass from one piece to the other use an intersection point to make the transition between pieces Otherwise if you will try to use simple points to make the transition the transition will be done thru a simple line 101 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Start drawing by making click in a point on one of the two pieces Click on a segment next to the point Note you can use more then two to indicate the direction pieces if necessa Make a click into an intersection point to make the transition between pieces The result is a new shape having the On the next piece the drawing way The cursor becomes filled with color shape of the selected sections will be clockwise by default and you when you are back in the first If the other two pieces ware graded will have to change it again if it is position and the line contour will be the new shape w
212. distance To realize such a grading you must click to select the point to be graded then another point that will indicate the grading direction then click on Grading a point on a direction button When you click on this button a grading table opens and here you can edit only the distance in the column dist and the angle value between the grading direction and the direction given by the two selected points Set as active one of the four point grading tables of the reference point by selecting one of the four activation buttons from toolbar in Gradi Select the point to be graded Hold the SHIFT key and select the point that indicates the grading direction 6 K S W te Edit point grading on direction After you select the two points you must click on the Edit point grading on direction located on the button bar in GRADING mode When you click on this button a grading table opens here you can edit only the dist column and the angle field 226 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer The distance represents the point movement step from the previous size on the direction given by the other point In the field under the Direction angle message you must insert the angle value between the grading direction and the direction given by the two points If the larger size must move out of the segment defined by the selected points the inserted value must be negative Thi
213. done for active point grading point table This operation is useful if you copied the grading rule between points on pieces with a different orientation from the grain axis Edit grading table cm Select the point which grading will be rotate Select as active table one of four grading table of the point which will be rotate To select active table we have two possibilities 1 select with left click one of the tables from grading toolbox in Grading mode or 2 open point grading table by right click and select with left click one of the four tables shown in the window menu 214 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer ae E Carrie out rotation operation for Edit di t bl m a z z et bi AE c e coat active table Can be done in two Grade Drop Drop Spec Extra ways 1 click on the arrow next to O wr gt l a EN se Tm ls Rotate grading rule 90 os fo degree button from toolbox se er ne ading nic 450 and choose one of the three on 4 7 e i rotation modes 45 90 or N degree or 2 in point grading table choose one of the three buttons Rotate grading rule 45 degree Rotate grading rule lt 2 Rotate grading by 90 90 degree or Rotate grading rule N degree T Rotate grading by N Angle rotation When desired rotation with a Inzert rotation angle certain amount is press Rotate grading rule N degree button and in resulting window insert desired angle
214. dow from which you select the way where you want to load the names from the table the name of file will contain these names after you press Open button The file have dm extension After you open the file in table will be displayed the names on the rows with the corresponding current number File name Measurements dm Files of type Dimensions Hames Cancel 257 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 11 12 Pasting or overlapping two pieces on the indicated points ASSEMBLY To paste or overlap two pieces in some specific points enter the MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode and click on Assembly button The cursor will transform into a selection cursor First select two points on the piece to be moved by mouse click then click to select two corresponding point on the fix piece on which you will make the paste After selecting the last point the first piece mobile is rotated and automatically moved in order to overlap in the selected points on the fixed piece By this operation you can realize pasting and overlapping of two pieces This function will verify the shape correspondence between the pieces that will be sewed together After pasting the piece gradings can be displayed You can also select another base grading in GRADING mode see chapter 1 10 11 in order to check the piece correspondence on other sizes Pasting or overlapping of two pieces n VIE Ba p aN eo
215. e PZT 6 e BE22 F R BIA TOOL BAR ay oo pe aj ee l PIECE BAR zll gt jai Fropestigg lange E70 ges Legi 120 om Eri pont teira x Aa m fai 3 1 em Apply Operator Debie hagan aay WORK AREA PROPERTIES SICON TOOL NIOM 2 SEY DRA of p grains acct gallechesd STATUS BAR Sire paler places Diack THE STANDARD TOOLBAR Zoom level In order to perform various operations you may need a general project overview or you may need a higher detail on a smaller pattern For this operation you can use the magnifiers in the standard toolbar or the shortcuts Zoom out means drawing reducing while zoom in means drawing enlargement Zoom BUON nani the following facilities you can drag the interactive cursor toward to zoom in or toward to zoom out mt zoom to selected area click on this button and then click on the left mouse button and drag to define the region of interest A get back to the last zoom level 20 CAD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer E A zoom the whole project Useful zoom shortcuts are F2 Zoom in enlarge the image F3 Zoom out shrink the image F4 Zoom to selected pattern F5 Zoom to the whole model Mouse wheel Zoom to the region where the mouse cursor is located The zoom can be in or out according to the mouse wheel direction rotation zoom to selected object the image magnified for a selected object to fill
216. e close that application lf the connection cannot be established when opening the Remote Assistance application the icon from the right down corner becomes different The G becomes ellow on a black background 347 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer When making a right click on this icon the same menu will be displayed as in the first case If you want to find information about the Remote Assistance function you must choose About option from the opened menu After this a new window containing information about about the application will be displayed on the screen EURO This window appears on the screen when accessing the About option It Remote Assistance System contents information about connection status pan the connected server IP user name oroin aea deeb I connection time Beenie nase rion ex era ia BE a 5 Click on the OK button to close the Ure rama not regithered connection Como See Lis To close the Remote assistance connection make a right click on the orange icon from the right down corner and then choose Close from the opened menu 348 IC4D User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Remote assistance server settings E General Design Techrical Colors Digitize Plotter keyboard Remote assistar Server ist EurocADi Add seme Remas acaclance maira Delete taya Server name EuroCAD1 Serv
217. e you work with projects from distinct files that are demo mode saved on the workstation harddisk In From database mode you work on your workstation with models stocked in a database located on another computer called server on a server there are connected multiple workstations Default setting local In Demo mode you can save only a single project for demonstrative purposes Automatic security copy at a selected If you check the option to create an automatic security copy at a interval preferred time interval 3 5 minutes recommended the computer Security copy at saving automatically saves the designed project in a file named Autobackup of project_name PAT If you check the option to create a security copy at saving each time you sage the project the program will automatically save the older version that corresponds to the last saving If you realize that you committed a mistake and you have saved the wrong file you have the possibility to open the security copy The name for the security copy is automatically generated as Backup of project_name PAT You can save the security files in the same folder with the original files default security copies creation boxes you must check the specific option or in a separate director for the checked security copies only Disk paths for different files Choose the folders on the harddisk where different file types will be saved default the EuroCAD Pattern Designer
218. e a point at Y distance and trace the horizontal to the left or to the right On this horizontal you must choose a P2 point so as the P1 P2 distance to be equal with D The new point will be draw according to the specification left or right from the reference point Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point PSO from point F49 at The function parameters are 2 26 cm vertically and 6 32 cm diagonally The reference points on the right side Horizontal distance r The distance from the reference point and the new point D To draw the new point you must define the left or right direction If the reference point is already defined you may hold down the SHIFT key and click the left mouse button at the current position the Y and D values and the placement are assigned from the screen and applied automatically in the operation text Point on a line at a given distance from another point By this function you can obtain a new point on a line placed at a given distance from another point that is not on that line In the near example the P4 point was added on the line defined by P1 and P2 points at a distance D from the P3 point onto the right side The placement direction for the new point is reported to the reference point P3 in our example Function parameters The function parameters are Description of the selected geometrical operation The points that define the line on
219. e aligned differently The alignment pack can be temporary or permanent Temporary alignment is maintained on the screen up to the first mouse click after that the pieces comes back to the initial shape Permanent alignment produces the permanent movement of the positions for the graded sizes by automatic recalculation of the grading table Both temporary and permanent alignment can be done on a single axis horizontally OR vertically To align graded sizes to one or two points you must select the piece and then click to select the point s while holding down the SHIFT key Click on Align temporary graded sizes to selected points or Align permanently graded sizes to selected points Align graded sizes to a point Select as active one of the four point grading tables of the reference point by selecting one of the four activation buttons from toolbar in Grading EE a pees Solel 4 Align permanently graded sizes to selected points The graded sizes are translated so as to overlap in the alignment point The shape of the graded sizes remains unchanged and was not rotated In GRADING mode click on the Click on the temporary alignment point that will be used for graded button or on the permanent sizes alignment alignment button Align graded sizes to a point only horizontally or vertically In GRADING mode click on the point that will be used for graded sizes alignment Click on the arrow but
220. e been introduced information at Piece description these can be imported by checking the option Add pattern description to name If you want to import from Gerber a model with the grading rules then it must be checked the option Import grading If you want to import only the base size then you must uncheck Import grading M Set undetined points as smooth In EuroCAD the pieces can be simple double or double mirror while in Gerber the pieces can be multiple symmetries horizontally vertically or both Thus you may choose either a direct piece import with the specific doubling options or to multiply pieces according to the specifications in the original project If you choose import directly pieces with their own doubling settings at file import you must define the piece type as simple double double mirrored in order to keep their number and position Example if in Gerber a piece was defined as triple with horizontal symmetry in EuroCAD this piece will be imported twice the first piece will have the double setting while the second piece will have the double mirrored setting If you choose multiply pieces according to the original model the pieces will be imported in the position specified in Gerber horizontal or vertical flip or alas both as simple pieces C acoonding to defauk notch settings in When you import native Gerber files tmp you must specify the way you will Eurocad Pattern D
221. e displayed the horizontal distance which is always according to the parallel at the grain axis of the pattern between the two elements of the same pattern There will be calculated the distances on every graded size and it will be displayed in the upper side of the screen if the measurement has been made between two graded elements The displayed distance can be introduced in the measurement table Attention If the pattern doesn t have a grain axis the the horizontal distance will be displayed according with the X axis of the coordinate system Because of that the measurements values introduced on the measurements table will be updated in function of the rotation of the pattern It is the same situation when the measurement is made from a piece to another piece ce cm p iss Fa Te bE E e R 415 l 12 13 13 Measure the difference on of the direct distance When you will check the option Measure the difference on Y of the direct distance it will be displayed the vertical dimension which is always according to the perpendicular at the grain axis of the pattern between the two elements of the pattern It will be calculated the distances on every graded size and it will be displayed in the upper side of the screen if the measurement has been made between two graded points The displayed distance can be introduced lately in the measurement table Attention If the pattern doesn t have declared the grain axis the vertical dimension it
222. e ends the grain mode click on the piece want to set the start for the grain axis axis While the axis position and then click on the Create rotation are manually set you can grain axis button observe a deviation from the needed angle and position The correct axis length and position can be set precisely by typing the exact coordinates Setting the angle length and position for the grain axis Grain axis Grain axis Grain axis Propertie 0 00 degrees fo degrees Angle fo degrees Length fek cm Length y Length 16 65 cm Enty point coordinates Enty point chardinates Entry point coordinates ne fi 2E cm pi f 26 cm yf 6 02 cm a 6 02 cm Apply Apply Click on the piece The axis length can The grain axis After an exact setting for the rotation length then on the grain be modified by position can and axis position press ENTER key or click on axis typing the new modified the Apply button The grain axis will be type the exact value values in the entering automatically placed at the entered for the angle of the corresponding coordinates for the coordinates To display the piece name and the grain axis with boxes axis starting point size automatically click Show hide piece the horizontal line If a piece has a grain axis you can rotate it at any moment so as the grain line will be horizontal see chapter 1 5 20 The grain axis position and rotation are essential for a correct nesti
223. e in a grading group If the Measures can be common to multiple z Dimension step bases option is checked then you can allocate more bas than one size per grading group After you have made all Many grading groups can include the same size Generate automatically F Use separetor needed changes click on Accept button Made to measure size Description Size set name Size set description To distribute sizes on grading group you must check uncheck the table columns that corresponds to each size A size cannot be allocated checked but to a Te single grading group unless you check the option The ___Eitszeset ae i sizes can be associated to more than one size After J Many grading groups can include the same size s Generate automatically you have done these operations you must click on Miaa Ei aaa Accept button to apply changes Description Size set name Size set description Accept Exit 229 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Jos h z t t S ke he me _ fej po Spec ema _ ee ES EE 44 46 48 i 50 52 54 Fe Edit size set Dimension step 0 If you check the option Measures can be common to multiple bases you can use a size from the set for some pieces from the model for some specific sizes Regarding this the piece number can be different for Size name m l Many grading gro
224. e lines will not be cut even if this option is checked Internal line parameters Angle you can change the angle for the text axis Length you can define dimensions for a text axis internal line The internal line length cannot be edited if the line is unlimited if the Narrow box is unchecked Text for the Text internal lines you can insert the text that must appear on the piece axis in the field under the message Text This field will be inactive for the Simple and Piece name internal lines Position You can define the precise coordinates horizontal and vertical for the start and end line points To validate changes in the properties menu you must click on Apply button or you must press ENTER key Edit the text for the Text internal line Internal line M Narrow Eut on the cutting machine look for the directior On the Text internal lines you can edit a message that will be displayed and printed on the piece over the axis You must click in the field under Text and you type the message using the keyboard Internal line Properties Type Text I Narrow Cut on the cutting machine Parameter Angle 2509 46 degrees Length 11 93 crm Test look tor the direction After you enter the message you must click on ENTER key or click on the Apply button in the right side docker The message will be displayed along the interna
225. e modified inadequately If you diminish the curve length you must respect the line length between the two points as a minimum Segment length or segment length or Bezier curve length Bi Bezier curve length m cm T 1 0 2 cm Select the curve Down the right side docker the segment for length actual curve length appear in change the specific field 1 6 21 Round a corner To round a piece corner you must first select the point that defines the corner Then click on Round corner button A small window will open here you must enter the radius for the corner rounding then click on Accept button The corner will be rounded by point removal and replacement with an arch The rounding radius must not be too large 59 a b as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Select the corner to be Click on Round corner Enter radius circle for corner rounded button rounding and click on Accept button 1 6 22 Create new points placed towards selected points As result the corner is replaced by an arch EuroCAD Pattern Designer uses two functions in order to create new points that are placed towards selected points Create a new point ata given distance from a selected point Create a nev point at a given distance From a selected point This function permits to be created new gradation points on the perimeter of the pattern These points will be placed at certain distance to one or more grad
226. e moved to be seen Delete contour separately 145 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Change the mark points Operation Change mark painta Cut over contour Create points Delete contour To change the mark points for a translated contour you must click on the Change mark points button and then click on the first and second new mark points consecutively Create points on intersection of translated contour with piece contour Operation Change mark paints Cut over contour Create points Delete contour To create points on the intersection of translated contour with piece contour first click on the translated contour to select it then the click on Create points button on the menu in the right side of the screen The points will appear automatically there where the translated contour intersects the piece contour Delete the translated contour Operation Change mark points Cut over contour Create points k elete contour To delete a translated contour you must first select the contour and the clock on the Delete contour button in the right docker menu or the delete button from the keyboard 146 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 8 Parallel to the contour In order to create a parallel contour the user must select the Garment Tool mode and press Create a parallel to the contour button The operations tha
227. e network and after finding it click on OK button to save it The path will be Pani Disconnect displayed in the field next to the Browse button To connect on the new data base click on the Connect button The same thing you obtain if you know the computer IP You write the IP check the Remote file and then click on the Connect button 329 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Import from Investronica Data Base Model filters mr ad e fea Ta 8 21 2007 of a is rT sia p 9 21 2007 LA zj eA 8 21 2007 KA Po l Clear The model files from data base can be filtered using the filters from the top side import window All this filters gives you the possibility to sort the model files by brand industry section fabric type size set season status or by the date when the file was create or changed The Delete button can be used to cancel all filters used by user before If the All models option is not checked the user will be able to view all models from data base with the coresponding pieces All models x lt Filter for models name SPORT MEM GE3 Mita Sport Men Sport JEANS WOMAN GEN Jeans MEN JACKET INT Emidio Tucci MEN JACKE T LIN Emidio Tucci Tailoring MENJACKET SHE Emidio Tucci a WOMER SUIT ENT Pilar Rueda Woman WOMEN SUIT FOR Pilar Rueda List of models from daia base Woman WOMERN SUIT GEM Pilar Rueda Woman B
228. e opened model Function Corner notch activation permits the multiselection only of the corner notch from the opened model Function Dependent line activation allows the multiselection of the dependent lines from the opened model Function Translated contour activation allows the multiselection of the translated contour from the opened model Function Parallel activation allows the multiselection of the parallel contour from the opened model Function Symmetry axis activation allows the multiselection of the symmetry axis from the opened model 195 es User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Function Grain axis activation allows the multiselection of the grain axis from the opened i l model Grain axis BEC Function Text axis activation allows the multiselection of the text axis from the opened model Text axis R Function Internal point activation allows the multiselection of the internal points from the opened model Internal point Function Fold activation allows the multiselection of the folds from the opened model Function Darts activation allows the multiselection of the darts from the opened model im Function Folded Darts activation allows the multiselection of the folded darts from the i opened model Folded darts In order to activate the multiselection for one of the categories mentioned above it must be activated the function of the categ
229. e pattern contour using the same buttons as when you digitize a pattern All elements that you will digitize after making click on the D key will belong to the auxiliary pattern Click on E key from pointer to end up digitizing an auxiliary pattern The user must click one more time on the E key from the pointer if he wants to use a different contour type then the contour type that he has set in the Digitizing settings 127 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 8 6 Insert the pattern name and end the digitization The name for the digitized pattern can be introduced directly from the Digitizer The pointer will be placed consecutively on the letters corresponding to the pattern name Letter selection will be done by using the 0 pointer button for each letter The chosen name appears simultaneously on the computer screen Introducing pattern name The pattern name is typed letter by letter using the keyboard on the control panel of the digitizing panel There are two ways that you can use to end up digitizing a pattern Directly by making a click o the B button from the pointer Or by making a click on the STOP button from the sticker using 0 key from the pointer You can end up digitizing sign out from Digitizing mode in two ways Directly by making a click on the F key from the pointer Or by making a click on the EXIT button from the sticker using
230. e patterns you must select these patterns and then click on the button Show hide grading Show hide measurement table The measurements done on a pattern can be memorized in a measurement table To show hide the measurement table for a pattern you must click on the button Show hide measurement table Show hide distances on the patterns The line or curve dimensions between two graded points can be displayed on all patterns from the model without making any measurements before To display the distances on the patterns must press Show hide distances on the patterns Edit pattern dependency groups For the patterns designed on plaids and stripes fabric you must edit the dependency groups for all patterns Thus you must click on the button Edit pattern dependency groups and you must set the groups as described in the chapter 1 12 1 Change the selection mode internal or contour You can select the patterns with mouse click not only on the contour but also internally To change the selection mode click on Change the selection mode internal or contour or open the Model menu and select Contour selection option This option is very useful when you have overlapped patterns on screen Edit the product technical sheet Beside the pattern you will need to save other important information regarding project description the finished product sketch technical details on finishing information on product
231. eaeaeeesaes Use CTRL ALT keys to draw freely an arc by 2 points and radius 0000 Draw arc by 2 points and radius using precise quotas and dimensions Draw arc by two points and radius by constraining to the next line ccceeeee Draw arc by two points and radius by constraining to the next point Draw arc by two points and radius by constraining to the radius cecee eee Draw arc by two points and angle cccccccee cence ee ee ee ee een eee eee eee eaane ee eaenenes Use CTRL SHIFT ALT keys to draw freely an arc by 2 points and angle Draw arc by two points and angle using precise quotas and dimensions Draw arc through three points by constraining to the next line Draw arc by two points and angle by constrain to the next point Draw arc by two points and arc by constraining the starting angle LIA SIMA cine E E E eecassetomenagae sob wsece naeaenaeuusen sane bcasanenaineecanaeseseente Draw a circle knowing the radius Draw a circle by constraining the next point 00 ccc cece cece cece eee enna eens eaeeaes Draw a circle by constraining the radius length cece cee ene cece eee e eee eneeesanees Trace mode drawing around the contour of the existing pieces ccseceee Draw a circle or ellipse Draw a square or rectangle ccccceeecce eee ce eee eeseeeeesaeeeeeesgeeeessassenesas
232. econd bottom pomt of the current fold 7 the second peak pont of the nest fold Select the first bottom point of the current fold the first peak point of the next fold Select the first peak point of the fold Select the second peak point of the fold Select the first bottom point of the current fold the first peak pont of the next fold Select the second bottom point of the current fold the second peak point of the next fold 170 as Be User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Select the first peak point of the fold Select he second peak point of the fold Select lhe second bottom pomt of the current fold 4 the second peak point of the nest fold Select the first bottom point of the current fold the first peak point of the next fold Select the first peak point of the fold Select the second peak point of the fold g elect the first bottom point of the current fold the first peak point of the next fold Select the second bottom point of the current fold the second peak point of the next fold Select the first peak point of the fold Select he second peak point of the fold Select lhe second bottom pomt of the current fold 4 the second peal pont of the next fold Select the first bottom point of the current fold the first peak point of the next fold 171 as User manual EuroCAD Pat
233. ed only on fixed angles from the CTRL workspace coordinates as you draw for the previous lines will be only of 0 15 from the workspace 30 45 60 75 90 from the ena workspace coordinates The rotation step is of 15 thus the next line to be directed angle between the new and the under a precise angle last line last point If you hold down SHIFT key as you draw the next line will be perfectly perpendicular or under a predefined angle 15 30 45 60 75 degrees from the previous line es point Hold down If you hold down SHIFT key as you SHIFT draw the next line will be perfectly perpendicular or under a_ predefined as you draw for the next angle from the previous line line to be directed under a precise angle from the The rotation step is of 15 thus the previous line angle between the new and the previous lines will be only of O 15 30 45 60 75 90 from the last line t poi i i last point previous line If you hold down ALT key as you draw the next point will be attracted and perfectly overlapped on the points on other piece thus you can fit the new piece contour on a preexisting one Hold down ALT as you draw to overlap the next point on the existing points on other pieces Create a new piece whose contour For a perfect overlap of the points in must precisely follow the contour of the new piece over the points in the an existing piece old piece hold down ALT key as
234. ed by double minus 16 0 16 0 16 0 sign Ex 3 20 0 BUR 70 0 RGR f 20 0 EA Important All operations carried out in the point grading table described in paragraphs a b c d are applying for active table selected grade table grade drop spec or extra For switching from one table to another select with left click desired table from toolbar e How to save a grading rule in a file How to load and apply a grading rule from a file The grading rule of a point is the grading table content it represents all the movements done by a point in order to obtain a new size in the graded size list This grading rule can be saved in a file and can be used later for an automatic grading of another point You can also save multiple grading rules for a point or a succession of points in a single file Save the grading rule 2 G28 or To save the grading rules of a point click on the Save the grading rule of the point This cr button can be accessed from the button bar 2 F E4 x IS te toe specific for GRADING mode or on the button bar in the grading table In the Save window you must insert the file name to be saved ex central point grading under sleeve then E Zali Ut click the Save button za I 1 08 7 08 34 7 SS 1 08 E 1 24 Load a grading rule To load an already saved rule click on the Load and apply the grading rule file This button can be accessed from the button bar specifi
235. ed in the status bar in the lower part of the application If you have selected a symmetrical pattern near its name appears an S between brackets if you have selected a double pattern near its name appears a D between brackets if you have selected a mirror double pattern near its name appears an MD between brackets By defining a selection region with mouse click and drag you can select one or mode patterns Hold down to select deselect patterns one by one while clicking on them ai If you click on another pattern or near a pattern the selection is lost To select consecutively multiple patterns you must click on them consecutively while holding down SHIFT key Similarly if you want to deselect one or more pattern from a selected group you can click consecutively on those patterns while holding down SHIFT key When you select multiple patterns by using SHIFT key or by defining a selection region in the status bar it will be displayed the number or selected main and 3 pieces selected 1 auxiliary piece auxiliary patterns 1 5 2 Move patterns move patterns using CTRL pattern origin placement Hold down Patterns can be easily moved with the mouse with the keyboard arrows or by introducing the movement distances in the specific boxes Click to select a pattern and CTRL drag it with the mouse To move a pattern only on horizontal or vertical you must hold down CTRL key to restrict pattern The
236. ed points remain unchanged see chapter 1 5 24 and 1 6 16 Graded point f graded point Point definition Graded points are marked in red while the curve points are marked in blue To change a point type click to select it and Curve point piece origin then check the point type in the upper property bar Cee paint C curve pont Pe IMPORTANT When a grade point defined from the piece origin is transformed in point defined from a parametrical point its grading table is permanently lost and the grading rule will be taken from the anchor parametrical point When a curve point is transformed into curve point its grading table is initialized based on the grading tables of the closest grade points or based on the grading rules of the parametrical point When a graded point is transformed in curve point the grading table is permanently lost and its grading rule is automatically calculated as for an usual curve point 58 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 6 19 Open Close a piece perimeter If a piece has a closed contour then it is displayed filled If the piece has an open contour the first and the last point are not connected then it will not be filled A piece with an open contour will be considered unfinished and will not be considered when the pattern is prepared for cutting Attention It is possible that the first and the last point are overlapped but not connected Only apparently the piece
237. ed points or a curve The function is used generally in order to create new patterns starting from a base pattern It is used for creating points necessary for notch declaration The function is useful in the following situations a To create a new point from a selected point b To create more points from a selected point c To create a point from multiple selected points d To create more points from multiple selected points Create a new point from a selected point In order to create a new point at a certain distance to a selected point the user must select the point and press the button Create a new point at a given distance from a selected point A window will appear in which the user must type the distance in centimeters till the new point and press Accept The distance is measured along the contour in clock wise If the user wants to add a point in counter clock wise will be introduced a negative value The new point is a cure point a IAR fa 5 j i H fy ts S e Functdei sa a l Add new point n ajx E rtance acs 7 to the new cneabed point Select the point towards Press Create a Will be introduced the distance where you want to add the new new point at a you want to be created the new point point given distance from and press Accept If the distance is a a selected point positive value the point will be added in clock wise if the distance is a negative value the point will be add in
238. eenegss B e Eae ake oira e EE E E E EE A T ja 15 76 La 78 N N N N User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 31 Graded points magnetizing 1 7 32 Intersection points magnetizing 1 7 30 Set the type of the advanced magnetize 1 7 33 Internal points magnetizing 1 7 34 Contours magnetizing 1 7 35 Parallels magnetizing DIGITIZE mode overlapping length reopening a dart Digitizer 114 Digitizing a pattern outline 116 How to use pointer buttons to digitize a pattern 119 Digitize a pattern grading 120 Digitize the technical elements of a pattern 120 Insert the pattern name and end the digitization 0 0 ecececeee ee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeestenees 127 Edit the digitizer settings profile 128 GARMENT TOOL mode 130 Introduction 130 Create a notch 131 Change a mark point 132 Convert a notch to a point 133 Delete a notch 133 Percent notch 134 Change the mark point 135 Convert a notch to a point 136 Delete a notch 136 Intersection notch 137 Change the mark point 138 Delete a notch 139 Corner notch 139 Delete a corner notch 140 Dependent line 141 Translated contour 143 Parallel to the contour 145 Define a dart 147 1 9 10 Check the pattern temporary dart closure checking and adjusting of edges 149 1 9 11 Automatically create a dart using 4 points User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 12 Automatic
239. egments It is the normal corner type applied by the program Intersection The seam allowances on the two segments remain separated Separate It is obtained by intersection of the allowance extension with the corresponding angle bisecting line otep It is obtained by symmetrization of the seam allowance toward the axis of the previous segment and by cutting the corner that surpasses the next seam allowance Prey Symetr It is obtained by symmetrization of the next seam allowance toward the axis of the next segment and by cutting the corner that surpasses the previous seam allowance Prev and Next Symmetry corner types are very useful for finishing the seam allowances Next Sumet ry that will be folded at 180 after sewing thus you avoid the effort for corner straightening It is obtained by the intersection of the previous segment with the next seam allowance and by raising a perpendicular line in that point up to the intersection with the previous seam allowance gt Prey Perpendicular gt Next Perpendicular Bevel It is obtained by extending the bisecting line of the corner angle on a distance equal to the width of the previous seam allowance Prev Bevel 178 It is obtained by intersection of the next segment axis with the previous seam allowance and by raising a perpendicular line in that point up to the intersection with the next seam allowance Is obtained by intersection of the previous segment
240. ement table cm ei as mes as If you want to use the measure in Made to measure mode you must insert in Short column the short name of measurement The table dimensions can de increased or decreased horizontally or vertically to emphasize the details or to see more measurements Measurement table cm No Curent measuemer Shot Jat jas hol l de JEA 25 25 5 21 21 5 a band Add eel Add compose measurement Delete measurement X ma Load names Save names Near the mouse button appears a small menu in which you must choose Delete measurement 253 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 11 8 Add measurements compose in the watcher In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you can compose measurements directly when you do the measurement pressing the SHIFT or ALT SHIFT keys or in the watcher adding a compose measurement In the watcher you can add measurements compose in which the program will automatically calculate mathematical operations as R1 R2 R3 R4 R4 where Rn is the row in the table on which a specific measurement is memorized Add a measurement compose in the watcher Measurement table cm x Measurement table on peed u H IH Back 235 E 27 5 2 Front 25 B i 23 5 Placket 5 21 B i 5 21 4 Waist band 85 101 35 3 5 i 35 Add measurement Add compose measurement h Load names Save names To add a measurement compose click with the right Near the mouse cur
241. ements table see chapter 1 11 7 Measure the direct distance between two points on a straight line lt i ff eH fF ue Measure distance between two points In MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode click on Measure distance between two points On the screen will be active all points all notches and all technical internal point Click on the first point to start the distance measuring This point can be a point on the piece contour or a point inside the piece After first point selection will remain active all mentioned elements points notches technical internal points less the first point selected Move the cursor and make the next click on the end point of the measure the distance The results of the measurement are displayed in the upper side of the screen for the base size and for the gradede sizes if the measurement has been made between two graded points 246 aes B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer ts Cc eH fc bE ko t 50 5 Dz aag a cm Measure the absolute value of the direct distance Eee By checking the option Measure the absolute value of the direct distance it will be displaied the distance in straight line between those two elements The distance can be introduced in the measurement table D m C K T 4 4 4 6 4 7 4 5 cm 4 3 DO Measure the difference on of the direct distance errs 2 When you will check the option Measure the difference on X of the direct distance it will b
242. en a temporary closed dart select the piece in GARMENT TOOL mode and click on the dart peak In the dart list on the right side menu appears the pisii original dart that has a 0 Angle 151 51 degrees degrees angle and the Dart Dart Dart Dart Properties Properties Properties Angle 151 51 degrees Angle 104 25 degrees Angle 151 51 degrees Operations Operations Operations Operations temporary opened dart that marae have assumed the angle of the original dart Rotation type Clockwise A h Select the temporary dart PPS ee Dart 0 151 51 Dart 0 151 51 change the rotation direction Dart 1 104 25 Dart 1 104 25 Dart 1 104 25 if the dart was closed clockwise open it anti clockwise and vice versa then click on Close dart button Rotation type Rotation type Rotation type Clockwise C Clockwise C Clockwise C Anti clockwise Anti clockwise Rotate dart Rotate dart Rotate dart Rotate dart Temporary opened dart will Close dart Close dart CKT Close dat Close dart 3 2 AIOSE gatt disappear from the list and Cut over dart Cut over dart Close the selected dart Cut over dart the original dart get the initial Transform to folded dart Transform to folded dart Transform to folded dart Transform to folded dart a Ng le Delete dart Delete dart Delete dart Delete dart The original dar
243. en pick up the function from the second tool bar While this function is active all points from all pieces including the intersection points become active Note An intersection point is a point placed on the intersection between two pieces It can be displayed only when this function is active or when the CTRL ALT key combination is active in piece tool if you want to overlap two pieces into a common point in shape tool if you want to overlap one point on top of another in draw tool if you want to draw passing with a line thru some points If you want to copy only a section from a piece make a click in the first point of the section and then make another click into the ending point of the section The first point and the last point will be considered in clockwise If you want to change the path counterclockwise you must make a click with the mouse cursor on the segment placed in front of the selected point After making this click the place where you have made the click becomes marked with a little green arrow indicating the drawing way click click lt F Select the first point Make a click on the from the section second point in clockwise After making the second click The result is a section the line will become curved having exactly the same following the shape of the shape and the same number other piece Make a right click of points with the original to finish drawing piece section If you want to change the
244. en you go back with the cursor on the workspace the direction for the line you are drawing is coerced to the given angle and the end point of the line slides along this direction Set properties for f nest line nest point Line Angle degrees f Absolute To the previous line J Length fi che cm Length Apply Check Length then type the length value and press ENTER When you go back with the cursor on the workspace the segment length is coerced to the given length and the end point of the line slides on a circle whose radius is the same with segment length Set proprieties fo f next line Dre point Set properties hor i next line nest point Line W Angle 23 degrees i Absolute To the previous line J Length fi 3 5 cm Apply Check both Length length and angle for segment By setting the angle direction and length the new segment is already fixed on the workspace To apply the next segment click on Apply button or move the cursor back on the workspace the point will be completely immobilized and will not follow the cursor anymore and click on the left mouse button click Angle and set the corresponding the next T1 CAD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer actual point 1 1 a actual point last line actual point last point le length of the next segment last point B Draw with
245. endency groups When you select the fabric in Free pieces group only the pieces from that fabric will remain displayed Iia G tL Horizontal Wertical Matenal ford ee My Free pieces waistband back rani Gy Fieces aigiod to stipes and plaids Dependency group between pieces If you want no nest the pieces between them you may add one or more dependency groups other than the dependency groups for stripes and plaid If you want that the design on the face pocket to be continued on the product face and if you don t need that these pieces to respect some design specific to the stripes and plaid then you can create a dependency group only for the face and the pocket This group will be added to the horizontal vertical groups if you want to continue the design horizontally vertically Edit dependency groups To add a new dependency group to the other two that are initially displayed aa click on the right mouse button in the Edit dependency groups window op front and select Add group Lt subplacket A new window will open and you will be able to edit the name of the new wait hand dependency group After editing the name of the new group click on OK ae button for this group to appear near the others If you want to quit the creation of a new group click on Cancel button counter placket G placket hy Pieces aligned to stripes anc Add group Add
246. endicularly to grain axis Total flip allow pattern symmetrization in the marker both from the grain axis and perpendicularly on it You can set the pattern number and how many times the J Se ee ee pattern appear in the pattern this can be set in the right fi oO n fo menu in S Fx Fy and Fxy boxes S here you set the number of simple pattern Leone ina Fx here set the number of patterns flipped over Ox i Plece designed az axis internal seam line Fy here set the number of patterns flipped over Oy T Place designed az axis external cut line Fxy here set the number of patterns flipped over Ox M Coton CHE and Oy axis P Ausiliary piece l Confirm if the pattern will be printed as it is or if it will be doubled by symmetrization If you check the pattern as symmetrical then EuroCAD Pattern Designer will double the pattern by symmetrization on symmetry axis during pattern printing Confirm if the pattern is designed on the internal seam line or on the external cut line If you check Pattern designed on the internal seam line then the seam allowance will be added for pattern printing in order to obtain the cut line If you check Pattern designed on the external cut line then the seam allowance is not added anymore for pattern printing the pattern is identical with the displayed pattern Auxiliary pattern 42 IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD P
247. enger to inform them about your problem The EuroCAD technician will tell on which server you can connect This must be done to avoid connecting on a server where another EuroCAD user is connected To be able to use the EuroCAD Remote Assistance system besides the update for the EuroCAD Pattern Designer program you must make another update for the Remote Assistance You can download Update remote assistance from Download section on EuroCAD web site www EuroCADcad org Before you make the update ensure that the EuroCAD Pattern Designer application is closed To establish the connection to the EuroCAD office the user must access the function Remote assistance from Help menu in EuroCAD Pattern Designer Application After this choose the Server number from the new opened window and then click on Accept button to establish the connection A new icon will appear in the right down corner when the user activates the Remote assistance function This icon contents a blag G on orange background if the connections was successfully established and if the connection failed it looks like an yellow G on black background Steps that must be taken for remote assistance connection windows Help content Help index Click on the Help function from written menu and what is this Shifk F 1 then choose from the opened menu Remote about assistance option It helps you to open the Server Remote assistance list
248. ensions column These colors will be used further for showing the grading on the screen for graded pieces contour The user can change the color by click on the colored box and choosing a new color After generation all sizes are checked automatically on the Group1 column meaning that all sizes are part of the Size Set You have the possibility to choose which of these sizes will be used for current model grading In this example sizes not used for grading will be unchecked 44 S and 44 M Further these sizes can be checked to add new sizes at model grading You can hide the unused grading sets if you will check the option Hide unused grading sets To remove a size select the size and click on Delete the selected size from the size set button 200 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Update indexes Edit size set cm 2 j6jxj The user can change the index name Files Sizes Dimensions used in a size set without influence the model grading Click on the index and ie Bo eee change its name In order not to change automatically the combine size name when the index is renamed the box Generate automatically must be unchecked Edt cite cet Hide unused grading sets Many gracing groups cen includa the same aire Made to measure size Descnphon Size set mame Size pet descr After changing the
249. ependent line with the piece contour and deleting the dependent line To create a dependent line first click the Create dependent line button The cursor changes in selection cursor Click to cursor select the two points required to build the dependent line cy d Ea You may alternatively click a contour segment limited by the mark points The dependent line will be created at 1 cm from the indicated points Create dependent ine Obs The dependent line can be created related to another dependent line For this click on the actual dependent line The mark points of the new dependent line will be the end points of the selected dependent line CLICK CLICK In the near example the dependent line was attached to two internal technical points If the internal points are graded the dependent line will borrow these gradings On the upper example the dependent line was created by click on two mark points On the left side example the line was created by click on a segment on the contour The created line goes through the mark points Dependent line To set the distance between the i dependent line and the mark points make changes in the menu Angle 0 degrees on the right side of the screen Percent 0 then click the Apply button The rear line will be moved correspondingly The modification of the dependent line rotation after the marked points segment The depen
250. er IF Jeurocedselfip com Server part 5500 Load default sethrgs Aecepl Qui EuroCAD CAD launched the Remote Assistance Service Each user can now request assistance from a remote EuroCAD office by a simple mouse click The EuroCAD technician can connect directly to the customer s computer and work directly on the screen of this computer solving any problem in real time On server list will be displayed all servers that can be accessed by the EuroCAD users To add or to delete a server from this list you must use the Add server or Delete server buttons On Remote assistance server automatically will appear the name of the selected server the server IP and the server port number EuroCAD workstation Hardware Specifications To run EuroCAD programs your computer should have the minimum hardware configuration described below The EuroCAD programs can run on computer with less performance hardware configuration than the minimum configurations in this case the performance speed will be slower For computers where the files made in EuroCAD programs are complex models with many pieces cutting plans with many and long markers we recommend a computer with higher hardware configuration than the minimum Minimum hardware configuration Application EuroCAD EuroCAD Pattern EuroCAD EuroCAD Photo Hardware Designer Prena Seu Automarker Digitizer description Planner Processor P IV 1500 MHZ Free Disk Space RAM memory 51
251. er value of the selected piece the perimeter value will be displayed The measurement can be added to the measurement table see chapter 1 11 7 Distance measurement between two points on the piece perimeter In MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode click on Measure perimeter button Click on the first point to start the distance measuring Follow the piece contour clockwise up to the final point for measuring click on that point The measurement results are displayed in the upper menu for the base size and also for the graded sizes The measurement result is displayed in the upper menu The program executes the measurement on the graded sizes too The distance measured on the base size is displayed on black background while the distances measured for the other sizes are displayed on white background If on the measured contour there is a dart it can be considered closed the dart interior will not be measured or 245 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer opened the dart interior will be measured too If the model has many sizes measurements the current table will not be able to show all in the sizes in the upper side of the screen In order to see all the sizes measurements on the edge of the table click left mouse button depending of the situation in the right or left side in order to role all the size measurements For a faster view of all the sizes measurement keep pressed left mouse button and the sizes wil
252. erence it memorizes the horizontal and or vertical movement as grading rule In EuroCAD Pattern Designer a grading point has four grading table grade drop spec and extra At point grading can be used either one table usually grade or any combination two three or all four tables Final grading will summarize grading on x and y from all four tables Derived grading The points with XY derived grading are defining their grading by different rules that are referred to other points grading as graded point XY or point linked to the parametrical layer If as result of derived grading a point is linked by a point graded XY with four grading tables the point linked will follow the grading from all four tables of reference point and any operation related to the grading of reference point will affect derived grading point 203 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 10 4 Display graded sizes for a piece In any working mode near the base size the program can display the graded sizes for a piece To display a piece grading first click on the piece to select it in any working mode Then click on the Show hide grading button If the button down the grading is displayed if the button is up the grading is invisible and only the base size can be seen Click on the Show hide Graded sizes will be displayed in Click on the piece to select it grading button in the mid different colors play part of the up
253. error is present Thus the user can easily detect the errors 344 c4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Assistance Pieces wath faures Check selected pieces In PIECE mode click to select the piece to be checked then click on the Check selected pieces The program will check Click on every reported fault to see detads the selected piece or pieces and will display the results in a Siavlsnartay i window This piece cannol be auiomaticaly repaired If there were errors on the pieces they are displayed in the Pease comect manualy or delete the place Pieces with failures field To see details on the failures report click separately on each piece with failures Part of the errors can be automatically fixed e g notches dimension and part of them have to be fixed by the user e g contour self intersection Ry Check eundiary pieces Remote assistance Each user can now request assistance from a remote EuroCAD office by a simple mouse click using the Remote assistance system The EuroCAD technician can connect directly to the customer s computer and work directly to the screen of this computer solving any problem in real time To use this function your computer on which you have installed EuroCAD programs must be connected to an internet network Warning Before getting connected to Remote Assistance you must contact a EuroCAD technician by phone using the service phone numbers or by Mess
254. es are 42 1 44 2 and the drops are S 1 M 2 with the base size 42M and you need to copy a piece from first project in the second project after copying the resulted size set will be 41M 42S 42M 43M 44S 44M The sizes from the first project will be combined with the sizes from the second project The indexes and the base size will determine the combination between the sizes from the first project and the second project If in the second project the base size would be 42S than the combined size set resulted after copying will be 41S 42S 42M 43S 44S 44M 243 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Besides if you will copy a piece in a project with different size sets and different sizes will be displayed a warning message The message warns you to decide if you will copy or not the piece x The size set of the destination project is different from the size set of the source project Would you like to combine the two size sets into the destination project no ce If there are differences between the set sizes in two models a warning message will be displayed If you click on OK button the pieces will be copied and the current size set will be actualized If you click on Cancel button the copying process will be cancelled When a piece is copyed from a model to another if the model have the same size but different index and the user wants to keep the grading on the comun sizes the user mu
255. esigner pplication import the notches while those are not included in Gerber files and they moc motches according to P Notch cannot be found in the ZIP file If the gerber file has besides the pattern and a P Notch file then it will be f according to the folowing sellnge checked the option Import notches according to P Notch In case in the arhive it doesn t exist this file it will appear the following Notch type Holch z message THE FILE P NOTCH IT DOESN T EXIST IN ARHIVE and you will Notch lengik fi om chose one of the options According to default notch settings in EuroCAD Notch width rT Pattern Designer application or according to the following settings eos l E You must choose the notch type and its dimensions after import Attention For a higher accuracy of the imported information from a Gerber file it is recommended to check the include all components option when you export a file from Gerber 322 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer c Import native Assyst files zip Native Assyst files are archived in a ZIP extension file that may contain pieces or styles The files in Assyst Bullmer can include pieces of PIECE or DESIGN type according to the Assyst program version they can be found in the corresponding folders The STYLE files can be used for the patterns only they include all information regarding Assyst except those about fabric type size and notches drawing method the
256. est graded points After creating a notch on the right side docker appears the setup menu for notch parameters In the properties menu you can insert the ratio according to which the notch will be placed here you can also change the mark points for the notch You can also define the precise length width and angle from the contour line according to the chosen notch type Create a percent notch To create a notch first click on the piece to select it When the piece is selected the grade points become visible marked in red Click on the contour approximately where the notch will be added The precise distance from several points will be set after notch creation by editing notch properties To create a percent notch on the marked position click on h Create percent notch Create percent notch button The ie mark point will be the closest graded point In anti clockwise direction on the contour The mark point can be subsequently changed percent notch While adding a notch distance or percent by pressing ALT the notch will be magnetized and will be created exactly on a piece point 135 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Edit percent notch properties x Percent notch Type fi Notch Percent Length oom width em Angle jo degrees Absolute angle Directo f Clockwise Counter clockwise Iv Notch Iv Closed darts f Cut on CNC machine Apply Operation C
257. etrizate To select active table we have two possibilities 1 select with left click one of the tables from grading toolbox in Grading mode or 2 open point grading table by right click and select with left click one of four the tables shown in the window menu Carrie out symetrization operation for active table Can be done in two ways 1 click on the arrow next to Symetrize selected points grading button from toolbox and choose one of the three symetrize modes x y or xy or 2 in point grading table choose one of m the three buttons Symetrize point Edit grading table cm ee grading on x Symetrize point AAEE ORR ERR aes grading on y or Symetrize point Grade grading on xy deu SS Q y gt X X are i Sze Wo a ht 42 3 Symmetrize grading horizontally 213 c User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer sim horiz After pressing one of symetrize buttons the grading rule will change orientation Note To symetrize several grading tables repeat for each one the procedure of selecting active table and pressing of symetrize button How to rotate a grading The grading rule of a point orientation can be rotated by 45 90 or any other angle that can de user defined You must select the point select active grading table then click on one of the buttons Rotate 45 grading Rotate 90 grading or Rotate N grading rule Grading rotation will be
258. eturns in the work space the segment length defined by the second and the third drawn arc point will be constrained according to the inserted length The point that follows to be drawn next slides along a circle with the same radius amp nest line C Next point Setting the length and the angle for the next segment defined by the second and the third drawn point of the current drawn arc Set properties fo 0 next line C Nest point M Badius 50 Degrees f Absolute To the previous line fv Lenght fi 35 cm Apply Check both settings Angle and Length and then fill both fields the angle and the length with the desired values for the next segment defined by the second and the third drawn point from the arc that will be drawn next When the angle is defined it means that the direction is indicated This setting together with the length is giving precise coordinates for the next point position Press Apply to draw the segment according to the given coordinates or return with the cursor in the work space to fix the pint position by click 85 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Next point to be drawn ye at df Cai ma First drawn point Next segment 7 length Hs N i Second drawn point e B Draw arc by three points by constrain to the next point To draw assisted by the program using coordinates of the next point you have to check next point optio
259. evious notch To end the walking piece operation you must click on the Close button pieces window 1 11 15 Notch translation from one contour segment to another Walking peces Ones leave piece on potion Smula closed daitr ce Hatch i Poirt lt Ee o gt Poit gt gt Hatch hla pieces Nonnaline sean heg Or ceed r poo or pour M Simmie clos ails 7 Walkin pite ia Nonnaline sean hegi Or ceed keer poe on poor Sme cos lal Go backward to I the previous point alki pieces Mommalize seams kenghd On seal ere Gece On possen Serlete clipped darts sera ef 9 ran Gra o backward to the So forward tothe Claes previous Hch thet rgt naich in the lower right corner of the Walking When two pieces will be sewed together usually you apply matching notches on both pieces at the same distances from the mark points To facilitate these operations EuroCAD Pattern Designer gives you the possibility to create the matching notches on a single piece and then to copy them on the corresponding piece This operation is time saving and insures a perfect correspondence for the matching distances of the notches the MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode and click on To transfer notches from a contour segment to another enter K A ss af cursor Transfer notches button The cursor changes into selection q Transfer notches cursor On the first piece selec
260. ew point and the middle of the segment and F144 13 Perpendicular projection You can draw a new point PN as the perpendicular foot from the point va P3 PA on a line defined by PB and PC points Thus you draw the point P4 at the intersection of the perpendicular from the point P3 on the line defined by the points P1 and P2 14 15 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point F20 as the perpendicular projection of point Pls on the line defined by points Pit and Fis Point by triangulation aN The function parameters are the point from which starts the perpendicular line the points that define the segment You can draw a new point PN at a distance DA from the point PA and at a distance B DB from the point PB A new point P3 is defined by triangulation from the points P1 and P2 at the distances DA and DB respectively The new point is defined on the left side as Pe looking from P1 toward P2 Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point Pel at 2 em Lrom point Pi4 and 2 ecm from point F15 on the left side To draw a new point by this function you must assign the following parameters the point PA the point PB the distance DA between the new point and the point PA the distance DB between the new point and the point PB To draw the new point yo
261. ey can have according to the offset that you have set The next operation can be applied using the intersection points position or the position that they may have according to them offset from the Advanced magnetize If you want to use this function you must activate the third option from the Advanced magnetizing window After activating this function you must insert the desired dimension in the field corresponding to length and then press Apply When this function is active and you press Alt Ctri all the grading points will become active together with the possible trajectory that the point can have according to the radius that you have set by inputting the length In this case the trajectory becomes a circle around the graded points One circle for each graded point You must check the third option from the right side menu of the Advanced magnetize to use this type of magnetizing After activating this option you must insert the desired dimension in the field corresponding to the length and then click on Apply Keep Ctri Alt key combination pressed while this option is er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designe B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer checked to be able to activate all intersection points from existing patterns together with the possible trajectories that the intersection points might have according to the length that you have set In this case the trajectory becomes
262. ey you can make another measurement the measurement value will compose with the preview one and will be displayed on the upper menu of MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode If you press ALT SHIFT keys from the first measurement will be decrease the second measurement You must press SHIFT or ALT SHITH keys only when you make the first click of the second measurement When you add a measurement made with SHIFT key or ALT SHIFT keys in the watcher will be displayed a compose measurement with the corresponding formula and the simple measurement made How to add many measurement Click on Measure perimeter button or Measure distance between two points button from MEASURE AND CHECK TOO mode Click on the first point to start the distance measuring click Move the cursor and click on the final point or notch to measure the distance During cursor movement on the upper side menu there are displayed the distance from the starting point the horizontal and vertical displacement Will be automatically calculated and displayed in the upper menu the distances for all graded sizes Hold SHIFT key pressed and click on the point to start the measurement that must be added to the preview measurement Move the cursor and click on the final point or notch to measure the distance The result for the composed measurement is displayed in the upper side menu The Sauer F i measurements are made for all graded sizes V pensa inchi
263. f you will press the button Flip Y the curve will be mirrored along Y axe To validate the modifications you must press OK button If you don t want to validate the modifications you must press Cancel button If the user want just to manage the French curve list than he can open the View Bete ene eee niee French curves window directly from EuroCAD Pattern Designer general settings P window To open the general settings window you must click on the written menu Settings In general settings window you have to make click on View french View french curves curve button 73 SC4D User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 DRAW TOOL MODE To enter this working mode you must click on DRAW TOOL button The cursor for this mode is aes 1 7 1 Introduction EuroCAD Pattern Designer has two ways to create new pieces by digitization or by DRAWING Drawing supposes the presence of a pattern whose shape will be reproduced without requirements for knowledge about pattern design To build new pieces from scratch you must have enough knowledge to create patterns The computer and the EuroCAD Pattern Designer program can only assist the designer in order to facilitate his and to increase the design accuracy The time required for a computer assisted base pattern design is reduced to half by comparison with the manual design grading a pattern assisted by computer is 4 times faster than the m
264. file type The file type must be chosen General settings Exported sizes according to CAD application in which these files will be imported Regarding the format file you can choose between DXF or SXF AAMA format The file obtained after DXF format export will include one piece for each Measure units MM bi size in a size set If you have chosen to export a DXF file format you Scaling must also select the sizes to be included in the file Thus you can export only the base size if you check the message Only base size or you can export only some selected sizes that you will select from the table Exported sizes You can export a size more than once if you fill in the desired value in the corresponding field on the Nr column in the exported sizes table Only base size The file obtained after export in DXF AAMA format will include the base size and the grading table The export will result in two files one with dxf or aam extension and one with rul or txt extension Accepted deviation 0 05 cm Exported contours Contours You can select what piece contour will be exported the seam line the cut l line or both Each of these contours must be checked if you want to jw Esport cut lines export it In the upper part of the preview area you can observe the design mode for the pieces to be exported Thus you will know if the pieces were designed on the seam line or on the cut line According to the piece de
265. files When you click on the arrow on the right side of the corresponding box a menu opens here you must choose the file type that will be displayed in the list Lectra file filter in file Project Piece Shape Draw Garment Grading Check Settings Windows e Import native Investronica EXP files The Investronica program works with database To transfer dates Investronica uses a special type of file having the exp extension This file is nap le Tarran D E K o a r EF generated automatically by InvCopy Open project ctro application and it can content all lose project E sw ca ae A needed information to transfer pieces a z fa pe se Tk a a models or markers pave once aie EuroCAD Pattern Designer Save project 35 program can import the EXP files From ee tmpart ee Ae ek oy pa all EXP files here you can import only Sabat Ahe akl inh the piece and model files Export DXF JAAMA Files Assyst Flles zip If the user decides to import in Cut Chk Lectra files vet iba EuroCAD only the piece file he won t i have information about the fabric type or copy mas Wasi S kasisi N about the pieces quantities because this Paste Etri Investronica Data Base information are not included in the piece ETF i a file Thus if you want to import all this Print technical sheets Eje e PRANA Maat B oo information you must import the model Preview technical sheets DXF AutoCAD R12 2000 Files dF 326
266. first point The piece will fill with the default color If you click the right mouse button the piece contour will remain opened and the piece will stay unfilled 1 7 7 Use CTRL SHIFT and ALT keys for drawing free the curves To obtain higher accuracy in new point placement you can use CTRL SHIFT and ALT keys If you hold down one of these keys while drawing a new curve some constraints appear regarding the absolute or relative line angle or the position of the next point If you hold CTRL key as you draw the next line which define the curve will be constraint to an angle of 15 degrees vertical or oblique oriented on predefined angles 15 30 45 60 75 degrees from the workspace coordinates Hold down If you hold down CTRL key as you draw the next CTRL curve can be rotated only on as you draw for the next fixed angles from the obe dreced ind Last drawn workspace coordinates ee a precise angle from the Pa l The rotation step is of 1579 Workspace Cooranmatgs A ee The pointthat NUS the angle between the F a wil be added new and the previous curve a will be only of 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 from the workspace coordinates If you will press SHIFT key when you draw the next line which define the curve will be perfectly perpendicular or under a predefined angle 15 30 45 60 75 degrees from the previous line which define the last curve The point that will be added If you hold down SHIFT key as
267. formed by GRADED POINTS red dots CURVE POINTS blue dots These two are liked by LINES BEZIER CURVES graded point linear segment Piece origin Bezier curve 1 6 2 What is a Bezier curve Bezier curves were invented by the French mathematician Pierre Bezier who named them after himself These curves are especially used in Bezier computer assisted design They were used by Renault and Boeing to curve shape the curved surfaces of the body cars or plane wings Since then control jones Bezier curves and their associated functions were imposed as the best solution for computer assisted design and also for computer assisted graphics For fabric industry Bezier curves are very useful because they can y end points accurately reproduce the anatomic shapes These curves behave like an elastic cord whose shape is given by ends bending modes A Bezier curve is formed by 2 end points 2 control points that are defining the curve shape Between an end point and its corresponding control point there is a blue dotted line that represents the tangent to the curve on the endpoint After some practice for curve adjustment you will see how easy is to achieve the desired shape by moving only two points To make the Bezier curve control points visible enter the Shape tool mode and click on one of the curve end points The control 3 Click with the left points and the a Click on a mouse button on tangent
268. formula its result will be automatically displayed 213 IC4D User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 12 5 3 Defining the design functions Free point x aF With the Free point function you can place a point anywhere in the aa ick script area this point does not depend on any other geometrical element After you ih select the function you must click in the script area where you want to place the free point To start designing a garment you must always start with a free point To change the position of a free point you must select the specific step in the script press on the SHIFT key and click the left mouse button at the further point position For this function there is no parameter to be completed in the Description of the selected geometrical operation window Point at XY from another point This function will allow you to place a point on horizontal X or on vertical Y from an existing point To assign the correct X and Y coordinates you must consider the Y initial point as XY axis origin _o F LAN Assign parameters T X Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point P20 from point Pi at To draw a new point by this function you must assign GS 24 2 cm horizontally and DO em vertically the following parameters the starting point the horizontal distance X the vertical distance Y If the reference point is already defined you may hold down the SHIFT ke
269. from with a color and is composed by a main press Draw spiral button Spiral type pattern and an auxiliary drawing 2 Opened spirals To create an opened spiral after applying the Draw Spiral function you have to select Opened option from Spiral type in properties area right side of Draw Tool The opened spiral has opened contour without color filling 95 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Spiral typ Closed 0 Opened Draw spiral To draw a spiral you have to enter In properties area you have to DS i The drawn spiral is an opened one in Draw Tool and press Draw check Opened option from without color filling spiral button Spiral type 9 Spiral restrictions A spiral has a group of restrictions spiral width spiral height step between 2 parralel curves of the spiral spiral length number of rotations of the spiral Displaying the spiral restrictions 3 number of rotations of the spiral Spiral height Spiral width Spiral drawing methods 1 Free drawing of a spiral To draw free a spiral you have to enter in Draw Tool and press Draw spiral button In properties area all spiral restrictions should be unchecked for the spiral to be drawn free After pressing the Draw spiral button you have to move the cursor in a free space of work area and make a click Then move the cursor on another
270. g the seam allowance if the piece was designed on the internal seam line During these operations some errors or inadequate results may occur especially if there were errors in the model design For example the designer may forget to define the grain axis of a piece or the finishing type for the seam allowance corner in a point can be inadequate To avoid that these failures will appear on the marker used for the lay cutting you must use the check function Click on Check the pieces prepared for cut button located in the upper right menu EuroCAD Pattern Designer simulates the preparation for each piece of a given size before cutting The checking result is displayed on a list If there are failures on a piece the user will be able to check and to correct the errors The possible failures emphasized by this check are self intersection of the piece contour correct point declaration notches placed out of the piece zero dimensions notches the piece axes are declared out of the piece technical points declared out of the piece The points and lines that have generated errors can be visualized by selection from the error list These errors can be automatically fixed e g notches dimensions or have to be fixed by the by the user e g contour self intersection If you check the option Check auxiliary pieces the program will automatically check al auxiliary pieces in the model The checking of the pieces can be stoped in the verific
271. gative the rotation will be counterclockwise X Wes a FV7 as at KA W i Sle en Rotate points Set the rotation angle value Ea j Canoe First select the points Hold down SHIFT key Click on Rotate a Enter the rotation The selected points to be rotated and select the point group of points around angle positive for will be rotated with the that will be the rotation the last selected point clockwise rotation specified angle around center button or negative for the defined rotation counterclockwise center rotation then click on OK button 1 6 24 Rotate piece until the line between two selected points becomes horizontal In SHAPE TOOL mode you can rotate a piece so as the line between two selected points becomes horizontal You must select the two points to be horizontally aligned then click on Rotate piece until the line between two selected points becomes horizontal button The piece will be rotated and positioned until the line between the two selected points becomes horizontal This function is useful when you want to align the grain axis or when you want to grade two points on an oblique segment while it is difficult to calculate the movement coordinates for each size If you want to draw the grain axis to be parallel with one of the contour segments you must select the two points on the contour and align them horizontally use the Rotate piece unt
272. ged for many patterns in the same time excepting for the group dependency represented by the Halign group and V align group columns 0 GG To select the patterns according to them names the user will have to insert jE a group of letters or the complete name EE in the search field After this when the rT Search button is pressed the patterns 1 which contents this group of letter in P T 2 their names will be selected For i example after we have typed the m letter in the search field two pattern ware selected the patterns with the current number 4 and 5 In Pattern properties table with a click with the left mouse button on the column header you can arrange all valued in that column 6 ri rr 0 47 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 6 SHAPE TOOL mode To enter this mode you must click on Shape tool button The cursor in this mode is 1 6 1 Introduction Shape tool mode is essential for design in EuroCAD Pattern Designer here you will be able to Modify pattern shape Modify corner type and shape Adjust curved and linear segments Corner smoothing Point alignment movement rotation Beveling Add new point s on the pattern contour Bezier interpolation for segments from the pattern perimeter Choose the pattern origin To use the design functions from this mode you must first understand the components of a pattern contour A pattern contour is
273. gent to another circle ro You draw a new circle CN with the center in the point PA and that is tangent to the circle CA In the near example it was defined the circle C2 with the center in the point P2 so it will be tangent to the circle C1 Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new circle CS having as center the point P42 and being tangent to the circle The function parameters are c2 the point PA the circle center the circle CA Circle with contour point and radius tangent to a i line You draw a new circle CN that crosses through the point PA is tangent on the line defined by the points PB and PC and has the radius R In the near example the circle C1 was defined so as the point P1 is placed on its contour it has the radius R and the points P2 and P3 define a tangent to the circle C1 Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation The function parameters are Create a new circle Ch passing through the point P40 being tangent to the line the point PA on the circle contour detinea Py poina Pae and Po herida the points PB and PC that define the tangent to radius of 23 cm and the center situated on the circle the left side from the first point the radius R the left right option in order to place the circle Pad center from the point PA on the contour Attention To avoid confusions try first both variants then choose the correct
274. give the pocket shape To make the overlapping between the arc and the piece points use the Alt key 1 7 15 Draw arc by 2 points and radius using precise quotas and dimensions Warning the quotas and formulas refer to the line determinate by two drawn points and not to the curves dimensions placed between the two points There are two ways to create an arc by two points and radius 1 Precise the length and the inclination angle for the line defined by the first and the second drawn point related to the work space coordinates Constrained to the next line 2 Precise for the second drawn point the horizontal and vertical coordinates related to the piece origin meaning related to the first drawn point in this case Constrain to the next point 3 Precise the radius for the third drawn point Radius constraining 1 7 16 Draw arc by two points and radius by constraining to the next line Check the next line option from the right side menu to draw assisted by computer constraining to the next line When the next line setting is checked the fields where you can complete the angle and the length becomes active You must check the Next line setting from the right side setting to draw assisted by computer upon next line parameters defined by the first two drawn points When this setting is checked the boxes with settings for the next line meaning the angle and the length will become active Set properties fo next line
275. guided overlapping on the chosen geometrical points If the piece points are overlapping on all geometrical points of the parametrical design then in the SHAPE TOOL mode you must select all the points of the designed piece and by holding the SHIFT ALT combination you will magnetize the piece points over the corresponding points in the parametrical layer If the piece points are not overlapping on the points of the parametrical design and you need an automatic grading process and to preserve the shape of the designed piece you must proceed as follows in the SHAPE TOOL mode you must select each point on the piece while in the right side menu on the Point definition field you must check the geom point message in the field under this message you must enter the name of the geometrical point on which you will anchor the piece point After the main points in a piece were anchored on the parametrical layer the piece will be automatically graded and the grading will be displayed if you click on the Show hide grading Parametrical design for the back piece 1 You must create the free point P8 by a click on the button Free point this point will be defined as back mid point from the waist 2 You must create the point P9 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the lateral edge point This point is created at a distance x 3 42 and y Lxp cm from the point P8 Lxp pant out seam 3
276. h button a File new window opens here you must enter the file name to be searched and the search path Patt D Modele Semples z Cancel search V Search sub folders Fokler scheti HHEa Kiuri Ga Markere F baile CI Backup E impon 1 Markere 2 planuri da taiere D Samples To select the folder click on the button near O Modeks Path field In the opened window you may ia eee choose the folder to be explored for search and is aos then click on Accept button HES Propects Ea Tamg Fl gaa Tranier gt Users Hoa LC Ga WU Temp fd ity Mebwork Places mE I My Documents If you check the message Search subfolders Fit zi the search will include also the subfolders in the enD oo S Cancel search selected folder To start search click on Start search button Search subfolders To stop search click on Cancel search Search results button 4 files found p The found files are displayed in the search Mea LA IO6PO806 106P0234 I06P0257 ZIP results area To select a file in this area you Piz must double click on the file name The filename will automatically appear in the zip file area in the Import Assyst files window When you select a zip file the number of projects and pieces inside it will be displayed The import operation may involve the whole Project or only the Pieces you must select the appropriate option mImport setins XK At Assyst file import yo
277. h is conserved Scale This area is dedicated to scaling Here you can scale the patterns horizontally or vertically or you can mirror patterns horizontally or vertically To apply changes after scale setting you must click on Apply button Move In the move settings there are two boxes one for horizontal DX and one for vertical DY movement In these boxes you can enter the distance positive or negative for the pattern to be moved in the two mentioned directions To apply the changes you must click on Apply button Rotation In the rotation area in a specific box you must enter the pattern angle value in degrees Under the angle value box are two more boxes in which you can set the pattern rotation center coordinates These coordinates are set relative to the pattern origin located in one of the pattern points pattern origin is visible on selection To apply changes after setting the angle value you must click on Apply button 30 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 5 7 Show hide symmetrical pattern For a symmetrical pattern with a declared grain axis that is half of a complete pattern you can display the other pattern half that is the symmetrical for the current pattern 6 button to display the other half of a symmetrical pattern Click on Show hide symmetrical pattern button to display the second half of a symmetrical pattern As long as the complete p
278. hange mark points The properties menu for the percent notch includes the following information the horizontal and vertical coordinates from the piece origin You cannot edit these coordinates the notch type can have the V or U shape outside or inside and also the shape inside the percent according to which the notch will be placed the notch length notch width for V and U type notch angle related to the seam line or as absolute angle related to system coordinates If you want the notch angle to be expressed as absolute angle you must check the box near the message Absolute angle the direction for the distance measured on the contour from the mark point clockwise or counterclockwise if you uncheck the box near the message Notch the new added notch will be displayed as an X on the piece contour If the option is checked then the notch will be displayed as notch you can choose to consider the darts closed or opened on distance measuring along the seam line by checking or unchecking the box near the message Closed darts Notch if you want a notch to be cut on the cutter you must check the box near the message Cut on CNC machine to validate any change in the properties menu you must click on the Apply button Transform notch to point Delete notch Operations that can be done on the percent notch 1 Change the mark point To change the mark point s for a percent not
279. he next line you can notice that beside the internal points and them trajectories there are also some other points active points displayed on the internal points trajectories These points represent the intersection between the trajectories that the internal points might have and the next drawn point position according to the settings that you have made for the next point If you want to use this function you must activate the fourth option from the Advanced magnetizing window After activating this function you must insert the desired number of degrees in the corresponding field and then Angle press Apply Anale fs decrees If this function is active when 4 i you will press the Alt Ctrl Advanced magnetizing using key combination all the angles internal points from the existing patterns will become active together with all possible trajectories that the internal points can have considering the angle that you have set In this case the trajectory becomes an inclined line under the set angle Note Similar to the other two cases when you are in Draw tool mode and you are using the Advanced magnetizing using angles together with the drawing constrained to the next point or to the next line you will be able to observe that beside the internal points and them trajectories there are also active some other points points displayed on the internal points trajectories These points represent the intersection
280. he pattern will be resized only on that point movement direction If you hold down CTRL key while dragging the lateral resizing points the changes will be more accurate by a specific multiplication of the base size double triple double symmetrically triple symmetrically To multiply the base size while holding down the CTRL key you must drag the resizing points with a distance that equals the double or triple bas size otherwise no change appears Proportional resize using the corner Vertical resize Horizontal resize resize point Hold down Hold down CTRL SHIFT for an accurate pattern resizing for a free pattern resize You can easily FLIP a pattern by horizontal resizing while holding down CTRL key 1 5 6 Move resize rotate scale patterns using exact numerical data 4 xf To set the exact patterns sizes and positions to rotate them under a precise a angle or to resize them accurately you can use editing regions in the right side menu of EuroCAD Pattern Designer In this area is a panel dedicated to 4 types of operations resize move rotate scale IMPORTANT these panels are visible only in Pattern mode In other working modes there are displayed different panels specific to other operations To enter Pattern mode see the beginning of chapter 1 5 You can do only one modification to a pattern or to a selected group for example you can do just resize just scale just movement or just rot
281. he pieces function to show all pieces dimentions p After activating the function the segments dimensions will be displayed on Warning The segments dimensions will be displayed only between grading points and only for the base size These dimensions will remain displayed as long as the Show hide distances on the pieces function is active 1 11 5 Angle measurement To measure an angle between three points on a piece enter the MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode and click on Measure angles button Click to select the piece then click consecutively on all three points that defines the M angle first point on one angle side the second point in the angle tip and the Eee eee third point on the other side of the angle The angle is measured clockwise between the indicated points The angle value is displayed in the upper menu for the base and also for the grading sizes This measurement can be added to the measurement table cursor see chapter 1 11 9 250 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Measure an angle Click on the first point of the angle Click on the second point that Click on the third point of the angle on one side represents the angle tip on the other side 1 11 6 Surface measurements To measure a piece surface enter the MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode then click on Measure piece surface button Click to select a piece in order to calculate its surf
282. he properties menu for the internal line you can edit related to system coordinates Type You can define the type for the defined internal line An internal line can be Simple Text or Piece name To define the line type you must click on the arrow near the field Type in the opening submenu you can click to choose the line type Simple line will be drawn as a helping line inside the piece it will not be printed and cut Text line on such line type you can insert a text that will be displayed and printed with the selected piece Piece name line is an internal line that can be used as support for piece name and size They will not be displayed anymore on the grain axis but on the internal line set as Piece name line Cut piece Narrow An internal line will always be a narrowed Create points line meaning limited between the points defined by the PE a user But if you want the designed segment to be extended to the intersection with the piece contour you must uncheck the box near the message Narrow ip A 253 46 degrees Length as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer On an internal line without narrows only the initial points that define the line will appear Cut on the cutting machine An internal line can be cut on the cutter if you check the box near the message Cut on the cutting machine The simpl
283. he size that you want to add and to establish the size position in the size set In addition you have the possibility to add directly the new combined size After adding a new size the new combined sizes will be added automatically in the size set list Click on the Accept button to save the new size set If you want to add a new size to a size set that is already graded enter the GRADING mode and click on Edit size set button Edit size set 231 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer In the Edit size set window click on Add a new size button If you want to add a new size at the end of the existing size set then you must Sana Dimensionstep P 9 select the last size in the existing set and Size nme next to click on Add a new size at the Many grading groups can include the same size Generate automatically beginning or ending of an existing size Made to measure size Use separator set or Add new grade size button Description Size set name Size set description Accept Exit A new window called New combined size becomes displayed on the screen after activating the Add a new size function or New grade size after activating the Add new grade size function In the field next to the Grade name and Combined name messages you can type the new size name The index for the new size wil
284. he spiral is drawn with the restrictions entered by the user it is connected to the mouse cursor in first point of spiral and can be rotated free around this point To fix the spiral you have to rotate it until it is in the desired position and click with the mouse in work area without moving it An another example for a spiral with restrictions can be the following equal width and height and a fix number of rotations To draw the spiral with these restrictions the following steps are needed click on a free space in work area to specify the starting point of the spiral and check in properties area Circular spiral option If this option is checked to set the spiral dimensions you have to complete only one of dimension options width or height For entering the number of rotations you have to check also in properties area the Length option constrain to number of rotations and enter the desired value for rotation number After entering the restriction values press Apply button or Enter and go back with the mouse in work area The spiral is drawn with the restrictions entered by the user it is connected to the mouse cursor in first point of spiral and can be rotated free around this point To fix the spiral you have to rotate it until it is in the desired position and click with the mouse in work area without moving it ee To draw a spiral enter Draw Tool and select Draw spiral function Draw Tool
285. her patterns in the same size To change a pattern rotation 45 E freedom you must click on the small arrow near the specific field In the opened list you can find the following options None the pattern will have the same position in the marker no rotation will be allowed 180 Pattern rotation by 180 90 or 45 allows pattern rotation in the marker with the mentioned angle No restriction allows pattern placement in any position in the marker With measure if checked then in the marker the pattern will be rotated together with all other patterns in the same size To change this option you must check uncheck the box in this column To change this option you must check uncheck the box in this column Flip in the corresponding field you can select information on pattern placement on fabric for None cutting purpose To modify flip liberty on pattern placement on fabric you must click on the small arrow near the specific field In the opened list you can find the following options Bee None no symmetrization is allowed in the marker Flip X allow pattern symmetrization in the marker on the grain axis Flip Y allow pattern symmetrization in the marker perpendicular to the grain axis Total allow pattern symmetrization in the marker both on the grain axis and also perpendicular on the grain axis H shrink in the corresponding box of this column you must insert the value for the h
286. htening cannot be folded again The program adds notches automatically in the folding points oriented over the folding lines These notches are automatically translated even on the seam allowance while the latter is added to the pattern For the common point folds straightening will behave as a bulge if the selection order of the marked points of the fold was made so the common point to be the second and the forth 1 9 20 The seam allowance Set the width of the seam allowance To add the seam allowance to a piece the piece must be checked as designed on internal seam line If the piece is checked as designed on internal seam line the program considers the contour line as the final pattern and does not add the seam allowance Show the seam allowance for a piece Flip liberty Ho flip M Symmetric Half Double piece Mirrored double piec PEEN Show hide seam allowance wo designed on Internal seam line Piece designed on the external cut line To show the seam allowance for a piece first verify if the piece designed on internal seam line box in the piece properties is checked Enter the PIECE mode and click on the piece Check the piece properties list on the right side menu and verify if the piece designed on internal seam line box is checked Click on the Show hide seam allowance 173 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer The program initially adds a seam allowance with
287. idth Ea Inhana ines Boo Intamal ines lor culling moo Irtainal patterns tor diewing B Intamal pattaire lor culling mo 1 13 7 General program settings Whenever after installing EuroCAD Pattern Designer you will be able to change the main program settings To enter the settings window in the upper menu click on Settings button The program settings are grouped in a bundle of chapters each on a separate page General settings Design settings Technical elements settings Digitizer settings Plotter settings Keyboard and shortcut settings Data server settings 335 c4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer a General Settings E General Design Technical Cokes Digtizer Picie Keyboard Remote assistance woking mode f Local C From dalaha C Damo county copy Ho M Create autobackup copy even j2 minutes Y Create backup copa at sre Save backup copy m the same folder vath the omgnel file Disk paths for different hes Backup eon palh D Da abase ackup l i Broiete Grading rules path ee Browioe Size sets fle path DO Browse Dimension sets file path A Browse J ee Zoom wie FaF3 FF FT Resa tables position T Incessng decreasing zoom step Language Engish Wien french curves Use enor scoushc messages Load default settings Accept Cua General settings Working mode local from database In Local mod
288. ign you can automatically create a new size that will correspond to atypical quotes that cannot be found in the loaded size set This represents a major advantage mainly for the work on demand Thus the EuroCAD user will have only to input the client dimensions and its size will appear automatically near the previous existing sizes To input the new size you have two methods you may add a size in the Edit size set and its settings as Made to measure size you may declare a preexisting size in the size set as Made to measure size Then you must enter the PARAMETRICAL mode and click on the Quickly modify the dimensions from the size set for the client size button in order to open a table where you must input the dimensions for the new size Edit size set cm In GRADING mode you must click on Edit size set on the button bar of this work mode In the opened window you must click on the Add a new size button or Add a new grade size In the window that appears you must introduce a name for Made to Measure size and a index Attention For Made to Measure the size index will indicate only the position in size set The index has no influence on gradings In made to measure module only the dimensions will indicate the grading step 298 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Combined name MTM Grade index B o Drop index co Spec index jo Extra index jo Ok Can
289. il the line between two selected points becomes horizontal button After you have aligned the two points draw a perfectly horizontal grain axis by holding down CTRL key while drawing If you want to grade a segment that have to move parallel from the base size for the other sizes it is recommended to make this segment horizontal in order to simplify grading rules setting To do this select the points that define this segment and click on Rotate piece until the line between two selected points becomes horizontal button The piece will be rotated and positioned with the shoulder line horizontally To select the two points that are defining the line to be aligned horizontally click on the first point hold down SHIFT key and click to select the second point another method for point selection is to click on the left mouse button and drag a virtual rectangle around the points to be selected 62 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer When the two points are selected click on Rotate piece until the line between two selected points becomes horizontal button The piece will be rotated and positioned so as the line between the two points becomes horizontal Because the piece is oriented with the shoulder line horizontally now it is easier to set the grading rules for the points that define this line 1 6 25 Bulge In SHAPE TOOL mode you can bulge a piece in a mobile point opening point according to a hi
290. iles directly from database From database you can import only piece and model files To import files directly from database click on Project gt Import gt lnvestronica Data Base In the new opened window you must set first the server options To import pieces directly from Investronica database assure that the settings for Data Base connection are correct Project Piece Shape Dray Gamet Grading Chack Settings vWinckws Help New project Open project Close project Sankt project Sore propeck 23 iimport livestronita Warnings Problems have been debeched while imporbing Detected poblans E GIBLU44 02 01 Gran Anis B GIBLU24 05 01 lo L patches in invalid postion E GIELUZA 06 01 oOo e oko in inralid position Fl GIBLUZA 07 01 matches ih invalid postion notches ware detected in irrzalid podition Thie notches cannot be inpated Sade bye Ac f Pieces deo Erus Probleme Quit W Seve subomaticsly in Piece mfcemshons rlt Chel ChreeS Gerber Files top Assyt Ales ip Lectra fles vet tba bivesbronica Fiesi ep CerHee Sort Thre OXF OOMo Files cho DFA lA Raz sO Files ctl 328 CcC4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Model filters Server options ill x 2172007 m op m 2 5 21 2007 eer sa lx z e 24 521 2007 Password i H 521 2007
291. ill be the closest graded point in anti clockwise direction on the contour The mark point can be subsequently changed While adding a notch distance or percent by pressing ALT the notch will be magnetized and will be created exactly on a piece point 132 es B Edit notch properties Distance notch Type iNotch l DistancelS 44 cm Length Poo cm Width a cm Angle 270 degrees Absolute angle Directo i Clockwise i Counterclockwise If Notch J Closed darts I Cut on CNC machine Apply Operation Change mark point Convert notch to point Delete notch User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer The properties menu for the distance notch includes the following information the horizontal and vertical coordinates from the piece origin You cannot edit these coordinates the notch type can have the V or U shape outside or inside and also the shape inside the distance up to the mark point measured along the piece working contour the seam line or the cut hee line the notch length notch width for V and U type notch angle related to the seam line or as absolute angle related to system coordinates If you want the notch angle to be expressed as absolute angle you must check the box near the message Absolute angle the direction for the distance measured on the contour from the mark point clockwise or counterclockwise if you uncheck the box nea
292. ill have exactly the necessary same grading with the other two pieces 1 7 27 Draw a circle or ellipse To draw a circle or ellipse enter the DRAW TOOL mode then click on Draw ellipse button Hold down If you want to draw a circle the hold down CTRL key during drawing an ellipse The height and width of the ellipse will be the same so you will obtain a circle CTRL During drawing in the upper part of the right side menu the ellipse dimensions are displayed Ellipse or circle dimensions can be modified even after drawing by changing the while drawing the values in the specific boxes After modifying the dimensions you must click on Apply ellipse to obtain a button to apply changes circle 102 ole User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer ame Draw ellipse k To draw an ellipse enter the DRAW TOOL mode and click on Draw ellipse button Move the cursor in the workspace click on the left mouse button and drag the mouse From the starting point there where you have clicked on the left mouse button to the mouse button release point an ellipse appears If you hold down CTRL key during mouse dragging Draw ellipse Properties width 23 26 cm Height F12 em wy The ellipse dimensions appear in the specific boxes in the right side menu You can change ellipse dimensions even after drawing To do this you have to change the values in the specific boxes and the
293. include information regarding the piece fabric Save project clas Pasit Chil y Investranica Base l l l rmt erhnieni shere F DXF AAMA files dxf The VET files includes all information about the E i DIF AutoCAD R 12 2000 A T project piece number and type fabric type The VET file can be imported in EuroCAD Pattern Designer only if it is accompanied by the IBA file To import IBA or VET files you must click on Project then on Import and in the opened menu you must select Lectra files iba vet files 325 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer In the opened window you must select the path on the hard disk and the file to be imported from a list If in the selected folder there are native Lectra files with IBA or VET extensions they will be displayed in the Lectra files list In the upper part of the file list it will be displayed the number of projects and the pieces in the current folder Ro LI pasos LIBAT W Drepdet Dectra files a Fiera leer Laca Leca les vet lumber of models WET E 1 Humbe of Pisia B ar ER Ei ESI 204 D ocd Ei p D oe ey HSOL0 g O45 Sy PKA E inat E pelier E APEM E STEA P STRIDE E STEEDS iy STETA T2841 EHEJ WAH TESH m oy Fenni BHE models Cy sei m ee ete will In Lectra files list only IBA and or VET files can be displayed Thus you must use the filer near the message Lectra
294. ing OK or ENTER the View French curves window appears where you can visualize the extracted French curve The French curve is rotated the segment between the first and last selected point becoming horizontal It can be moved up or down in the list and flipped horizontally Flip X or vertically Flip Y Also each saved French curve can be deleted from the list using the Delete button from the window To save the currently extracted French curve and the modifications you made in this window press Ok button If you do not want to save the French curve and the modifications press Cancel Flip 3 Flip r button Ok N Cancel Attention by extracting a french curve only the shape of the contour and the contour points graded and curve points are saved Grading rules and notches are not saved Adding a french curve on selected piece In Shape Tool select the piece on which you will add the french curve Press the arrow of Add a french curve to the selected piece function from Shape Tool mode toolbar 4dd a french curve to the selected piece 69 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Cursor From the appearing submenu chose Add french curve option The mouse cursor changes into selection cursor 4dd French curve a ae ety E F Oos Extract French curve Select the first point of the contour 1 select the second point of the contour
295. ing steps have to be made extract a French curve by pressing the arrow of Add a French curve to the selected piece function and choosing the Extract French curve option from the appearing submenu add a saved French curve on an another piece by pressing the arrow of Add a French curve to the selected piece function and choosing the Add French curve option from the appearing submenu Extracting a French curve from selected piece In Shape Tool select the piece on which you will extract the French curve Press the arrow of Add a French curve it the selected piece function from Shape Tool mode toolbar dd a french curve to the selected piece 68 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Cursor From the appearing submenu chose Extract French curve option The mouse cursor changes into selection cursor Add French curve E Extract French curve Select the first point of the contour 1 select the second point of the contour 2 then select the contour to be extracted between the 2 selected points 3 Input french curve name French curve name After selecting the contour the Input french curve name window appears where you have to enter a name for the sleeve curve currently extracted french curve For saving the french curve with the entered name you have to press OK button or TER ENTER key Yiew french curves side seam front armhole front B After press
296. int then click on Set origin button on the right side menu The piece origin will be moved automatically in the selected point X and Z axis will cross this point and the coordinated for the other points will be automatically recalculated Delete technical point Set origin Set origin The origin is located in the lower Click on Set origin button on the The piece origin is now moved in the right part of the piece You must lower part of the right side menu technical point X and Z taxis crosses select the technical point in order to this point All coordinates for the move the piece origin on it other points has been automatically recalculated 1 9 25 Matching point If the designed model will be cut from fabric stamped with flowers or striped you must use matching points to obtain matches for plaids and stripes These points are very important later for markers the model will be overlapped on the fabric according to the matching points so as the parts will fit after marking The matching point is composed by an anchor that can be placed only on the interior of a piece and by the piece mark point The latter is different from other technical points and can be placed out of the piece by declaring the displacement When are used printed fabrics there are two cases that can be found in practice When the user wants to have the printed shape on a certain location on the garment When the user wants to have a continui
297. int on the contour and can be reallocated without any contour shape changes To modify a pattern shape you can change the point type and position you can add or delete points or you can change the curve shapes These operations are available in SHAPE TOOL mode There are two types of points graded points and curve points The points can be defined from the pattern origin from a parametrical point or as curve points Bezier curve Control points End points The contour points are connected by lines and curves EuroCAD Pattern Designer uses a special curve type named Bezier curve from the French mathematician that invented them A Bezier curve is a curve between two points whose shape can be adjusted by moving two control points Bezier curves may reproduce accurately the natural and anatomical shapes being very useful for pattern contours tracing All you need to know about Bezier curves is that they are defined by 4 points 2 end points and 2 control points moving these points are modifying the curve shape Size set A size set is a collection of sizes They can be noted as 12 14 16 18 20 22 or Small Medium Large or by any other notation These names are registered in a table and can be associated to the effective dimensions of some important quotes for those sizes The dimensions registered in that table are just informative and can be useful during grading process To edit a size set or to create a new one you mus
298. internal or contour Mix view between pattern layer and parametrical layer Display the zoom level and allows zoom in and zoom out operations Zoom to the selected area Zoom at the previous zoom level Zoom to selected patterns Zoom to whole project Arrange the patterns in a project on the cut line Edit pattern group dependency Edit the project technical sheets Tris VIEW lt 00M p er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 13 IC4AD Us Pattern checker Preview patterns as they will be printed on plotter Open help files AF rice 2 p i PATTERN mode toolbar Temporary pattern symmetrization Permanent pattern symmetrization by creating a new pattern Create a new pattern on the external cut line and adds the seam allowance Create a new pattern on the internal seam line eliminating the seam allowance Temporary pattern unfold Permanent pattern unfold by creating a new pattern Block the selected pattern to avoid accidental changes Horizontal flip Vertical flip Group selected patterns Ungroup selected patterns Attach one or more auxiliary patterns to the main pattern Detach one or more auxiliary patterns to the main pattern Create a new pattern from selected patterns intersection Cut a pattern with another Create a new pattern by joining the selected patterns Create new points on selected patterns contour intersection Align selected patterns Rotate selected
299. ints pattern name and information Edit size set grading on reference point with grading table or special keys align sizes in different pattern points symmetrization rotation grading copy change base size Work with darts rotate close cut folds fold unfold notches grain axis GARMENT seam allowance symmetry axis translate contour parallel to the contour TOOL internal technical points Direct length measurements contour length on the sewing line angles and MEASURE AND surfaces measurements automatic notch transfer between patterns to be CHECK TOOL sewed together matching patterns for verifications watcher oa ja oF ae E pe E Develop the parametrical layer load script save script insert step into the PARAMETRICAL script delete step from the script fast quote change for the MTM measure Standard toolbar Create a new project Open a saved project 12 IC4AD Us Save project to a file Cut the selected pattern and copy it into the clipboard for further usage Copy the selected pattern into the clipboard Extract the pattern from clipboard and paste it into the current project Print the project technical sheet Print patterns on a plotter Cancel last operation Remake last canceled operation Show hide pattern name Show hide pattern control grid Show hide grading Show hide seam allowance Show hide measurements table Show hide distance on the patterns Change the selection mode
300. ion O pieces 100 geometric in order to display only the parametrical layer 267 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer B Script area Operation Point on a vector reported to horizontal asis Point ate from another paint Point atag from another paint Point at Dyer another paint Point ats trom another paint Point at ey from another point Point at ey from another point Free point Point ates from another paint Point ates from another paint Point at ser from another point cu XM RX KM OM MER C Geometrical operation description and editing area Description of the selected geometrical operation From point P29 create a parallel to the line defined by point Peo and and create on this parallel a new point F31 at GT 20 6 O 35 cm emor There is no geometrical element selected gt I iii 4 The script area contains a table with the steps of the parametrical design and 4 buttons by which you can add delete the steps in the list and by which you can display hide the design rules The table displays chronologically the steps to be followed in order to realize the parametrical design This window contains the description of the selected function a field to edit the values the quote abbreviations the geometrical formulas from simple to complex and an area where the errors are displayed D The quote list area short Name GT 1 2 Waist Il
301. ion about the product Technical sheet or the patterns Pattern sheet To print these documents you must click on the Print project technical sheet E Print project technical sheet Export as PLT the Print patterns on a plotter selected patterns The patterns on a project can be printed at natural scale on a plotter First you must obtain a HPGL PLT file format Then if you want to print pattern on a plotter you must click on the ag button Export as PLT the selected patterns Arrange patterns on the cut line When you click this button the patterns will be arranged so as they will not intersect when the seam allowance is displayed or when the patterns are symmetrized or unfolded Thus if you want to print the patterns in overlapped mode you must use this button to a arrange the patterns Arrange patterns on the cut line Show hide seam allowance 2 IC4D User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Show hide seam allowance Patterns on a project are correctly designed on the internal seam line on which you must add the seam allowance to obtain the external cut line To show or hide the seam allowance for single or multiple pattern you must select those patterns and then click on the button Show hide seam allowance Show hide grading Current work on a pattern is done on the base size that is displayed on the screen If you want to display the other sizes for single or multipl
302. is i eS Copy grading horizontally and vertically a 4 al Symmetrize the selected points grading 4 Rotate grading rule 90 degrees 17 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer a Load and apply the grading rule Y Save a grading rule into a file Automatically calculate the point grading from the neighbor points grading Cancel the grading of the selected points PURCT Modify the shape of the pattern on the base size without changing the other sizes 4 Cancel the manual modification of one sizes for the selected points m 4 Copy point grading in clipboard Ctrl F Transfer grading from clipboard Ctrl G Activate Drop Grading Grade Activate Grade Grading Activate Extra Grading Extra 4 Activate Spec Grading Spec xej SIIS Measure and Check Tool mode toolbar Assembly two patterns on the selected points Assembly Marry two patterns in a point Combine two patterns on a specified direction Translate notches from a pattern to another Measure the distance between two points on a pattern seam line Measure direct distance between two points on a contour Measure angles from three points Measure a pattern surface EN E 18 IC4D User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 3 Definitions and explanations To understand and master the EuroCAD Pattern Designer functions we must clearly define end explain the technical terms Project A project rep
303. is lit Now the 3 button for digitizing internal DD D pattern amp B button to end up digitizing a pattern P D ae 4 digitizer is ready to use If technical points something does not look to 4 button for digitizing grading work please check the cables 5 button for digitizing internal the digitizer ON OFF lines D button for starting to digitize an auxiliary switch and the pointer to be 6 button for digitizing dart edge piece C button for digitizing the grain axis plugged in the right place points E button to end up drawing an auxiliary 7 button for digitizing fastener whole pattern points F button to end up digitizing At the first use for the EuroCAD wired digitizer it must be configured according to the user manual This operation is done once on installation Enter the DIGITIZE mode If the digitizer is plugged correctly then you will hear a short beep thus the digitizer informs you that it is ready to use If the digitizer is not connected or the computer connection fails an error message will appear on the screen Check connections and restart procedure After entering the DIGITIZE mode and the digitizer is connected you will not work with the mouse or keyboard anymore now you will use the digitizer To supervise the correct piece conversion by digitization we recommend Place the monitor t
304. is point is created at a distance P11 at x 0 and y 5 cm distance from the point P11 5 You must create the point P19 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the side blend point with the back This point is created at a distance x Pt 4 0 4 and y 2 2 cm from the point P11 Pt waist length 6 You must create the point P20 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the side upper point for the back waistband This point is created at a distance x Pt 4 2 45 and y 5 1 8cm from the point P11 Pt waist length You must anchor the points on the front and back waistband pieces left right on the corresponding points of the parametrical design similar to the front and back pieces anchoring After anchoring on the parametrical design the pieces are automatically graded the grading can be displayed or hidden by click on the Show Hide grading button 294 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 12 7 2 How to adapt a direct designed skirt for automatic grading To automatically grade a pant that was designed directly in EuroCAD Pattern Designer you must enter the PARAMETRICAL mode and create a rectangular structure from the mid point front mid point back lateral points thigh point hip point and points for skirt bottom Before starting the parametrical design you must declare the size set and the quotes required for this project See chapter
305. ith that in GARMENT TOOL mode If the notch to be graded is placed in a point you can avoid point selection by holding down CTRL key during selection To display the grading table of the selected notch click on the right mouse button or click the Edit the grading table of the point button from the button bar Se Edit the grading table of the point Similarly to the reference point grading table the notch grading table can have four grading tables the grade drop spec and extra grading table The grading of a notch is different from the grading table of a point It contains three columns dist offset step In dist column you must enter the distance from the notch to mark point for each size except the base size for which the distance was set in the Garment Tool mode in the step column you must enter the notch displacement from its position on the previous size Automatically in the dist column will appear the distances between notch position on the base size and notch position on the current size Similarly to the distance for the step as well the table can be filled for each size If the notch has a uniform grading then the step will be the same for all sizes Notch grading will be done similarly for all grading types by completing the dist offset and step column _ Grade Drop Spec Extra ed Notch distance 4 48 cm Any modificatio
306. izontal and vertical flip FLIP operation represents a vertical or horizontal mirroring operation by obtaining a symmetrical pattern First click to select a pattern and click on Horizontal flip or Vertical flip buttons ia or to mirror the pattern z vertically or horizontally E a m E a Original pattern Horizontal flip Vertical flip 1 5 19 Pattern alignment Click on Two or more patterns can be aligned between them for further processing To align two or mode patterns you must first select them The selection order is important for the alignment The last selected pattern will remain fixed while the other patterns will be aligned to this last pattern button to align two or After patterns selection you must click on Align selected patterns button A small more selected window will open there you can select the way the patterns will be aligned patterns Align patterns upside Align x Ea Vertical align patterns to the center to the piece kmit om Align patterns downside PO ole the ference rk al abne B Align patterns to the left OE Horizontal align patterns to the center B Align patterns to the right 1 5 20 Block the selected pattern You can protect a pattern from accidental changes by blocking it You must select the pattern and then click on Block the selected pattern button While this button is active the pattern cannot be modified moved or deleted E If
307. k on the point at XY from another point button and represents the inseam thigh point This point is created at a distance x Lpt and y 0 cm from the point P5 Lpt pant width on bottom Lip pant inseam 292 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 7 You must define the point P7 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the hip point This point is created at a distance x Ps 4 1 and y 0 cm from the point P5 Lpt the pant width at bottom After you have created the points you must display both parametrical and piece layer by using the mix view interactive cursor thus both layers will be displayed In the previous example the pant was designed for the size 42 If the pieces in the model were designed for another size you must enter the GRADING mode and in the right side menu to check the corresponding measure for the designed model If the measure checked as base size in the GRADING mode does not correspond to the base size for the designed model the correct layer overlapping will fail In PIECE mode you must select the front piece and then you must click to select the front mid point then you must drag the selected point to overlap the point P1 of the parametrical design during dragging you must hold the SHIFT ALT key combination in order to magnetize these points If you hold the SHIFT ALT key combination you can magnetize the selected points to be overlapped a
308. k on the small arrow near the alignment button and choose Align pattern to grain axis horizontally in the submenu If you have been used this option previously and then you can click directly on button Align grain axis horizontally 4lign grain axis horizontally inversed 4lign grain axis vertically 4lign grain axis vertically inversed 38 Le 2 Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer If you want to align pattern to grain axis vertically you must click on the small arrow near the alignment button and choose Align pattern to Align grain axis horizontally grain axis vertically in the submenu If you have Align grain axis horizontally inversed been used this option previously and the image on the button shows a pattern with a vertical grain axis then you don t need to make the choice from the submenu you can click directly on the button To reorient a pattern with a vertical axis you must click on the small arrow near the alignment button and choose Align pattern to grain axis vertically inversed in the submenu If you have been used this option previously and then you can click directly on button Align grain axis horizontally 4lign grain axis horizontally inversed 4lign grain axis vertically 4lign grain axis vertically inversed 1 5 24 Pattern interpolation After digitizing the pattern contour is formed by dots joined by lines Even the curved regions are approximated by a bundle of straight line
309. kline front CLICK Delete Rename Down On the left side of View french curves window click on the french curve you want to delete The selected french curve can also be visualized on the right side of the opened window Ok Cancel Delete NI click Moving a french curve in the library After selecting the french curve to be deleted press the Delete button from the bottom left side of the window The french curve is deleted from the list To delete the french curve from the library press Ok button otherwise press Cancel button The position of the french curves in the list can be changed by moving up or down To move up or down first select from the list the french curve to be moved then press Down or Up button on the bottom side of the window vit Bisse zide seam front armhole tront neckline front CLICK Dette Rename Donn LTR CLICK On the left side of View french curves window click on the french curve you want to move The selected french curve can also be visualized on the right side of the opened window After selecting the french curve to be moved press the Down or Up button If you use the Down button the selected french curve will be moved down on the list 1 If you use the Up button the selected french curve will be moved up in the list 2 To save all the modifications press Ok button otherwise press Cancel button
310. l be automatically added by program as being the biggest from all sizes and in this way the size will be added at the end of the size set If you want to add the new size at the begining of the size set the size index must be 0 After making all desired settings click on Ok button to insert the new size or click on Chancel button if you want to quit New combined size Newgrade TEE Grade name ps Grade index Combined name Grade index Drop index Drop index poo ro m Spec index ce Cancel Spec index Extra index Extra index Ok Cancel New combined size If you want to enter an intermediary size Combined name regular press Add a new size button enter the name and the index of the new size Grade index i then press Ok The new size will be added in the size set according to the Drop index index In the given example size regular is introduced between M and L sizes The Spec indes Extra ind fo index of this size will be 2 5 The grading a values for the new size will be calculated Ok Cancel proportionally according to the new index 232 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer After making a click on the Ok button from creating sizes windows a new size will appear in the size having the place in the size set depending on the size index Edit size set Dimension step Edtseeset This
311. l dements _ Chonta polka Pron 1 Hanas Feroe robh B i Chasis Tha paak of ha dat nerea pHing for diang Folds Top lire ll Background color i Ts Colors bi fha telected elements l he Fil pisos a o Filing color for new penas Crs black Contour cok tor rag piec s C white Tonio color FF Tener cake Cume points color fl 5 Ten cae Interface codons Gad coker Toky lor labeli parte ate Col for the graded point direction Color for editsble controls Type Internal ines E Dalal cobs Patter Lines line ii Explanations Options CS Explanations gt O S O Color Profiles You can make three different color profiles for EuroCAD By default will be Profile 1 Default Profile 1 General settings for drawing Here you can change the EuroCAD Pattern Designer background color and you can choose to fill pieces with color Background color default grey Fill pieces default unchecked Cursors You can choose the color for the cursors to be black or white default black Colors used to display different technical The color for the technical elements can be changed Click on the elements present color choose another one and then click on OK to save the new color Here you can select the symbol that will be used to display the graded and points on a curve points or the points on a curve The symbols can be X cross square Con
312. l line text axis 191 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Operations on an internal line 1 Cut a piece on an internal line Select the internal line in GARMENT TOOL mode by a mouse click over it The piece can be cut in two separate j Cut piece parts over the text axis First you must click on the text axis to select it click on Create paints Cut piece button After cut the original piece and the resulting parts are ee overlapping To see the parts separately you must move them apart Select the internal line in GARMENT TOOL mode by a mouse click over it Operations aaa Click on the Create points button from the internal line Cut piece menu in the right side docker When you click on this button Create points new points will be automatically added at the intersection Delete internal line between the piece contour and the axis 3 Delete an internal line Select the internal line in GARMENT TOOL mode by a mouse Click over it Operations aaa Click on the Delete internal Cut piece line button from the internal line menu in the right side Lreate points docker When you click this button the internal line lete internal line disappears from the selected _Qedet intemaline piece 192 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 28 Symmetry axis You may design only half of the symmetrical pieces while the EuroCAD
313. l role continually T 3 25 cm 161 09 61 69 62 29 6 40 63 46 Ad 0A 64 68 65 78 65 68 66 46 67 08 6 66 1 11 2 Distance measurement between two points on a straight line To measure the distance between two points enter the MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode and click on Measure distance between two points The measurement on straight line can be done from any position on the piece inside on the contour or outside not only from point Click on the place where you want the start the measurement If the chosen place is too close to the piece contour the program will start the measurement from the closest point on the piece contour Move the cursor and click on the final position for the distance measurement This position can be a point on a piece a internal point a notch on the contour or on any other position inside or outside the piece While moving the cursor it is allways displayd the distance from the start point as well as the deplacement on horizontal and vertical toward the grain axes of the piece The measured distance is displayed in the upper menu for the base size and also for the graded sizes Pressing the CTRL key can set the precise direction of measurement After select the initial point of measurement press the CTRL key and you can precise direct the measurement for 15 to 15 degree The distance for the base size will be displayed in real time in the upper side of the menu The measurement can be added on the measur
314. latter can be set from the import window in EuroCAD Pattern Designer Sie 4 Mee o al Number of design iez 33 number ol style Ih 16 02 2006 124 T35 np 16 02 2006 124 14447 2p 0606 2006 14 2 17 1 06 2 16 02 2006 124 2011 tips Th Ole 205 Te 4 e341 98 2p 16 02 2006 124 EH TRA ap TOZ 2006 124 44231 6111 730 02 06 2006 10 MEN O Winewzp 22 06 2006 10 1 HATTI a NOS 2006 14 2 Feman peoe Minkct F Rexacgn aera he treated piezas acer lo deak rich seting in Muhip peos AAPA TEEM eee appiicaiion align CF import daecty pieces vath its orm doubling settings fF sceonding bo the folowing settings maipi peras sccoeding spec anginal etch bee veto E TE Am ee a Hetch length 0 00 7 impot all sine fron pieces ie she restrictions are ignored Hach mih 0 00 ci cin fe Usish wales To import Assyst files zip you must select the path for Ea these files on the hard disk and then to select the zip Piece Assyst fie fiter file to be imported To import the whole project you Piece h must select Style option to import separate pieces you must select Piece or Design options in the Style Assyst file filter In the lower right part of the import page there is a search button click on it to search only zip files Search ZIP files 323 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Find Files After you click on the zip files searc
315. ld Select the first bottom point of the current fold the first peak point of the next fold oo l Select the second bottom point of the current Fold the second peak point of the next fold Select the first peak point of the fold Select the first peak point of the fold Select the first bottom pont of the current fold the first peak point of the next fold Select the second bottom paint of the current fold the second peak point of the next fold Select the second peak point of the fold Select the first peak point of the fold Select the second peak point of the fold Select the second bottom point of the current fold the second peak point of the next fold a Select the first bottom point of the current fold the first peak point of the next fold 169 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Select the first peak point of the fold Select the second peak point of the fold Select the first bottom point of the current fold the first peak pont of the next fold Select the second bottom point of the current fold the second peak point of the next fold Select the first peak point of the fold Select he second peak point of the fold Select lhe s
316. lder is C Program Files PenPlot2 Bin Files but the user can change the path for digitizing folders He can change the path in EuroCAD Pattern Designer Settings window Digitizer tab using Browse button that correspond to Path for Digi Pen files option EuroCAD Pattern Designer will read the files from the Digi pen folder and will delete them after interpretation If there are interpretation problems the files will be copied in a backup folder By default the backup folder is C Program Files PenPlot2 Bin Files Backup but the user can change it The path for backup folder can be set in EuroCAD Pattern Designer Settings window Digitizer tab using Browse button that correspond to Path for backup Digi Pen files option If there are interpretations problems the user will be warned A message window will appear and will explain the problem The pieces that will be loaded will not appear in a preview window The DigiPen working table has 8 buttons numbered from 1 till 8 When the user will select with the Pen one of this buttons will access a specific working mode All clicks done by the user will be memorized according to the selected working mode To switch the working mode you just have to make click on a different number from Digi Pen tablet Interpretations for each working mode mode 1 Contour points this points are giving the initial shape of the piece Between this points are only straight segments All
317. lds to have equal dimensions it is recommended to create the points with the function Divide segment in a given number of parts from Shape Tool mode Mixed folds can be of equal or different measurment The marked points for these folds can be points that allready are set on the piece or new added points To add new points on the piece contour the user must select the Garment tool mode and either do a double click on the piece contour or use the function Divide segment in a given number of parts see chapter 1 6 12 and 1 6 15 The pattern on which will be added the piints neccesary for mixed fold creation Adding new points for fold creation by s the segment in a equal number of segments Divide segment in a given number of parts In Garment Tool mode the Select Divide segment in a given number of parts By entering the division user must click on the contour number on the segment where wants to add new points were generated the folds points 167 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Select the second segment The user will enter the divisions number in the The new points can be used as edit window marked points for folds 168 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Define fold Selection of necessary points in order to be able to create mixed folds Select the second peak point of the fo
318. le setting while the second piece will have the double mirrored setting If you choose multiply pieces according to the original model the Notch type C aotording fo tollovring settings Inte Notch z pieces will be imported in the position specified in Assyst horizontal or aril ce a X vertical flip or both as simple pieces Notch length em There are many differences between EuroCAD and Assyst Some Molch skit Zz cm technical elements as some notch types intersection notch or the seam allowance free are not common for both applications However EuroCAD imports accurately all these elements According to the piece drawing mode and with respect to the cut line and the internal seam line after Assyst file import the result will include pieces on the cut line patterns with grading tables if the pieces in Assyst are worked and graded on the seam line and the cut line is not graded or is missing pieces on the cut line templates with grading table if the pieces in Assyst have a graded cut line If the pieces have also a graded seam line then inside the imported piece there will be a graded auxiliary piece which is the former seam line defined in Assyst pieces on the cut line without grading table one piece for each size for the pieces with free seam allowance The free seam allowance has no correspondent in EuroCAD Thus when you import a piece with such seam allowance you will obtain pieces on
319. le with pattern properties together with information regarding the product type size patterns number command owner name print date save date and time 45 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Te eee L TE e Op ett ew ee Bo l EURO Cas OO Piece properties FFE pei ia eTe Emirs 13 ert a eh hie a or Ore Fiii Leal iii iTi e WH Pikakari Cm Pokal reb Of POG Hillie Tim Hee hii jee F rm m n Pee HFEA LAEL To change properties simultaneously on multiple patterns you must first click to select the patterns if you want to select consecutive rows click on the first row No to be selected then holding down SHIFT key and click on the last row No to be selected to select rows randomly click on each row No to be selected while holding down CTRL key No To select all patterns in a table use the CTRL A key combination Property changes for one selected pattern will automatically induce changes on all other selected patterns Fattems prrprrtirs Patterns propert If you want to select consecutive rows click on the first row No to be selected then holding down SHIFT key and click on the last row No to be selected If the first selected box No is 1 and the last box No is 4 then back i l J Grup i all rows from 1 to 4 will be selected oh ift Chicks 2 Patterns properti Grunt Gru To select rows randomly click on each row No to be selecte
320. lick on it to search only zip files After you click on the zip files search button a new window opens here you must enter the file name to be searched and the search path Foker setherthiin 5 Markers 3 plnu de taiere To select the folder click on the button near Path field In the opened window you may choose the folder to be explored for search and then click on Accept button Find Files If you check the message Search subfolders the search will include also the subfolders in the selected folder To start search click on Start search button To stop search click on Cancel search button The found files are displayed in the search results area To select a file in this area you must double click on the file name The fie name will automatically appear in the zip file area in the Import from Gerber window When you select a zip file the number of projects and pieces inside it will be displayed The import operation may involve the whole Path D Cancel search 7 Search subfolders Search results 4 files found D 38305_22 03 06 zipCORECTIE LA IO6PO0806 106P0234 1I06P0257 ZIP D 4 45292_New Folder zip D a 2ip D flori zip es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Project or only the Pieces you must select the appropriate option If you import Gerber files you can decide to import all internal drawings these dr
321. licking on PASTE button only the copy will remain The PASTE command can be applied multiple times each time you click on PASTE you will get a new pattern copy A fast way to duplicate the pattern without using COPY PASTE commands is described below Click to select the pattern drag and move it with the mouse and before release the mouse button to leave the pattern in the new position click simultaneously on the right mouse button You will create a pattern copy without moving the original pattern Start a new project To start a new project you must click on Create new project button When you click on this Start new project button a new workspace is initiated here you can start a project design The project name will be set at the first save For a new project it is important to fill data regarding the product technical sheet Open a saved project Open saved To open a previously saved project click on Open project button and then select a saved project project The project content can be previewed in a preview window If in Project Technical y Sheet the user introduced a drawing of the model than is possible to preview it when will open Er the project see chapter 1 13 2 For this you must check the message Preview product drawing If the model is not displayed in the preview window then it will not be opened probably a wrong format Save a project When you finish designing a project and periodically
322. lip grading will be copied flipped on y axis 215 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Copy grading with XY flip grading will be copied flipped on x and y axis Memorized grading rule of a point can be transferred from clipboard as it is on screen flipped x flipped y or flipped on x and y axis For this select destination point points click on the arrow next to the button Transfer grading from clipboard button and from the unfolded menu select Paste grading grading will be transferred on x and y axis as it is on the screen Paste X grading grading will be transferred flipped on x axis Paste X grading grading will be transferred flipped on y axis Copy grading Ctrl F Copy grading with X flip Copy grading with Y flip Copy grading with XY flip At pressing of arrow next to Copy point grading in At pressing of arrow next to Transfer grading from clipboard a menu is unfolding where can be selected clipboard a menu is unfolding where can be selected copy grading mode transfer grading mode Copy grading from one point to another can be done by using a keyboard shortcut CTRL F to memorize in clipboard point grading rule CTRL G to transfer from clipboard memorized grading rule To use this shortcut select active grading table select reference point press CTRL F to memorize grading rule Select then destination point points and press CTRL G Mem
323. ll be printed the selected size For instance when you choose to display the pieces as unfolded and you select a size in the table while in the Pc column you have inserted the value 2 and then you have clicked on Apply button then in the preview area the pieces for the selected size will appear twice If you check the message Only base size in the table only the base size will be checked automatically If you uncheck this message all sizes in the table will be checked If you have checked the pieces to be unfolded Arrangement setting you can also define the distance between the f unfolded pieces enter the desired value in the field near Shoes the message Gap between pieces The piece arrangement can be optimized by EuroCAD Automarker application Click on Print setting Nesting with EuroCAD Automarker button to Gap between pieces 11 50 aes launch the application through which the pieces will be rearranged automatically or manually for an optimal nesting jv Only base size Text setting Jw Text Only piece size c Choose the piece elements to be printed In the Export settings area you must check the piece elements to be printed After you check the elements to be printed you must click the Apply button to display the settings and to print them accordingly Text if you check Text the piece name will be printed together with the comments and size Only piece
324. lors Digitizer Plotter Keyboard Remote assistance Digitizer general z Digitizer profile type From file New profile intemal ipa Save polis Internal digitizer profile Calcomp X Curent profile is EurocAD Wired Edit profile Serial port hi Load profila Digitizer Fast ac W The digitizer has a Eurocad sticker for fast functions Set sicker To set the sticker postion for fast Eurocad functors Push the button of the digitizer on the top of the START button then push the thind point of HOLE I Use confirmation acoustic messages at digitizing Sound files digitization path C Program Files Eurocad Eurocad PatternDesigner Sounds gira a thn Path for Digi Pen flex C Program Files PenPlota 6 in Files Browse Overlap margin Dig Pen 03 cm Delete backup files after fzo days Path for backup Digi Fen files C Program Files PenPlot Bin Fies Backup Browse Load default settings In the bottom of this window you will find the necessary settings for Digi Pen As you already know here can be set the path for the files from Digi Pen and for the backup files Also you have the possibility to set to delete the files from backup folder The files older than the introduced number will be deleted The older files will be erased only when the function Digi Pen digitize is accessed In settings window the user also can set the overlapping margin If there are errors on the file from Digi Pen a wi
325. lues for each size You must click in the boxes that correspond to each size and you must type the values for each of them 264 es B Dimension step Edit size set 4 e gt Size name I Made to measure size JV Use separator Many grading groups can include the same size G Spread with a value the selected dimension Description Size set name women shirt Sant women shirt basic pattern description Accept Exit women shirt basic pattern Size set description Size seb name women shirt User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer If the quotes values have a constant increase decrease step you don t need to edit the values for each size You must enter the quote for a single size and then set the quote step near the Dimension step and click on the button Spread with a value the selected dimension After you click this button the quote values will be calculated and displayed automatically for all sizes ATTENTION in case when sizes are combined and between these sizes for a certain quote the step is not constant cannot be used the method of writing the quote step but will be necessary to input the value for each size in corresponding field To delete a quote in a size set you must select one of the corresponding values then click on Delete the selected dimension from the size set button In the same editing window you can
326. m line or on the external cut line If you use to work on the internal seam line you will leave the default option active If you use to work on default on the internal seam line the external cut line you will choose the corresponding option Default settings for new pieces The new digitized pieces are by default operated on the internal seam line or the external cut line The digitized pieces are generally patterns with the added seam allowance this is the reason why the digitized pieces are usually operated by default on the external cut line If you are frequently digitizing patterns on the seam line you can change the default default on the external cut line setting Precision at polyline conversion When you export projects for plotter or other applications that cannot work with Bezier curves the curved regions on the pieces are approximated from straight segments A curve approximation can be done from a fixed number of segments this operation being very fast but with low precision This approximation can be also done by the default Points number 10 smart polyline method this method adjusts permanently the number of segments in a polyline for an optimal representation You can also set the maximal deviation for a segment approximation 338 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer c Technical elements settings Simple point symbol Syanniad beps aaa Aaleerice port smial x
327. mark point The distance between the new mark point and the notch is recalculated so as the notch position remains unchanged 2 Convert a notch to a point A notch can be converted to a point First click to select the notch then click Convert to point button in the lower part of the right docker Near the notch appears a grade point To convert a notch to a point first select the notch Place the cursor over the notch and click the left mouse button Convert to point Click the Convert to point button located in the lower part of the right docker Convert the selected percent notch in 4 point Near the notch appears a grade point The new created point becomes automatically the mark point for the new notch 3 Delete a notch First select the notch then press Delete notch button or DELETE on keyboard To delete a notch first click on the notch to select it Delete notch l Press Delete notch button in the lower part of the right docker Delete the selected percent notch 134 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 3 Percent notch The percent notch is a notch applied between two points at a specific distance ratio from these points To create a percent notch first click on the piece to select it Then click on the contour approximately where the notch will be added Then click the button Create percent notch The new distance notch will have as mark point the clos
328. marsions precisiori E decimal Number of urdoredo levels fia leva Reurd off to 5 the latest decimal of the pinta Defaut setings fee new peces E New design piace ale by defaut designed ae intemal seam line New dighzed pieces are bey defauk designed as eviennal cut ine Reep the piaca name amp lhe copy process Precision at polylines cornersicey C Pobdine wilh 4 lined number al segments Pits pusher Z Smart polvire Points number few s mary Load default sethrige Atap Dui Options Explanations Measurement unit mm cm inch inch n 8 The measurement unit can be changed at anytime during working inch n 16 inch n 32 inch n 64 inch n m session All quotes will be recalculated according to the selected measurement unit default mm Grid dimension A grid represents a series of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical lines that are used to help draw and arrange objects The grid default 10 cm dimension expressed in cm represents the edges dimension for a grid eye that is a square Page width and length The page width and length is set according to the dimensions of the projected pieces The working surface can be increased up to 10 m x default 5000 x 5000 mm 10 m Quotes precision The number of decimals displayed for the quotes We recommend that for measurement units as cm or inch to use maximum 2 decimals if default 2 decimals you choose the mm as measurement
329. mation Predile EuroCADWired Reference pomt fi l Profile name here you can Message format TXOOOYYYYY Curve point 2 find the format name that E E Unit INCH Notch corresponds to the opened profile Piels perunt 1000 Intemal point Message format in this field nasasa a you can find the format of the Ighizet sizes Grading 9 message that is transmitted to the E ser digitizer This message is a aia te Est Digtizer width 48000 BAGS 5 character set that includes Internal line code X characters that define the Digtizer height 36000 Pines eae horizontal coordinate CAET Aat paoe code Y characters that define the eee FE EAA vertical coordinate eral communication port setting T characters that define the Bi ani n Button hole coge button i Characters that are ignored Symmetry asis code Data bas ic O M Start new main pattan code Unit the measurement unit for the digitizer transmission Stop main pattern code Panty Gran axis code Digitizer sizes here you can insert the digitizer sizes width and height in pixels these can be automatically complete if you press Set dimensions button and you make a click in the top right corner on the digitizing useful Stat awian pattern code k Stop bits Stop auxiliary pattem code J P B e Ao area Point button codes In EuroCAD Pattern Designer there are 6 ac
330. ment are assigned from the screen and applied automatically in the operation text Point on a vector reported to another line From the PA point a line is traced at a U angle from a PB PC line on this line a new point Pn is assigned at a distance D In the near example from the P2 a line is traced at a U angle from the line defined by the P1 and P3 points a new point P4 is created on this line at a distance D from P2 Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation From point Pao create a line at SU degrees The function parameters are angle reported to the line defined oy points reference point PSO and PS2 and create on this line a new the line from which the vector is built point PSS at 20 cm from the first point angle from the line measured in degrees U a the distance from the reference point and the new point D Pas If the reference point is already defined you may hold down the SHIFT key and click the left mouse button at the current position the U and D values and the placement are assigned from the screen and applied automatically in the operation text Point in the middle of a segment Le By this function you can draw a new point PN at the middle of the segment defined by the points PA and PB In the near example a new Fe eee P o _ J point P3 is placed at the middle of the segment defined by P1 and P2 points 276 10 es User manual EuroCAD P
331. mode the distance will be positive and only the placement direction will be changed for the notch according to the chosen mark point 1 10 20 Align the graded sizes to the grain axis If after a permanently alignment of the sizes to two points permanent pack the graded sizes and the grain axis were rotated from the base size you can use the alignment function of the graded sizes to the grain axis The same function can be used if the grain axis was graded and shows different rotations from a size to another Click to select a piece then click the Align graded sizes to grain axis button The sizes will be rotated and translated so as the origin and direction of the grain axis to be the same on all sizes Align graded sizes to grain axis After grading the grain axis the grain axes for different Click on Align graded sizes to grain axis button the sizes is not overlapping anymore and are rotated from size disposition will change so as the grain axis to be the horizontal overlapped horizontally 1 10 21 Automatic calculation of a point grading relative to the grading of the nearby points The program can automatically calculate a point grading relative to the grading of the nearby points This can be done only for the active table To grade a point using this function you must enter GRADING mode and pick up the Calculate the point grading relative to the grading of the nearby points function After activati
332. must select a new path in the new opened window To delete a plotter on the list you must first select the plotter and the click on the button Add delete plotter f Keyboard settings a General Design Techracal Colors Digitizer Phot be Keyooard Remole assistance Delas key combanshice New key combination Telgte Mone Paste Assigned to the command Cascade arangemert Horg Honizoma airangemert veica srrangernrert Minimize all About Dupicsle pieces Desonphice Fiece Tool working mode Shape Tool waking mada Dias Tool working mode Drow lines Create percent moich Ling to curve Load default settings Accept Qu The most used commands can be easily accessed by creating shortcuts The EuroCAD user can select key combinations for a faster access of some specific program functions There are predefined shortcuts offered by the program the user can also define its own shortcuts in order to facilitate the working procedures 342 IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer In Keyboard Settings window you can see a command list for which you can define your personal key combinations When you select a command from the list in the Description field will be displayed the specific function for that command If the selected command has already assigned a key combination this will be displ
333. n near the mouse it will be displayed the question mark sign If you click on the button What is this and then you click a element in the program a help window opens that will contain detailed explanations regarding the selected element What is this The Pattern bar p P gt A EK el a maalle R E f PIECE BAR In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you have the possibility to view all patterns from the opened project in a table called Pattern bar placed on top of the screen This table can be show or hide on the screen depending on user wishes using the Show Hide button You can use the stock area to select a certain pattern on the screen For this first you must activate the Select the patterns on the screen button and then click on the pattern in the stock area This function is helpful when you g have patterns having similar shapes but different names because here you can see the name of the pattern very clear When selecting one pattern the background for the selected pattern becomes black and the pattern contour turns into the old background color white The selected pattern becomes surrounded with green squares in the work area You can select many patterns in the stock area using SHIFT key from the key board In addition you have the possibility to use the stock area selection as a zoom to the selected pattern For this you must use the Zoom to the ma patterns on the screen functio
334. n and then click on 0 key from the pointer Choose a starting point usually one of the pattern corners for pattern digitization Place the pointer over this point and press the O pointer button Trace the pattern outline as follows The corners will be marked using the 0 pointer button The marked points will be assumed as main points by EuroCAD Pattern Designer These are the grade points The straight lines will be digitized by passing directly to the next corner that will be marked using the 0 pointer button the software will automatically trace a straight line between the two points Curved lines are digitized by marking their shape by intermediate curve points using 1 pointer button The intermediate curve points can be brought closer or away according to the camber For example for a sleeve cutout intermediate points at each 1 2 cm are required For a curve that follows the hip contour curve points may be separated by 3 5 cm Start and end points for the curved lines must be marked by main points using the 0 pointer button As the part outline is digitized it appears on the computer screen The last digitized point is automatically connected to the first one in order to close the shape GRADE POINT To digitize a pattern gt start from a corner Corners and direction switching points are considered as main points or grade points They are marked using the 0 pointer button To digiti
335. n for the grading steps in any of the three column will automatically recalculate the displacements from the mark point for each size For example if the user changes the displacement for the dist column than will be automatically recalculate the displacements from the mark point for offset and step column Offset and step will be zero for base size in all 4 columns Reversely if you change the values in dist column the displacement steps in the step column will be automatically recalculated 239 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer To copy the grading rule from a notch to another you can use the key combinations CTRL F and CTRL G similarly to copy grading from one point to another When you add a new size at the beginning or ending of a size set the distance notches will be automatically graded by the same grading step with the last previous sizes in the size set Always the declared distance of the notch will be the same with its distance on the base size When the base size is changed will be changed the offset and the step as well The distance declared in Garment Tool mode will be kept as a separate for the notch To cancel the grading of a distance notch select the distance notch then click on Cancel the grading of the selected points button If you obtain negative distance values in the grading table for a distance notch grading on some sizes you don t have to worry in GARMENT TOOL
336. n from right side menu from Draw Tool After you check this option the fields where you can enter the coordinates of the The third drawn m a Current drawn segment length AA PN The second drawn point Set properties fo f next line new point become active f ext point Badius You have two possibilities to enter the coordinates of the next point of the curve 1 X and Y coordinate relative to piece origin point 2 dX and dY coordinates relative to last entered point add a new point using coordinates relative to the piece origin point you have to click with the mouse in X or Y fields enter the coordinates of the new point and press Apply button The new point will appear on the screen at the coordinates entered by the user To add a new point using coordinates relative to the last entered point you have to click with the mouse in dX or dY fields enter the coordinates of the new point and press Apply button The new point will appear on the screen at the coordinates entered by the user After you entered the coordinates of the new point press Apply gt button to see the new point on the screen at the entered coordinates 86 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 13 Draw arc by two points and radius In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you can create arcs by two points and radius For this make a click on the Draw arc by 2 points and radi
337. n the marker in EuroCAD Automarker application The auxiliary pattern property is declared in PATTERN mode in the right side docker where are displayed the properties for the selected pattern See chapter 1 5 26 An object designed and defined as Auxiliary pattern must be grouped together with the main pattern in the project in order for the dependency defined during design to be plotted Attach an auxiliary pattern to a main pattern E Ch g TA g ae ME Lh 4 Select the auxiliary pattern s and place them as they will appear on the main pattern Select the main pattern and the auxiliary pattern s with the selection rectangle an alternative method is to hold down SHIFT key and to click on each pattern to be grouped see chapter 1 5 1 After selecting the main pattern and the auxiliary patterns to be grouped you must click on the Attach a ry Uh ka Gy E to one main pattern one or more auxiliary patterns Attach to one main piece one or more auxiliary pieces Attention This button will become active only if a main pattern and at least one ungrouped auxiliary pattern are selected When you attach an auxiliary pattern to a main pattern the former is taking the properties of the latter Attention BE l l l ee If the set size in the auxiliary pattern differs The size setfor the secondary piecets differs from the size set ofthe main piece the size set will be modifie
338. n the specific boxes The numerical values can be positive or negative according to point position from the origin point After entering the new point coordinates you must press ENTER or to click the Move point to button for the changes to be effective A cm 51 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer ATTENTION if the moved point is the origin point after movement its Points Modify points position 7 coordinates remain X 0 and Y 0 because the piece origin is displaced together with this point _Move point to _ cm A selected point can be moved horizontally and vertically from its actual position To do this you must enter the displacement distances in the specific boxes For the changes to be effective you must press ENTER or _Move point with _ click on Move point with button 38 4 cm cm dx ah cm 1 6 8 Point properties When you select a point in Shape tool mode its coordinates are displayed in the Propertie right side docker Beside the horizontal X axis and vertical Y axis coordinates in Curve angle tangent the right side docker you can find information about curve angle tangent entry point it poi it point about curve angle tangent exit point or about the selected Bezier curve pagi 151 02 degree To visualize the curve angle tangent exit point and the curve angle tangent entry l i Curve angle tangent point you must click to select the
339. n the working area and in the left panel you must check radius option from Set properties for and you must introduce the radius length After pressing ENTER key or Apply button on the screen will appear the circle Draw circle Set properties far O nest line C Next point f Radius ERTE W Length zq cm Click on Draw circle from Draw tool working mode Move the mouse in the workspace and make a click to draw the circle center In the left panel you must check radius option from Set properties for and you must introduce the radius length 100 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer To finish drawing the circle you must press ENTER key or Apply button from left panel 1 7 26 Trace mode drawing around the contour of the existing pieces In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you have the possibility to copy a piece section by drawing around the contour of the existing piece In addition using this function you can create new pieces from other already existing pieces by drawing together sections from them For this you will have to use the Trace mode drawing around the contour of the existing pieces function from Draw tool mode or you can use the Trace mode from the Palette menu If you want to use the Trace mode drawing around the contour of the existing pieces function you must enter first the Draw tool mode and th
340. n to press ENTER key or to click on Apply button you will obtain a circle When you draw a circle the program will automatically create a technical point in the circle center 1 7 28 Draw a square or rectangle To draw a square or rectangle enter the DRAW TOOL mode then click on Draw rectangle Move the cursor in the workspace click and hold the left mouse button then drag the mouse Between the point where the mouse button was pressed and the point where the mouse button will be released a rectangle appears If you want to obtain a square then hold down CTRL during drawing a rectangle The height and width will have the same values so you will obtain a square During drawing in the upper part of the right side menu the rectangle dimensions are displayed Rectangle or square dimensions can be modified even after drawing by changing the values in the specific boxes After modifying the dimensions you must click on Apply button to apply changes ae Hold down CTRL while drawing a rectangle to obtain a square Draw rectangle Properties width 23 28 cm Height 712 cm Apply The rectangle dimensions appear in the specific boxes in the right side menu You can change rectangle dimensions even after drawing To do this you have to change the values in the specific boxes and then to press ENTER key or to click on Apply button Draw rectangle Move the cursor in the works
341. n together with the previous one While these two functions are active when selecting one or many patterns from the stock area only the selected patterns will come in front of the screen Zoom to the pieces on the screen Warning The selected patterns will not be moved from them place If there are some other patterns next to the selected one they will come together with in the zoom area The selected patterns will be surrounded with green squares in the work area and having green shape the others will remain with its own contour color 2 Select the pieces on the screen collar cutt 1 5 Pattern mode k M Fiece Tool as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer To enter this mode you must click on Pattern button The cursor in this mode is 1 5 1 Select patterns switching between rotation and stretch mode To select a pattern you must click on it with the left mouse button On the pattern sides and corners will appear small squares you can pull from these squares to modify pattern shape for this you have to press CTRL or SHIFT If you click again on a selected pattern you will go in rotation mode and the corner control points will transform into rotation symbols if you drag these ea you can rotate the pattern C Unselected pattern Selected pattern Pattern selected in rotation mode When you select a pattern its name and type in brackets will be one selected piece Front MD display
342. n which the designed point will be anchored To superpose the designed point on the geometrical point the values for the point position must be zero Attention After defining the geometrical point on which depends the designed point you must check and modify the position of the designed point For a faster position definition you must get the drawing closer to the geometrical sketch then in the SHAPE TOOL mode you must select the piece point by point and by using the ALT and SHIFT keys you can easily drag the piece points over the geometrical layer points c To finalize the pattern shape you must follow the same steps as for the direct design transform lines to curves define angles etc 1 12 6 2 Direct anchoring during a pattern design You can draw and anchor simultaneously the points designed on the geometrical points by magnetization In the DRAW TOOL mode you must click on Draw free or assisted with points and lines button and hold the ALT SHIFT ip combination then you must click on the geometrical points where you want to anchor the designed points Fd Points Point definition ra f geom paint P22 Modify points position Move point to a Y 290 c4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer When you hold the ALT SHIFT key combination the points will be magnetized this means that the designed points will be precisely overlapping on the chosen geometrical points
343. n you must click to select the patterns while holding down SHIFT key see chapter 1 5 1 In Pattern properties table you can also change the properties for each pattern or simultaneously for a group of patterns In Piece properties table you have the possibility to search and find patterns according to them names For this the user must type the pattern name or a group of letters that can be find in the pattern name in the Search field After typing these letter make a click on the Search button After searching all the patterns which has this group of letters in their name will be identified and highlighted The current number of these patters will be marked with turquoise blue The Pattern properties table can be displayed from other mode tools than Pattern mode by pressing F7 button from keyboard The displayed table will contain all project pattern 43 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer To visualize the Pattern properties table click on Pattern information table button in the right side docker In this table you can visualize and modify simultaneously data regarding patterns grading group pattern position design mode on the seam line or on the external cut line fabric type rotation and flip freedom if the pattern is auxiliary or not and information about the alignment groups Bitte properties Fx Giroupl 0 0 r rt Grown if
344. na model fF intema points Motch type Uext Monch Z p e ineme ipa Match argie l i a fer Fret iiit Hoshi i om Prciceept fe Other nera chaeangs o rea cs To import Gerber files you must click on the Import button in the Project menu A new menu opens here you can find the file list that can be imported in EuroCAD Pattern Designer In this window you must choose Gerber files tmp After you select Gerber files tmp a new window will open here you must select the path for the file on the hard disk and the file to be imported from the list you can also choose the ZIP archives If the selected directory includes tmp files these will be displayed in the Gerber file list 320 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer If the selected folder includes zip files these will be displayed in ZIP files list when you select a zip file the archive content will be displayed in Gerber files list If you select a zip file and no Gerber file is displayed then the archive is invalid When you select a zip file the number of models and pieces in the archive will be displayed automatically The import will interest the whole Model or each Piece separately by selecting one of the corresponding options Search ZIP files File Ea sarn searcn Path D Modele S amples Cancel search V Search sub folders In the lower right part of the import page there is a search button c
345. nation points After the point selection press Transfer grading from clipboard button or CTRL G key combination to copy the grading rule Note To copy grading from several grading tables repeat for each one the procedure of selecting active table selecting reference point copy grading and transferring grading rule in destination points 218 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer e Separate copy on X and Y axis between the points on a piece For the points on the same piece you can copy the grading on a single axis vertical or horizontal grading For the points on the same piece the grading rule can be copied for both axis either by CTRL F followed by CTRL G method described above or directly by a click on Copy grading horizontally and vertically button Select the first point to copy the rule from hold down the SHIFT key and click to select the point where the rule will be copied Then upon situation click on one of the buttons Copy horizontally the grading rule Copy vertically the grading rule or Copy grading horizontally and vertically If for example you will click on Copy horizontally the grading Aar at rule only the grading steps on horizontal will be copied while the vertical grading steps for the destination point will remain unchanged Cop the vertical grading rule CAENCAEN Click to select the point to copy the vertically grading rule from
346. nd represents the peak of the first dart on the back piece P19 designed by a click on the point in the middle of a segment The segment is defined by the points P18 and P8 This point represents the peak of the second dart on the back piece P20 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x 0 and y 8 8 from the point P19 This point helps you to define the second dart on the back piece and gives its length P21 22 points created by a click on the point at XY from another point button These points are created at a distance x 1 and y 0 for the point P21 and x 1 and y 0 for the point P22 from the point P18 These points help you to create the first dart on the back piece and define the peak position P23 P24 points created by a click on the point at XY from another point button These points are created at a distance x 1 and y 0 and x 1 and y 0 for the point P24 These points help you to create the second dart on the back piece and define the peak position P25 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is defined from the point P18 at the x 0 and y 8 8 coordinates This point represents the length of the first dart for the back piece P26 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is defined at a distance x 0 and y L pr from the point
347. ndow will appear In this window will be enounced all the detected problems 105 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 30 Set the type of the advanced magnetize You can use the Set the type of the advanced magnetize function if you want to reared a point position or if you want to draw new mo z points using other pints D E Advanced magnebiz 1 E loj x position or using the f Set the A rakda contour from other intersect pants patterns You can find this ara function on the first tool bar from EuroCAD Pattern Designer Par ale s A new window called Advanced magnetize will open on the screen when you will activate this function This window contents five types of advanced magnetize Graded Points Intersect Points Internal Points Contours and Parallels According to the magnetizing type that you want to use further you must select the corresponding function and then click on Apply button to activate it If you don t want to keep up on the screen this window you can close it using the Close button from bottom or the X from the oa right up corner The last type of magnetizing will remain active until you will change it You can use this function in Piece work tool mode when you want to reposition a pattern position according to other patterns from the model by using the pints positions or the pattern contour This function can be also used in Shape
348. ner To Expert only semed pecs Pe Drip bent hor tet amis a eis F Cut ina i Sean ir TF Uriojad told FF Spramehined FF Auriu peces Select plolter rena Dclpihackves Expo PLT a Expat Asirai Humber of conse fi Direct plo eaten The main plotter printing options are Pieces arrangement unfolded or overlapped with without reserve between pieces Choose the sizes to be printed Choose the piece elements to be printed Sewing line cutting line technical points grain axis name Choose the pieces to be printed all pieces or only selected pieces Choose printing position normal arranged pieces or rotated on 90 After checking the preferred options click on the Apply button The pieces will be displayed identical as they will be printed on the plotter Their arrangement has to avoid overlapping and paper wasting a Piece arrangement If you choose to arrange and realign overlapped pieces you must exit the export window by clicking the Quit then enter the PIECE mode and arrange the pieces as you wish Click the button Arrange pieces on the cut line to automatically arrange pieces so as after adding the seam allowance or after piece symmetrization to avoid piece overlapping This button can be found on the first button bar of EuroCAD Pattern Desig
349. ner application 313 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Arrangement setting C unfolded f overlapped In the printing window you can decide the pieces arrangement If you need the pieces to be printed to overlap you must check the corresponding box For a better arrangement of the unfolded pieces you must click on Nesting with EuroCAD Automarker button in the Export format PLT window When you click this button you will launch the EuroCAD Automarker application Here you will find the selected pieces if you click the Complete automatic nest time limit button the pieces will be arranged When the pieces are placed in the ideal position you must close the EuroCAD Automarker application and in the preview area of the Export format PLT window the arranged pieces will be displayed according to the result of piece arrangement ATTENTION The optimization done by EuroCAD Automarker launched from EuroCAD Pattern Designer does not produce markers The purpose of this optimization id only to arrange the pieces in order to avoid paper waste thus the piece arrangement will not respect the piece properties and restrictions b Choose the sizes to be printed You must check the size s to be printed If there are more checked sizes they will be printed overlapped or unfolded according to your choice regarding the piece arrangement The value in the column No shows how many times wi
350. ng The program for automatic nesting always uses the grain axis as a positioning marker The grain axis must be long enough so as the piece name to be completely displayed on it The grain axis must be placed so as the piece name remains inside the piece without crossing its contour This placement must be verified for the base size and for the graded sizes The grain axis rotation and position can also be graded for example in order to stay parallel with a segment on the piece that changes its own rotation following the grading process see paragraphs 1 10 13 and 1 10 14 189 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer After cutting a piece the grain axis can remain out of the piece contour EuroCAD Pattern Designer verifies permanently that the grain axis is placed inside the piece If necessary the program makes the required modifications to bring back the grain axis in a correct position 1 9 27 The text axis There are many situations when you need to draw a line inside a piece This internal line can be of various types according to its function While frequently the grain axis is very short the piece name was printed out of the piece contour EuroCAD Pattern Designer gives the possibility to display the piece name and size not on the grain axis but on a new text axis The text axis can also be used to display other tips than piece name and size To apply a text on a piece enter the GARMENT TOOL mode click on the piece
351. ng make another from Draw tool working workspace and make a click to click to indicate the length of the mode draw the circle center circle radius 1 7 24 Draw a circle by constraining the next point To draw a circle by constraining the next point in Draw tool you must click on Draw circle button Than you must click on the working area and in the left menu you must check next point option from Set properties for and you must introduce the coordinates for the second point After pressing ENTER key or Apply button on the screen will appear the circle The point for which you introduced the coordinates will not be added on the circle Click on Draw circle from Draw tool working mode Draw circle Move the mouse in the workspace and make a click to draw the circle center 99 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Set properties tor f nest line ie Next point Ao Sy Set coercion to the next Foin ae 24 cm coordinate bo the In the left menu you must check next point option from Set properties for and you must introduce the coordinates for the second point To finish drawing the circle you must press ENTER key or Apply button from left panel 1 7 25 Draw a circle by constraining the radius length To draw a circle by constraining the radius length in Draw tool you must click on Draw circle button Than you must click o
352. ng this function the steps window appears on the screen and you can start to select the points to be graded The program will automatically recalculate the selected points grading and will display the result The steps window appears on the screen only if it was set to be displayed on settings otherwise you can follow the messages displayed on the screen bottom Automatic calculation of a point grading relative to the grading of the nearby points Set as active one of the four point grading tables by selecting one of the four grade type buttons from toolbar in Grading mode 240 a m Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer w i F T Ep T T PUNCT f fhe fe cate v ad Calculate the point grading relative to the grading of the nearby points In GRADING mode click to select the point Click on Calculate the point grading relative to the grading whose grading must be of the nearby points button calculated automatically 1 10 22 Derived grading The derived grading can be defined by different rules referred to other point grading e g XY grading or geometrical grading The reference points used for grading must have a name In SHAPE TOOL mode you must select the points and must check if in the right side docker there are names allocated for each point in the field Point name If the points have no name you must insert a specific name in the Point name field
353. nge point or you can make a multi bulge in several mobile points according to several hinge points To bulge a piece in one mobile point according to one hinge point first you must select the mobile point then hold down the SHIFT key and click on the hinge point for bulging then click on Bulge button A new Bulge settings window opens Here you can set the bulging type with an angle or with a distance To bulge a piece in several points first the Bulge function has to be selected A message window appears which contains the operations which has to be made for multi bulge Select the breaking point and Select a fixed point different by the breaking point When this message window opens it contains on the bottom side only the Exit button in case you want to cancel the multi bulge operation The cursor of the mouse changes to selection cursor Next you have to select the mobile and hinge points in the following way select first mobile point select first hinge point then select the second mobile point and the second hinge point then continue selecting the next mobile points and hinge points the same way until the last mobile and hinge point After selecting all mobile and hinge points press the Apply button from the message window A new window called Bulge settings appears where you can set the bulging type with an angle or with a distance If only one value is entered in Angle or Distance fields it will be s
354. nk or a new dart will open on the cut line Multiple darts are formed but with a single peak If instead of Rotate dart we are using Close dart the selected dart will be rotated to 0 degrees and the contour will be completely closed by the edge point union The piece closure is irreversible and that dart is completely erased If the dart is rotated to 0 degrees it still exists on the piece and can be reopened anytime When a dart opening was distributed by rotation on many smaller darts the former is called multiple dart Each dart in a multiple dart can be individually selected from the list in the right side menu in order to perform changes Rotation for the parts between the darts can be done clockwise and anti clockwise The total angle of the multiple dart can be distributed between the compound darts 158 CAD User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 14 Operations on the dart modify a dart cut line The shape of a dart cut line can be modified to set the precise place on the contour for cleaving a new dart or to modify the dart shape To edit the cut line enter the GARMENT TOOL mode click on the piece click on the piece peak to select it then click Edit cut line button From now a new working mode similar with SHAPE described in chapter 1 6 is started The end of the cut line can be dragged with the mouse anywhere on the contour Points can be added on the cut line and the straight
355. ntain ONLY one matching point 186 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer B When the user wants to have a continuity of the drawing from a pattern to another and is not necessary the drawing to be placed on a certain position When the user wants to have only a continuality of the drawing from a pattern to another the most simply way to do that is using the function Create automatically matching points from Pattern Tool mode In order to have this function available the user must select at least two patterns For example if the model has the front pattern composed by three patterns and will be done from a fabric with printed flowers it is important that the drawing the flowers to have continuality from a pattern to another 3 S S 8 8 e E e 8 G 3G fe fe fe Aa A Fabric used in manufacturing the garment Pattern placement on the fabric Steps that must be followed Place the pattern in sewing positions Select the patterns that must be part from same group 90 23 fda Select the Create automatically matching points button Create automaticaly matching points 187 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Matching points creation A new window will open M Vertical called Matching points creation Here the user can set de dependency group type from which the patterns will belong to and the name as well As group type it can be checked only the Vertical Horiz
356. ntry or producer After the user finishes to modify names all sizes are checked automatically on the Group1 column meaning that all sizes are part of the Size Set You have the possibility to choose which of these sizes will be used for current model grading In this example the user create a general Size Set from 40 to 50 but in this case the model will be graded only for sizes from 40 to 46 For this sizes not used for grading will be unchecked 48 50 Further these sizes can be checked to add new sizes at model grading You can hide the unused grading sets if you will check the option Hide unused grading sets The user can redimension the Edit size set window in order to see more information on the window To remove a size select the size and click on Delete the selected size from the size set button For automatically creation of a combined size set in Edit size set window press Edit size set button At the pressing of Edit size set button a windows called Generate automatically a combined size set appear By example to combine two size categories must be completed the fields next to Define grade size set label with sizes 40 42 44 and Define drop size set label with S M in both fields size names must be separated by space character Final name resulted by combining grade and drop names can be delimited by one separator indicated in the field Use sepa
357. nts and angle using precise quotas and dimensions Warning the quotas and formulas refer to the line determinate by two drawn points and not to the curves dimensions placed between the two points There are three procedures that you can use to draw an arc by two points and arc A You can indicate the line length and the inclination angle for the line defined by the two points which defines the arc This procedure is called Constrain to the next line B Indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates for the second drawn point related to the piece origin or related to the last point created in this case the piece origin and the last created point are the same This procedure is called Constrain to the next point 92 B Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer C Indicate the starting angle for the third drawn point to create the arc This procedure is called Tangent angle constraining A Draw an arc by two points and angle by constraining t the next line Check the next line option from the right side menu to draw assisted by computer constraining to the next line When the next line setting is checked the fields where you can complete the angle and the length becomes active Setting the angle for the next segment defined by the first and the second drawn points which define the current drawn arc Set properties fo next line next point Lin W Angle 30 degrees f Absolute To
358. nts as reference points When you activate this function in the right side of the Advanced magnetize window you can set the magnetizing type that you want to use further You must keep the Ctri Alt key combination if you want view the points where you can apply the advanced magnetizing To use this type of advanced magnetizing you must activate the first option from the Advanced magnetizing window Normal advanced See If you will keep Ctri Alt key magnetizing ee ae eee ee ye combination pressed when this option is active all intersection points from all patterns will 108 B i Offset Is Offset X fo cm 2 Offset Y fa cm Advanced magnetizing using an offset Length koo e cm Advanced magnetizing using lengths Us become active The next drawing or repositioning operation can be made using the active points positions You must activate the second option from the right side menu of the Advanced magnetize if you want to use this type of magnetizing When this function is active you must insert the two offsets x and y These two offsets can be positive negative or O according to the points position that you want to obtain After filing both fields click on the Apply button While this function is active when you will press Ctri Alt key combination all intersection points from all model patterns will be active together with the new possible position that th
359. ny differences between EuroCAD and RORY FAT 2 03 Investronica Some technical elements like some notch types T or Trapeze notch are not the same in both applications Even in this case EuroCAD program will import all this elements in the right position but having different shapes e g the T and Trapeze notches will be imported as U notches in EuroCAD and the user will be warned about this by a warning message 327 as B All problems found during importing files will be displayed separate for each piece in a Warnings window In this window you will be able to display more information about the detected problems and warns about what you will have to check The user has the possibility to sort all problems detected by pieces or by errors If you want to sort the errors by pieces the piece names will be displayed in the Detected problems area followed by all problems detected for the mentioned piece If you want to sort the errors by Errors Problems the problems name will be displayed in the Detected problems area followed by the piece names where the problem was detected All problems detected while importing the exp files can be saved in the Piece information window For this the user must check the Save automatically in Piece informations option from the window bottom f Import native Investronica files from database In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you can import Investronica native f
360. o be at least partially visible from the position the user takes while working on the digitizing table Computer speakers to be turned on in order to hear the messages from the EuroCAD Pattern Designer program during digitization ATTENTION If the buttons in the command area are not responding you will have to calibrate the EuroCAD sticker If you don t hear the voice message START at the beginning or if while clicking on a letter you are informed that you have missed it then you have to recalibrate the sticker keys To do this click on Settings button in the menu bar of EuroCAD Pattern Designer program A setting window will open and you must select Digitizer option 116 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer General Design Technica Digre Plotter Keyboard Server Digite general selling Digilizer prc bpe F fom ia Hisu poegib E Pba f Sara profile meme Cees e pla Satel pail Lewd prohi In this page click on the Set sticker Digdioes be ee button then go to the digitizer and use the F Tha dgiize hata Euroosd sicker loi lasi Iuneliorr Sel dicka cursor to click O button on the pointer To sel the Hicker postion for fast Eurooad lunchong Push thee 1 buibor of the digitiner arrow on the START button of the sticker on the lop ol the START button treet push the thid poiri of HOLE and then click on the third point of the HOLE button on the sticker Use confimation acces menage at diang
361. o constrain the angle between the line defined by the first and second drawn point from 15 to 15 degrees 15 30 45 60 75 degrees related to the work space coordinates Next point Keep to be drawn Keep CTRL key pressed as h you draw the second point which CTRL Fai defines the arc to constrain the angle between the line defined key pressed during by the two points which creates drawing the second point Pal the arc and the work space to constrain the angle wa coordinates between the line defined 7 LON Firs drawn by the two points from E T point The rotation step is of 159 the arc and the work thus the angle will be only of 0 space coordinates 15 30 45 60 75 90 related to the workspace coordinates Keep Alt key pressed as you draw the next arc point and it will be attracted and overlapped on the points from other pieces Keep ALT key pressed during drawing the arc points to overlap them perfectly on top of the points from other patterns You can use the Draw arc by 2 points and arc function to divide a pattern in two parts The first two drawn points will be overlapped on two points from the pattern contour in this example one point from the front edge line and one point from the middle front line Keep Alt key pressed to overlap perfectly the points from the arc on top of the points from the front side and then reshape the arc curve by dragging the tangent 1 7 21 Draw arc by two poi
362. o on other CAD Edit profile systems EuroCAD software allows to define a specific profile for such a file To define the profile of Export profile Delete profile a DXF file you must define the general settings the structure settings and the layer settings for a specific file There are seven predefined DXF file profiles called standard profiles These profiles are specific for files that will be imported y CAD systems as Lectra Investronica Assyst Gerber NovoCut Optitex There is a specific profile called General This profile is used to export files for CAD systems that do not have a predefined profile To load a profile you must click the Load profile button in the opened window you must choose the path and you must select the profile then you must click the Open button The loaded profile name appears in the Profile field and is added to the preexistent profiles list A standard profile can be modified if you click on the Edit profile button To delete a profile on a list you must select the profile and click on Delete profile button A standard profile cannot be deleted A profile in a list can be modified if you click on Edit profile button To create a new profile you must click on New profile button The opened form Structure settings includes three windows General settings DXF file structure settings and DXF layer settings In General settings wind
363. of the original pattern Fy In this box you must insert the number of mirror patterns obtained by vertical flip of the original pattern Fxy In this box you must insert the number of mirror patterns obtained by horizontal and vertical flip of the original pattern LC if checked the seam allowance will be added in order to obtain the cut line for the pattern printing This pattern property can also be modified in this table by check uncheck the corresponding box in this column LT if checked the seam allowance will NOT be added for pattern printing thus the pattern will be identical with the pattern on the screen Changes can be done by check uncheck the corresponding box in this column 44 c4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Fabric The corresponding field is filled with the fabric for the selected pattern ex liner tweed etc If you want to change the fabric type for the selected pattern you must 7 click on the small arrow near the specific field A submenu with the fabric type is me Opening you can choose the preferred material If the fabric hasn t been used yet then Rae Rotation click in the specific field and enter the new fabric name cloth Fabric type Rotation here you can find information regarding pattern rotation freedom from the ae grain axis on pattern placement on fabric for cutting If checked in the marker the None pattern will be rotated together with all ot
364. oints Thus you can visualize the piece shape changes in real time In SHAPE TOOL working mode you can close automatically a bulge or a fold This function is useful when you need to eliminate the plus from a pattern For example if you need to transform a model with a large silhouette in a model with tight silhouette than you can remove automatically the plus from large model by using Close bulge function For this you must set four points which are determining the plus of fabric Than you have to make click on Close bulge function from SHAPE TOOL working mode and you have to select the points that are determining the area that must be eliminated from pattern After you done to select the indicated area will be eliminated automatically and the remained parts of the piece will be joined in a new piece Attention Even if you need to close a bulge created with Bulge function you have to select four points Because you have only tree points that are determining the bulge you must select the hinge point twice Cursor os AYA E Bulge close To close a fold or a bulge you must press Bulge close button from the Shape tool specific button bar The cursor changes into selection cursor 66 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer You must select four points that are determining the surplus area first point of the first closing line second point of the first the surplus closing line firs
365. oints either horizontally or vertically click S5HIFT In GRADING mode click on the first point for the alignment then hold down SHIFT key and click on the second point for the alignment Click on the arrow button on the right side of the temporary or permanent alignment button A submenu with the X and Y options will appear Thus you can select the alignment direction horizontal or vertical If you have chosen Y the graded sizes are translated to overlap the first point for the alignment then rotated toward the second point and positioned vertically The shape of graded sizes remains unchanged horizontally and vertically 225 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer If you have chosen X the graded sizes are translated to overlap the first point for the alignment then rotated toward the second point and positioned horizontally The shape of graded sizes remains unchanged horizontally and vertically 1 10 11 Point grading on a direction For a fast grading of beveled segments on the piece contour you can use the function for grading a point on a given direction Usually in order to calculate the horizontal and vertical movement for the points on the beveled segments you have to rotate the piece so as the beveled segment will be repositioned horizontally Now with the new function you don t have to rotate the pieces while you can grade a point just by indicating the direction angle and movement
366. oints will be created between selected points To select an auxiliary piece with close contour you have to select two points and the contour between them this because on a close contour you must indicate the direction between the points To select one of the axes dependent line translated contour parallel to contour text axes or grain axes you just have to make click on it when near the selection cursor appear ok After selecting the corresponding range will appear Internal points sequence window and in this window you have to establish the parameters for the sequence In this window you can set the order of the ends for selected element the type of the points that you want to add the offsets for the first and the last point of sequence and the number of points that you need to introduce To set the offset of the first point and of the last point you have to write the offset values in the upper side of the window in the corresponding fields Offset 1 end and Offset 2 end If you will check the message Invert ends you will change the order of placing the points Before choosing how will be place the points you can set the type of points that you need to add internal point button hole pocket hook hole button After this you must choose how the function will accomplish in first mode you must insert the number of points and the distance between them in the second one you must insert only the number of points
367. old down SHIFT key and left click on the first and last file to select all files between them For a random selection you must use the CTRL key instead If the imported DXF files have different size sets only the pieces with different grading groups will be imported How to import in EuroCAD Pattern Designer DXF AAMA file settings After the user press Accept button a new window will open window called Import DXF files Here the user has different options and settings to choose from Settings p Measure units hh ig Scaling 1 td You must select a measurement unit for the saved DXF file together with the scaling factor 317 CAD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Settings Measure units Mh 7 Scaling 171 Jv Import grading rules Import on the internal seam line fv Import internal drawings Reconstruct internal patterns W Rearrange the imported patterns Round the patterns contour Onl curve points J Use margin 0 2 mm Use special rounding algorithm Smooth graded curve points Set points without gradings to curve points Import only base size Switch the sign of the grading rules Set name from annotation field Standard OXF settings Use standard DF format Use pattern reconstruction Use detection margin i mm Auto detect internal elements If the message Import grading rules is unchecked at the DXF file import then each size of a piece will be imp
368. old will be closed clockwise or counterclockwise 154 Dart opening 2 x The bulge type is Dart Unprocessed contour W Automatic creation Smooth contour Folded da f Dart Clockwise Folded dart o Gounter clackwise Bulge iz done with f Angle Distance Bulge settings i El x The bulge type ts Dart Unprocessed contour J Automatic creation Smooth contour eolediaar f Dart f Clockwise Folded dart f Counter clockwise Bulge is done with f Angle fi 0 degrees f Distance Bulge settings ee The bulge type is Dart Unprocessed contour M Automatic creation Smooth contour T f Dart f Clockwise Folded dart e Counterclockwise Bulge is done with i Angle f 0 degrees f Distance If you know the value of the opening angle for the dart you must check the box near the message Angle and must fill in the value Then you must click the Accept button If you know the opening distance for the dart you must check the box near the message Distance then you must fill in the value Then you must click the Accept button For a faster procedure you can dispose of an interactive cursor to modify the dart opening distance By a simple click and drag on this cursor you can change the dart opening and shape Thus you can preview in real time the graphical changes er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designe r 155 as B User manual
369. olumn on dx dy X step or Y step indices All boxes in the column will become green now you can type a new value While typing the new value appears only in the first box After you type the new value press ENTER and the value will appear in all other selected boxes of a column This fast selection is useful for quick modifications of all grading steps as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer d How to increase decrease values by addition subtraction If you want to increase the grading steps between sizes with 4 mm you don t have to recalculate the new value for each step The values in the boxes can be increased decreased automatically upon a specific value First select the boxes to be modified then type the modification amount preceded by for addition and for subtraction for example if a specific box had a 9 value type 3 to obtain a final value of 12 if you type 4 the final value will be 5 This operation is very useful if you want to increase decrease all grading steps with a constant value even if the steps differ from a size to another To add a value to the current 5 0 Fa 8 0 4 i 6 0 Sera one in the selected boxes type 12 0 BFE 17 0 120 the value preceded by double i i z s j eon 16 09 958 16 0 16 0 20 0K 45 6 20 00 45 6 20 0 MEEK To subtract a value from the current one in the selected 8 0 SALA 8 0 5 4 0 boxes type the value 12 0 12 0 12 0 BER preced
370. on Copy piece in clipboard button or press CTRL C 242 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer b of Paste from died Ctrl Open the destination model and click on Paste button The piece will be copied in the new model together with or press CTRL V the corresponding gradings To facilitate the copy process in a new model where there is no size set the program can automatically copy the size set from the original file from which the piece will be copied x The project doesn t have a size set Would you like to copy the size set from the source file If not pieces will be copied without grading w cet If the piece is copied in a model with no defined size set a warning message will be displayed this message announces that the size set in the in the source file will be copied in the destination model To do this you must click on the Yes button The piece will be copied with all its gradings If you don t wish to copy the size set the message announces that the pieces will be copied without their grading To do so you must click on the No button If you click on Cancel button you will cancel the piece copy process When you copy a graded piece from one model to another and these models have different size sets the sizes from those two projects will be combined in accordance with their indexes For each grading table current sizes will be combined with those from the copied
371. on D Digitizing the wholes and the internal points There are many types of internal technical points that you can digitize in EuroCAD Pattern Designer thus you can digitize internal points pocket dart edge and fastener wholes You can digitize these type of points directly by using the pointer if you will use the next keys 3 button for simple internal points 6 button for dart edge point T button for fattener whole 8 button for pocket The simple internal technical points can be digitized by using the sticker For this you must make a click on the o key from the pointer when the pointer is placed on the HOLE button from the digitizing table command area and then make a click using the same key on the internal point The internal technical point type can be changed later from the application in Garment tool mode see 1 9 21 paragraph Directly digitizing the internal technical points Simple internal points Button 3 for interior point Interior point Place the pointer on top of the internal point button hole hook hole etc and then make a click on the 3 key from the pointer 124 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Dart edge point digitizing Place the pointer on top of the dart edge point and then make a click on the 6 button from the pointer Fastener hole digitizing Place the pointer on top of the fastener hole
372. on Smooth contour with Bezier curves button As result all lines will be converted to curves and the point type will be set as SMOOTH POINT 7 aps z Smooth contour with Bezier curves Irregular initial contour Select the points on the Click on Smooth contour The result is an improved segment to be smoothed with Bezier curves shape by converting the button lines to curves and by corner smoothing No point was deleted 57 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 6 17 Bezier interpolation for a part of a piece contour To improve a piece contour formed by many straight segments you can use the segment interpolation command for that specific segment By interpolation the program removes as many interior points as possible from the selected segment the shape is approximated by one or more Bezier curves To interpolate a segment you must select the points on that contour and then click on Interpolate the selected segment button Interpolation can be applied to the entire piece using the Interpolate all piece segments button in PIECE TOOL mode as described in chapter 1 5 21 We recommend this method while only curve points are removed while the graded points remain Bezier interpolation in SHAPE TOOL mode will remove all points curve points or graded points on the selected contour segment that leads to unexpected piece shape changes Interpolation function supposes a shape
373. on the Delete symmetry axis or press the DELETE key To delete a symmetry axis you must click to select it Edit the symmetry axis elete symmetry anis Then click on the button Delete symmetry axis in the lower part of the right side docker or press the DELETE key 1 9 29 Internal elements multiselection In Garment Too mode when it isn t selected any internal element on the right side of the screen appears a window with multiselection functions of internal elements Using these functions it is possible to select one more or all internal elements from a project These elements can be notches all categories dependent lines translated contour parallel contour grain axis symmetry axis internal lines internal points folds darts and pleats Multiselection is obtained by activating each from the folowing functions Notches Distance notch Intersection notch Cornet notch Dependent line Translated contour Parallel E Symmetry axis Function Notches activation allows only the multiselection of the notches from the opened model Function Distance notch activation allows only the multiselection of the distance notches from the opened model Function Percent notch activation allows only the multiselections of the percent notches from the opened model Function Intersection notch activation permits the multiselection only of the intersection notches from th
374. ong the dart cut line The angle for the new dart is the same as the angle assumed from the original piece In this position with the closed dart we can check the dart sewing mode and we can apply the required changes For a correct sewing the dart has to accomplish two conditions 1 The exact same length of the two dart sides 2 The sum of the two angles between the dart sides and the piece contour has to be 180 Thus the piece contour remains continuous after sewing If the two dart edges on the closed dart are not perfectly overlapping we can correct this Overlapping a dart edge point on the other can be done in SHAPE mode drag the point with the mouse and press ALT key The dragged point will be magnetically attracted over the neighbor point and the overlapping is perfect see chapter 1 6 5 151 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Overlap the edges of a temporary closed dart After a temporary dart closure we observe that the two dart sides are unequal during sewing one of the sides remain outward The length can be changed in SHAPE TOOL mode Dart edges can be overlapped by dragging one of them with the mouse over the other For a perfect overlap press ALT key during dragging for a magnetic edge attraction see chapter 1 6 5 After these changes the two dart sides have the same length Thus while sewing the two dart edges will perfectly overlap If the contour shape on the da
375. ontal or both Vertical and horizontal Group name will be introduced in the Group name field If the user doesn t put a name for the group than the application will assign automatically a name formed from the word Group followed by a number Than press OK button To cancel the settings press Cancel button Obs If OK button is pressed before checking the button of group dependency will appear a warning message that a box of dependency group must be checked After pressing OK button the Matching points creation window will close and the application will create automatically matching points These points will respect the alienation dependency made by the user in the window from step 4 Obs Matching points will be always created with the anchor point on the grain axis like will be always placed inside the piece Obs The pieces must have always a grain axis It must have the same orientation and rotation on al selected If the selected pieces don t have grain axis or it doesn t have same orientation or rotation will appear a warning message It will be automatically created a grain axis on the pieces that didn t had one and will reoriented the grain axis for the pieces that don t have it on same direction and rotation warning LULULUmUmCmCC OC Some of the selected pieces don t have a defined grain axis or the grain axis has a different angle comparing to the other pieces IF vou want to continue the prog
376. or Text Notches drawing Axes Seam Line Seam line Cut line and Internal technical points You can chose how will be done the printing and the cutting These option can be set by pressing PEN settings here are two option 341 es B Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer in first section you can set the commands for each PEN the two different types cut or plot can set PEN1 or PEN2 in the second section you can decide the order to export the corresponding drawings for each PEN a check Export corresponding PEN1 drawing for all pieces first if you want to draw first all pieces and then to cut them b check Export corresponding PEN1 drawing for each piece separately if you want to draw and cut each piece separately In this field you can define the maximum size for the text for piece printing If you check this message the field near Piece comment in the PLT export window will be filled with piece name The piece name will be printed on all pieces in the project You can create a plotter list for those who have more than one plotter In this list there will be displayed the plotter name and the save path for the files during direct print To add a plotter in a list you must click on To change the save path for a plotter you must select the plotter in the list you must right click and in the opened menu you must choose the Modify After you have clicked on Modify button the user
377. or changes to selection cursor Click to select the two points that define a contour segment to be translated The segment can be also selected by a Create translated contour click on a contour segment between two grade points After selection the translated contour will be placed at 1 cm to the contour CLICK CLICK Modification of the translated contour distance x Translated contour Properties To set the distance for the translated Distance s 3 contour change the values in the right side menu then click the Apply d Angle egree button The contour will be displaced Percent z correspondently The ediicaion of the translated contour rotation after marked points segment The translated contour can be rotated with a certain angle related to its initial position 144 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer l Translated contour Change the angle values on the right side menu and click on Apply button Rotation pivot position can be i Ange f degree l changed as percent along the po Fropertie Distance cm Percent a i segment between the mark points Shea mene palette In order to cut a pattern after the translated contour the user must select first the translated contour by a Cut over contour click and than select Cut piece over contour After cutting the new pieces Create points are overlapping the original piece they have to b
378. or cut by parallel the program adds automatically the seam allowance over cutting line Operation Change mark points 1 9 21 Finishing types for the seam allowance corners The seam allowance will be bended by treading in different ways After sewing the pieces we can choose different types for finishing the seam allowance corners To change a corner type for the seam allowance in a point enter the GARMENT TOOL mode click on the piece click on Edit seam allowance button click on the corner point to be changed then choose from the list in the upper side menu the corner type 10 Comer typi In GARMENT TOOL mode click on the piece then Edit seam allowance click on Edit seam allowance button Click on the corner point to be changed on the seam allowance click on the corner type list and select the corner type In this example the Next Symmetry corner type was chosen so as by down bending the seam allowance after corner adjustment no corner must stay out of the contour Some finishing corner types for the seam allowance cannot be applied when the angle in the specific contour point is too large or too small These corner types will be automatically replaced by another corner type according to the corresponding angle 177 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Corner types for the seam allowance It is obtained by intersecting the previous and the next s
379. oril Roo MAN SE S oa mM Automatic hil bast comman with model name Load defauit sethngs Oie O lm O O a Accept Quit resolution for the plotter If you click on the small arrow on the right side of the Scale scale field a menu opens In this menu you can choose the scale on which you will print on the plotter The scale can be of 1 1 1 5 5 1 1 10 10 1 1 100 100 1 1 1000 Setting the scale factors is used especially for the fine eoale acios plotter calibration This can be done across or along the paper This calibration procedure can be done directly on the plotter You can choose the print position on the plotter paper left right or centered You can establish the bottom and lateral printing margins Paper type You can choose the paper type for printing The options are role or sheet type According to the paper type you have to set the paper Paper size size If you choose the role paper you have to set only the paper width if you choose the paper sheet you must set both the width and length multiple lines in order not to cross the axis length D When you check this option the technical elements are If your system is endowed with a cutter plotter e g SEI TM7 TM8 able to cut and print at the same time here you can set which PEN type will be used for each line type The two different head types cut and drawing Export HPGL with PEN specification depending on the PEN 1 or PEN 2 can be selected f
380. orized grading rule is just the one from active grading table this rule remain in clipboard and can be transferred later to other point points by pressing CTRL G Select as active one of the four point grading tables of eae v Drop wf spec v Era v the reference point by selecting one of the four activation buttons from toolbar in Grading mode CLICK Select the reference point and press Copy point grading in clipboard button or press CTRL F shortcut Grading rule for active grading table is memorized and can be applied to other point Copy point grading in dipboard Ctrl F CLICK Click on destination point and press Transfer grading from clipboard or CTRL G shortcut to transfer memorized grading rule in this point Transfer grading from dipboard Ctrl 3 216 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Can be observed that grading rule from the point above was copied identical on the point bellow For an accurate result grading rule in this point must be flipped horizontally Note To eliminate horizontal flip can be used Copy grading with X flip button and then Paste grading button Grading rule remain in clipboard and can be transferred to other points Click on next destination point and press Paste grading or CTRL G shortcut CLICK Grading rule was copied in this point Grading rule should be flipped on vertical Note To eliminate vertical flip can
381. orizontal contraction The pattern displayed in the EuroCAD Pattern Designer will show the dimensions without contraction V shrink in the corresponding box of this column you must insert the value for the vertical contraction The pattern displayed in the EuroCAD Pattern Designer will show the dimensions without contraction Auxiliary If a pattern is defined as auxiliary then it will not appear in the this table Auxiliary patterns are used to create the patterns in the project and are saved together However they are not part of the cutting plan for EuroCAD Spread amp Cut Planner and are no placed in the marker in EuroCAD Automarker If you check the corresponding box in this column at the next table opening the pattern will not be displayed H align group the fields in this column gives you information regarding pattern distribution in a horizontal alignment group V align group the fields in this column gives you information regarding pattern distribution in a vertical alignment group To apply any change operated in this table you must click on Accept button If you don t want to apply changes you must click on Cancel button Information in this table can be printed as a file named Pattern Properties To print this file you must click on Print button To preview the file before printing click on Preview button located down the Pattern properties table The document will contain the tab
382. orted separately in EuroCAD If the message Import grading rules is checked then EuroCAD Pattern Designer application will build the grading table When you import DXF files in which for each size corresponds a piece in a file EuroCAD Pattern Designer will automatically convert the piece sizes into grading table Thus after the import there will be no more pieces for each size but only the base size and the corresponding grading For DXF AAMA files you must check the option Import grading rules in order to import the base size with all grading rules If this option is unchecked the result will be represented by the base size only If for the DXF files this option is unchecked or if the gradings cannot be converted the pieces can be imported separately one piece for each size with different grading groups The Import only base size setting is unchecked by default There are a few situations when the dxf file is exported in both ways each piece as a simple size as simple dxf and the base size and grading table in different files as dxf aama file In this case to avoid importing pieces twice check the Import only base size together with the Import grading rules setting The grading will be first recreated using the existing pieces when both above mentioned settings are checked If the recreation succeeds a single piece will be imported with corresponding grading If the recreation doesn t succeeds it will be importe
383. ory from which the element belongs Function activation is done by selecting the right button When a function is active its name appears on a grey fond Multiselection can be done in three different ways Window selection of the zone that Select each element by keeping the eerun a menor elements om contains the elements SHIFT key pressed ME ACUE Ine Ome ale doy USING the key combination CTRL A When are more internal elements of same type selected in the right side of the screen at Properties will appear filled only the fields that have common properties for all selected elements The fields for the properties that are not common will remain unfilled When the button Apply is pressed will be considered only the properties that had values changed In this case for the fields that remain unfilled the values will remain the old one Attention If is selected an interior element different from the one was set all interior elements selected previously will be unselected and the selection type will change on the new interior element the last interior element type selected 196 IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 10 GRADING mode GRADING mode offers the functions needed for grading a model starting from the base size in order to obtain for each size the dimensions for the model specifications or according to standard grading rules To enter this mode you MUST click on the GRADING button
384. ot File MC Guplex x Selected Printer WOORMTABILITS TEWanon MFS200 Series Click the button that shows the disk In the new window that eport Destination Printer appears you will set the saving path for the PDF file Its name C Preview Cancel will be edit in the File name field after that you will press the Save button Format Rave Snapshot File M0 lic etup In the File field it will appear the saving path and file name that will be saved Collate T Duplex Preview File sktop Fisa camase 2 ll alAdobe Acrobat PDF Click the arrow from the Format field in order to choose the file that user wants to save From the following list you will choose Adobe Acrobat PDF Press ok button from Output Options window T Duplex Output Options i x Selected Printer WONT ABILITS TEvanon MFS200 Series eport Destination Printer Preview G Fie sktopiFisa camasa 2 a At ae end will be pressed ok button from Output Options window Duplex 311 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Printed product technical sheet example Printed piece technical sheet example Ce AE Preh Sel Gat Boy a 3 EEH ETE iz Tipi ETE ds Era Va ae H r Sot R DINI E al tad are SE EL eae TATI ee ee a irom i at gies a L Pee be fer ek ered feed ces eh ee DEH Bue h I LEEFH paH T jom eth J Pesan E a ii i H eta a ee ee a Dl Ma
385. ou will digitize after making a click on D key notch internal point internal line axes grading will belong to the auxiliary pattern Make a click on E key from the pointer to end up digitizing an auxiliary pattern According to them contour the auxiliary patterns are of two kinds auxiliary patterns with closed contour auxiliary patterns with opened contour In the Settings window there is a setting called Close auxiliary drawings that can be checked or not depending on the type of the jw Utilizeaza mesajele sonore de confirmare la digitizare auxiliary drawing that you are Cale fisiere sunet digitizare Alege mostly using By default this setting is unchecked Even if in the settings you can check only one type of contour the user can close or open the jw Digitizare automata a curbelor 126 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer pattern contour directly in the digitizing process For example if you haven t checked the Close auxiliary drawings option in the settings and you want to digitize a pattern with the contour closed you will have to click twice on the E key from the pointer Once for ending up the auxiliary pattern digitizing And once for changing the contour type Click on D key from the pointer to start digitizing the auxiliary pattern The auxiliary drawing digitizing will be done in the same way as when you digitize a main pattern by covering th
386. ove along one of the contour segment on which the point is located A point can be moved by left mouse Hold down CTRL key to move the Hold down SHIFT key to move the button click and drag Click on the point only on vertical and horizontal points along the segments on left mouse button over the chosen direction from the starting position which the point is located point move the point to the new position and then release the mouse button If during point movement you hold down ALT key all points near that point will appear enhanced on the workspace and will become magnetic If you move the point near such a magnetic enhanced point it will be attracted and perfectly overlapped over it Magnetizing the points by using ALT key is very useful when you want to realize a perfect overlap of two pieces on the contour Thus you can realize a perfect overlap for two pieces by overlapping the points from the first piece contour with the points on the second piece contour The same magnetization function is available for control point movement that can be overlapped on other control points Hold down ALT for a precise overlap of two points as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer The contour of the two pieces must be perfectly overlapped Move the upper piece by mouse click and drag in order to overlap the correspondent point on the lower piece During the mouse movement hold down ALT key All points available fo
387. ow you must type the profile name you must define the elements to be exported the way the pieces will be multiplied on export and the how the seam lines will be exported On Export selection you must check the elements to be exported in the DXF file text notches auxiliary pieces drill holes symmetrize axes Duplicate patterns settings For the piece multiplication you must check the message one single piece with duplicates number attached if you want to get a single piece with the indicated number of copies Alternatively you must check near the message one pattern for each duplicate if the file will contain one piece for each copy If you will check Add suffix for each pattern variant then the exorted pieces will get a number which can be followed by the indexes FX FY and FXY that represent the position in which are flipped the pieces at DXF export 333 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Stractine settings General General settings DHF file structure settings DHF layer settings E angial aport arhection m Text e Hoche e Akap pattern Profit name Seam linet M Onl holes fe Avis fe Symen Duplicate patherms Pattems mukiplcatoan on fone single patan with duplicates number stlached fone pattem for each duplicate ff dd suiii dor each pattem vanar Match saput mode nol exported Delad sething into axis Espol mode C Seperete paliems f niemal contour
388. pace click on the left mouse button and drag the mouse From the starting point there where you have clicked on the left mouse button to the mouse button release point a rectangle appears If you hold down CTRL key during mouse dragging you will obtain a square To draw a rectangle enter the DRAW TOOL mode and click on Draw rectangle button 103 IC4D User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 29 Digi Pen digitizing In EuroCAD Pattern Designer there is the possibility to convert in electronic form the printed or cut patterns by using the Digi Pen device This device has a work table and a pen To introduce the patterns in EuroCAD Pattern Designer you must copy first the shape WS ici ict of the patterns in a file by using the Digipen device After creating the file that contains the ell IUCN Be shape of patterns you must download it on the computer disk and you have to go on Draw tool from EuroCAD Pattern Designer In Draw tool you must select Digi Pen digitize function When you will click on this button EuroCAD Pattern Designer application will load and interpret the information from the file provided by DigiPen and will generate the patterns To copy the pieces shapes using this device you will have to indicate the points from piece contour The Digipen will generate a file with information about points coordinates type of points notches This file will be copied in a specific folder By default this fo
389. part of the right side upper left point and the X and Y axes origin in the upper left point you docker crosses this origin point All must first select the new point coordinates for the other points were automatically recalculated 1 6 10 Convert a line into curve a curve into line A line segment can be converted into a curve to modify its shape 1 1 E i L 1 4 1 pe 4 s 7 ot a L A Lo 4 wae Select the line to be Click on convert line to The line has been The curve shape can be converted into a curve curve button converted to a curve the modified by moving the control points appear control points A curve segment from the piece contour can be converted into a line The curve shape is lost and between the two points appears a line Select the curve segment to be Click on Convert curve to line Between the two points the curve was converted to a line button converted to a line 1 6 11 Set the point type 53 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer cusp smooth 90 defined cusp defined cusp angles definition restrictions related to neighbor segments P CUSP points Control tangents are mutually independent as angle or length The contour shape in that point can be cusped with no constraint CUSP points can be used between 2 curves between 2 lines and between a line and a curve fp an a a 180 degree Pe a s0 degree th i A
390. per menu Pieces grading can be displayed in two ways Pieces contour is shown with different colors for each size Pieces surface is different colored for each size Note For a single piece can be selected an only mode for display the grading Is possible to switch between modes by choosing the convenient mode Grading display mode To choose display mode for grading click on the arrow next to Show Hide grading button Be Ty If Show contour grading is selected the contour of graded pieces is displayed with different colors for each size If Show grading fill with color is selected the surface of graded pieces is displayed with different colors for each size Note Size selected as base size will be displayed with yellow color default color for a valid piece in EuroCAD Pattern Designer 204 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer If Show grade directions is selected on selected piece in grading points will be displayed arrows pointing in grading direction To hide grading directions deselect Show grade directions option Last four options from Show Hide grading are for displaying grading from the four grading tables grade drop spec and extra For each option selected corresponding g
391. piece grading and also for a model grading In the grading table you will find how a point position is changing from one size to another in order to obtain the proper piece dimensions The point position on the grading sizes can be memorized either as displacement compared the base size or as displacement compared to the previous size A point has four grading tables Grade Drop Spec and Extra These can be defined or not according to the content of Size Set For example if in the size set are defined sizes in the Grade and Drop columns in the point grading table will be displayed only Grade and Drop tables In each point grading table are visible sizes and index but not size combinations At the end after inserting the values and pressing Accept button grading will result from summarize the grading on X and Y from each table for all combined sizes if exists To display the point grading table enter the GRADING mode click on the piece to select it click on the point to select it or click the left mouse button drag to draw a rectangle that will comprise the point to be selected then 205 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer click on the Edit the grading table of the point button in the upper left corner menu The point grading table can be quickly displayed by a right mouse click on a selected point Display the point grading table NATE Edit the grading table of the point SOY g
392. place of work area and make another click By these two clicks the width of spiral is defined The other restrictions of the spiral like spiral height step number of rotations length are drawn considering the current position of the cursor relative to the second clicked point 96 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designe r as you move the cursor closer or away to the second clicked point on the spiral width direction the step of the spiral will be decreased or increased as you move the cursor closer or away to the second clicked point on the spiral height direction the height of the spiral will be decreased or increased If you have a spiral while moving the cursor with the shape you desire make a last click without moving the mouse im Draw Tool Spiral restriction Dimension Height E 952 A Circular spiral Length Constrain t C spirallength number of rotations fo cm fa rotation f Closed Opened To draw a Spiral enter Draw Tool and select Draw spiral function In properties area all spiral restrictions except the spiral type closed or opened should be unchecked for the spiral to be drawn free As you move the cursor closer or away to the second clicked point on the spiral width direction the step of the spiral will be decreased or increased In first situation 1 the spiral is being currently drawn and the cursor of the mouse is closer to the second clicked
393. plit equally for the selected mobile points e g if you selected 3 mobile points the entered value will be divided with 3 and with the resulted value the piece will be bulged in all 3 selected points If the mobile points have different bulge values the values can be entered in the Angle or Distance fields at the same time separated by SPACE character These bulging values has to be entered in the same order you selected the points first selected point will be bulged with first entered value second selected point will be bulged with second entered value In the same setting window you can set the bulge type with unprocessed contour or with smooth contour After setting the bulge parameters click on Accept button Bulge in one point In SHAPE TOOL mode first click on the opening point then press SHIFT key and click on hinge point Then click on Bulge 63 as B Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Bulge settings The bulge type is Unprocessed contour C Smooth contour Bulge is done with Angle fo degrees Bulge settings The bulge type is Unprocessed contour Smooth contour Bulge is done with Angle ft degrees C Distance fo cm The bulge type is Unprocessed contour C Smooth contour Bulge is done with Angle fo degrees Distance fi 0 cm i 2x The bulge type is Unprocessed contour Smooth contour Bulge is done with
394. point the piece shape is changing and the Bezier curve that remains instead the point will approximate inaccurately the previous contour 54 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Pee PESE FRE Delete selected points z PEPI z j To add a new point click on the piece contour where you want to add a new point and then click on Add new point A new point can be added by a mouse double click on the piece contour Adding a new point does not change the piece shape S eps le OA pe le FAY Add new point mem oo Addnewpoit F 1 6 13 Change the Bezier curve shape You can change the Bezier curves shape by moving the control points or by dragging the curve by mouse until you obtain the desired shape When you move a control point by the mouse you can hold down ALT key for the moved point to become magnetized and to perfect overlap on other control points Change a Bezier curve shape by control point movement Click to select a Control points Drag a control point on the line and tangents to point to change end the curves in the the Bezier curve end point are i shape displayed Change a Bezier curve shape by mouse dragging Click to select a curve and drag it by the mouse To get the curve to the desired shape the operation can be repeated by dragging from different points on that curve however there are situations when the shape can be modified ALT only by moving the control points Hold down to
395. point on the spiral width direction Thus the step of spiral is smaller In second situation 2 the drawing of the spiral is finished and the cursor of the mouse is away to the second clicked point on the spiral width direction Thus the step of spiral is bigger As you move the cursor closer or away to the second clicked point on the spiral height direction the height of the spiral will be decreased or increased 97 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 2 Drawing a spiral with restrictions To draw a spiral with restrictions you have to enter in Draw Tool and select Draw spiral function In properties area you have to select the type of the spiral opened or closed Next you have to click with the mouse in the work area with this click the starting point of the spiral is specified After specifying the spiral staring point you can check in properties area the restrictions which are necessary for drawing the desired spiral If for example you want to draw a spiral with a known step and different values for width and height first you have to click on work area to specify the spiral staring point then to check in properties area the options from Dimensions Width and Height and also Step option and enter the desired values of these restrictions in the incident fields After entering the restriction values press Apply button or Enter and go back with the mouse in work area T
396. points Cancel the manual modification for the piece if you wish to cancel manual grading in all manual modify curve points or control points on the selected piece After selecting one of this options the grading of all curve points and control points on the piece which were manually modified will be actualized hay Sa amp feos Cancel the manual modification for points fhe Cancel the manual modification for the piece After selecting one of this If you want to cancel the grading tables of options all curve points and the piece on which you changed the base control points on the piece Piece with the grading changed size form without modify the other piece which was manual modify will manually sizes press Cancel the manually grading for be graded automatically all grading tables and chose one of the proportional with the neighbor displayed options points This grading will replace the manual grading 223 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 10 10 Alignment of the graded sizes Pack in point and pack on the line In GRADING mode the graded sizes can be aligned in different ways without a shape change This alignment is useful to observe how a piece evolves from a size to another by using a fixed point or a fixed line This graded size repositioning from the base size does not create any modification on the graded sizes it only translates them and eventually rotate them to b
397. precisely overlapping on the chosen geometrical points 302 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer To finalize the piece shape you must follow the same steps as for the classic design transform some lines in curves define the angles setting the seam allowance define the grain axis check the pieces etc The patterns obtained by design and anchor to the parametrical layer are automatically graded according to the quotes used in the size set table 303 c4D Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 13 General functions in EuroCAD Pattern Designer Beside design functions that are grouped in specific working modes EuroCAD Pattern Designer offers general functions assigned to the whole model or working mode Editing dependency points Editing the product technical sheets Printing the product and pieces technical sheets Printing the patterns on plotter Import export the models in standard forms Program work settings Verification function for the patterns before cutting Help files The buttons for these functions are located on the button bar in the upper menu these buttons are visible and active in any working mode of the program 1 13 1 Edit dependency groups for the pieces in a model For an efficient marker when the model is designed on striped fabric besides matching points EuroCAD Pattern Designer allows you to define dependencies between pieces Now you will be able to realize an automatic marker
398. quote introduced in the Edit size set ty IC Body height NF of g e T UNU Shoulder angle a LTF Froduct length F 9 LM Sleeve length aa AGSP neck back l nans meas urementine lt the gasu mank aas In this area there are displayed all the quotes introduced by the user in the Edit size set window in GRADING mode and the measurements in the Measurement table The quotes added in the Edit size set window will appear here in green and the measurements in violet To use a measurement for the parametrical design you must fill in the Short column in the Measurement table This column must contain an abbreviation of the measurement name If this abbreviation is not entered then it will not be displayed in the quote list so it cannot be used for the parametrical design The quotes and the measurements could be used easily to edit various functions of the parametrical design by a simple selection or by completing the editing field in the description area with the abbreviation of the selected quote When you drag the mouse over a quote in a list its value for the selected size will be displayed with the current measurement unit 268 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer E Buttons for the geometrical design functions This area contains the buttons for all parametrical design functions When you drag the mouse pointer over a button the associated function name will be displa
399. r a better description of the final product and the technological process To add an image of the final product or a technical drawing in the general information page click on Download image button Choose the file for the piece picture or drawing The file size must be under 500 kb It is recommended that the images are on compressed formats as jpeg jpg gif wmf The images can be provided by a scanner or from drawing software To use the pages with drawings and technical specifications you must first check the Use this page with supplementary information option The drawings and technical specifications pages are divided in 4 quadrants in each of them you can insert text or images Edit the project technical sheets Click on Edit the project technical sheets button in the upper right side menu Product tochaial s nk ai Densa pacediend nimaki 7 During and beck re z Ivarin ged bch spec 3 In the opened window enter the information Pee cnr related to the production in the corresponding fre Sl boxes To add an image of the product file click snuctwrenty PED Banala ewerriey ah on Load image button The user can have a preview of this picture when open the project ae hie 7 In the project technical sheet there is an 3 Attachments field where you can attach any ee type of files The attached files can be visualized F Fennec mickttcthtsce tH anane Only after they are saved ob the hard disk
400. r has a 10 a levels undo system Redo remake last changes Redo recovers If an operation was cancelled by using Undo button you can remake it by a click on last cancelled Redo button EuroCAD Pattern Designer has a 10 levels redo system operation Cid Reference grid To facilitate user dimensional orientation you can display a grid with 10 cm spaced grid Show hide arid lines Click on Show hide grid button to show hide the grid if the button is down then the g grid is displayed if the button is up the grid is hidden In the settings module you can adjust in the distance between the grid lines It is useful to place the pattern origin on a grid line intersection For a fast and accurate alignment of the pattern origin in the grid line intersection click to select the pattern and drag it with the mouse while holding down ALT key the object will remain fixed with the origin in a grid intersection point Pattern name display Each pattern in a project must have a name Pattern name can be set when the pattern is selected in PATTERN mode Sometime displaying all pattern names can be embarrassing thus you can use the Show hide pattern name button that shows hides A the pattern names on the screen Pattern name is displayed together with the centered current size Show hide pattern name Print the project technical sheet In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you can realize documents that contain informat
401. r overlapping and enhanced and become magnetic If you get the moving point close enough to the destination magnetic point the former will be attracted and will realize a perfect overlap The result will be a perfect overlap of the pieces contour Use keyboard 1 6 6 Move a point by the keyboard arrows Se Key ee arrows TO move one or more points using the keyboard arrows you must select the gt points first On each arrow key press UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT the points will move for 10 mm in the specific direction If you hold down CTRL key while to move points by 10mm steps pressing the keyboard arrows then the moving step will be only 1 mm so the in any direction movement will be more precise If you hold down Point movement using the keyboard arrows is very useful for a fast piece shape adjustments At the same time you must watch the measurement table CTRL to reach the needed quotes then the moving step is smaller of only 1mm 1 6 7 Move points by exact coordinates setting a Points Horizontal X axis and vertical Y axis coordinates for each point are nae registered according to the piece origin that is represented by one of the ice a piece points 12 cm When you select a point in Shape tool mode the point coordinates Md a ie from the origin are displayed in the upper part of the right side docker The point can be moved to another coordinates by changing the _Move point with values i
402. r the message Notch the new added notch will be displayed as an X on the piece contour If the option is checked then the notch will be displayed as notch you can choose to consider the darts closed or opened on distance measuring along the seam line by checking or unchecking the box near the message Closed darts if you want a notch to be cut on the cutter you must check the box near the message Cut on CNC machine to validate any change in the properties menu you must click on the Apply button Operations that can be done on the distance notch 1 Change the mark point To change the mark point s for a distance notch first select the piece then the notch In the lower part of the right docker click the Change mark points button The cursor will change to a thick horizontal arrow Move the cursor over the new mark point and click left mouse button Select the piece Click on the notch whose mark point has to be changed The notch and the actual mark point will be selected and turn to red In the lower part of the right docker click on Change mark points The cursor will change to a thick horizontal arrow called selection cursor 133 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Place the cursor over the new desired mark point While the cursor gets over a grade point that may become mark point for the specific notch near the selection cursor appears OK Click on the new
403. r them on the parametrical layer Prepare the size set with the quotes required for design In order to build a pattern by parametrical design the first step is to prepare and input the size set It is important that together with size set definition to declare the required quotes that will be later used for automatic grading of the project To edit a size set please refer to the chapter 1 10 2 Enter quotes for a size set ese p Extra Add a new dimension in the size set Ctrl Ins Dimension name E E Dinvarrsioey nanma chest perim Short neme for dimension max 4 charak Pech Dimension hype E Length tf Angle Edit size set cm Edit size set Dimension step fo e Size name Many grading groups can include the same size V Generate automatically Made to measure size V Use separator Description Size set name Size set description Accept Exit To add quotes on a size set you must click on Add new dimension to the size set button A window opens here you will enter the quote name and its abbreviation Attention t is important to fill in the abbreviation of maximum 4 characters If the abbreviation is not filled in the Accept button remains inactive After filling in the quote name and its abbreviation you must click on Accept button To cancel quote naming click on Cancel button After adding a quote you must insert the va
404. rade rule of modification point is automatic recalculated so that the others set sizes don t change o The new rule of graded point is displayed in the point grading table Obs Passing from a grading point to another on same piece can be done by using TAB key in clock wise direction If during the gradation were selected distant notches it wil be passed to next distance notch If during the gradation were selected various internal elements internal points grain axis text axis will be passed to next gradable element In order to go back to the previous element the user must press the key combination SHIFT TAB Cancel the manual modification You can cancel this kind of grading using the special function Cancel the manually grading for all grading tables This function helps you to chancel the changes that you have made by mooving a curve point or by mooving a control point You cannot cancel the changes that you have made by mooving a graded point To do this you will have to use the undo function from the first tool bar fhe Cancel the manual modification For the piece If you want to cancel the grading tables for the curve points of the piece on which you changed the base size shape without modify the other piece sizes press Cancel the manual modification for grading tables and then select Cancel the manual modification for points if you wish to cancel manual grading just for selected curve
405. rading is displayed In our example is displayed the grading only for drop grading table The contour of the graded pieces is displayed in different colors for each size You can change the colors in the size set window as described previously For each graded point there is a line that follows the point movements from a size to another in order to facilitate the grading observation IMPORTANT In GRADING mode the piece grading is displayed automatically There is no need to click on the Show hide grading button For displaying grading according for a grading table must be checked the corresponding box next to the activation buttons in the Grade toolbox Can be selected the checkbox corresponding to an only table and in this case at selection of piece in Grading mode will be displayed the grading corresponding to the table or can be selected all checkboxes All checkboxes can be selected simultaneous In case when is desired to hide the grading from certain grading tables uncheck the box next to corresponding activation buttons If the piece is not selected by selecting another piece or if you click out of a piece the grading will not be displayed If you want to keep displayed the grading for a piece even if it is not selected you MUST select the piece then click the Show hide grading button 1 10 5 The grading table of a point Grading table of a point is the most important element for a
406. ram will add automatically a grain axis in a horizontally position on the pieces which dont have it and For the other category the program will align the grain axis horizontally Do you want to proceed Yes Ma The grain axis will be created automatically on a 180 degree and if all the pieces don t have same orientation than all the axis than have a different angle than 180 degree will be orientated so it will become 180 degree 188 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 26 The grain axis Any piece designed in EuroCAD Pattern Designer must have a grain axis The grain axis has the following functions Set the sense and direction to place a piece on the lay according to the fabric texture By the coordinates of the starting point the grain axis sets the overlapping point for the material print if you will use textured or printed fabric It is the support for the text that describes the piece name and size To apply the grain axis on a piece enter the GARMENT TOOL mode click on the piece click on the Create grain axis button Click again with the cursor on the piece in the point where you want to set the start for the grain axis then click on the point where ends the grain axis After you have created the axis you will be able to set its rotation length and position by precise coordinates Apply the grain axis In the GARMENT TOOL Click on the piece in the point where you Click on the point wher
407. rametrical layer or the piece layer To display both layers the interactive cursor mix view in the button bar in the Parametrical design mode MUST NOT be placed on or on To get from a layer to another you must click the left mouse button on the cursor and drag toward one of the edges To draw a pattern anchored to the parametrical layer you have two options You can freely draw a pattern whose points will be anchored later on the geometrical layer in the SHAPE TOOL mode 2 You can directly anchor the points on the pattern to the points on the geometrical layer during the design process 289 a IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 12 6 1 Free draw and anchoring the pattern point by point In the DRAW TOOL mode you must click on Draw free or assisted with points and lines button in order to freely draw a pattern that approximately follows the desired shape goo Draw Free or assisted with points and lines b In the SHAPE TOOL mode you must select the pattern point by point For each point of the drawing you must define the geometrical dependence point and you must define the position of the designed point from the dependent geometrical point To do this you must first select the point and in the right side menu at the Point definition you must select the option geom point and in the field under you must enter the name of the geometrical point o
408. rations between patterns if they are not accurately oriented To align a pattern to the grain axis click to select the pattern and click on Align pattern to grain axis horizontally Align pattern to grain axis horizontally inversed Align pattern to grain axis vertically or Align pattern to grain axis vertically inversed button These alignment options are available in a submenu when you click on the small arrow near the Align pattern to grain axis horizontally button If you use to work with the patterns aligned horizontally or vertically to the grain axis you will not need to use each time the alignment button EuroCAD Pattern Designer will remember the last position and settings for the alignment button and for the aligned patterns If you want to align pattern to grain axis horizontally you must click on the small arrow near the alignment button and choose Align pattern to grain axis horizontally in the submenu If you Fy A Align grain axis horizontally h i i i ar Align grain axis horizontally inversed have been used this option previously and the fie ae meca Align grain axis vertically image on the button shows a pattern with a ss Align grain axis vertically inversed horizontal grain axis then you don t need to make the choice from the submenu you can click directly on the button If you want to align pattern to grain axis horizontally but with an inversed grain axis direction you must clic
409. rator This separator can be any character from the keyboard To create the Combined size set press Generate button To abort press Quit button 199 as B LLM ij x The content of the size set will be erased and recreated Do you want to continue x m Edit size set cm E fo Size name Generate automatically Dimension step Edit size set I Many grading groups can include the same size Made to measure size IV Use separator Description Size set name Size set description Accept Exit CLICK to check uncheck size s Edit size set Many grading groups can include the same size o lt JV Generate automatically Dimension step Size name Made to measure size JV Use separator Description Size set name Size set description Accept Exit 21x User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer The user is warned that the existing size set will be erased and replaced by the new one The result is a size set with combined sizes each size from first category combine with each size from second category Size names can be formed by both numbers and letters as you can see in the examples Is important to know that this names are arbitrary different names can be used according to the country or producer Each new size inserted has a color assigned automatically in the Dim
410. rease step the increase step is defined by a line bended under a variable angle this line crosses the segment at a defined distance Create change the step seam allowance width for a segment Corner type width in pair counterclockwise width clocwise width nesan ME defined A 15 cm j cm intersection a an allowance type initial width final width distance angle Es fixe variable step ir cm IE cm jo cm leg degree Click on Edit seam allowance button in GARMENT TOOL mode select the segment to create or change the step seam allowance width In the toolbar for the GARMENT TOOL mode you will find displayed the values for the seam allowance Click on step option and enter the values for initial and final width You must also declare the intersection distance with the segment and the specific intersection angle After you enter the desired values you must press the ENTER key If you click now on Show hide seam allowance button the new values will be displayed 175 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Seam allowance width in a point The seam allowance width in a point can be of two types defined or undefined width For a point with undefined width the seam allowance will be calculated automatically according to the seam allowance of the defined neighbor points For a point with defined width you can set the seam allowance by entering width values clockwise or
411. rent shapes e g the T and Trapeze notches will be imported as U notches in EuroCAD and the user will be warned about this by a warning message 330 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer All problems find during importing files will be displayed separate for each piece in a Warnings window In this window you will be able to display more information about the detected problems and warns about what you will have to check The user has the possibility to sort all problems detected by pieces or by errors If you want to sort the errors by pieces the piece names will be displayed in the Detected problems area followed by all problems detected for the mentioned piece If you want to sort the errors by Errors Problems the problems name will be displayed in the Detected problems area followed by the piece names where the problem was detected All problems detected while importing the exp files can be saved in the Piece information window For this the user must check the Save automatically in Piece information option from the window bottom Import livestronica Warnings Problems have been debeched while imporbing Detected poblans 5 GIBLUZ4 02 01 i Se rabona Gran Anis GIBLU2Z4 05 07 i l matches in invalid postion GIBLUZA 06 01 l matches in invalid position E GIBLUZA 07 07 matches ih invalid postion bnez iii inw lid poston
412. resents a complete set of patterns that will be cut from one or more fabric types and then sewed together to create a product In EuroCAD Pattern Designer program a project represents a file that contain all information about pattern shape on all sizes together with other important information product technical sheet measurement table fabric types size set etc These files are saved on the computer in a file with PAT extension Pattern A pattern is a part of a model it is represented by a contour with a specific shape and technical elements as notches grain axis symmetry axis seam allowance pattern name and other information regarding the pattern etc The pattern contour is formed by points with specific coordinates the points are connected by lines and curves Pattern attributes simple half symmetrical pattern designed on internal seam line pattern designed on the external cut line A pattern can be multiplied in a project by indicating the number of copies for the simple pattern the number of symmetrical doubles on horizontal vertical or horizontal and vertical According to their function in the final product patterns can be classified as follows Simple pattern a pattern that appears only once on the final product as displayed Symmetric half a pattern that will be doubled by symmetrization around an axis just before cutting this type of pattern has a defined symmetry axis that is a contour segment around which the
413. rical and pieces In Piece mode you must select the back piece and click on the back mid point then you must drag to overlap the point P8 of the parametrical design by holding the SHIFT ALT key combination in order to magnetize these points You must anchor next the other points of the piece at the parametrical layer After anchoring on the parametrical design the piece is automatically graded the grading can be displayed or hidden by click on the Show Hide grading button Parametrical design for the waist band Front waist band 1 You must create the point P15 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the side blend point with the front This point is created at a distance x Pt 4 0 2 and y 5 4 cm from the P1 point Pt waist length 2 You must create the point P16 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the mid upper point for the front waistband This point is created at a distance x 0 and y 5 cm from the point P1 3 You must create the point P17 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the lateral upper point for the front waistband This point is created at a distance x Pt 4 2 2 and y 4 9 cm from the point P16 Pt waist length Back waistband 4 You must create the point P18 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the mid upper point for the back waistband Th
414. rnal points internal technical points points who define axes points which marks the intersection between internal axes and pattern contour etc To use this type of advanced magnetizing you must activate the first option from the Advanced magnetizing window If you will keep Ctri Alt key combination pressed when this Normal advanced EY option is active all internal points magnetizing 7 from all patterns will become active The next drawing or repositioning operation can be made using the active points position You must activate the second option from the right side menu of the Advanced magnetize if you want to use this type of magnetizing When this function is active you must insert the two offsets x and y These two offsets can be positive negative or O according to the point s position Offset that you want to obtain After Offset x m filing both fields click on the Apply button gt aa s While this function is active when you will press Ctri Alt key combination all internal points from all model patterns will be active together with the new possible position that they can have according to the offset that you have set The next operation can be applied using the internal points position or the position that they may have according to them offset from the Advanced magnetize If you want to use this function you must activate the third option from the Advanced magnetizing
415. rom another point button and represents the center back point on the hip line This point is created at a distance x 0 and y Ls cm from the point P10 Ls hip length 6 You must create the point P15 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the hip point This point is created at a distance x Ps 4 0 5 and y O cm from the point P14 Ps hip length 7 You must create the point P16 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the first point at the back dart This point is created at a distance x Pt 8 1 and y 0 cm from the point P10 Pt waist length 296 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 8 You must create the point P17 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the second point of the back dart This point is created at a distance x 1 5 and y 0 cm from the point P16 9 You must create the point P18 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the peak of the back dart This point is created at a distance x Pt 8 0 3 and y 9 cm from the point P10 Pt waist length After you have created the points you must display both parametrical and piece layer by using the mix view interactive cursor thus both layers will be displayed In the Piece mode you must select the back piece and click on the back mid point then you must drag to overlap the point P10
416. rom the from the workspace workspace coordinates The first fa i coordinates drawn C Tenet pols es sa o is A point to be drawn us e angle between the new and the previous lines will be only of 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 from the workspace coordinates 83 B er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Keep SHIFT pressed during drawing the arc to constrain the angle between the line defined by the last drawn point and the next one from 15 to 15 degrees related to the prolongation of the previous line defined by the first and the second created point The next point i to be drawn lt 3 DN l First drawn j Last drawn A l point i point Hold down SHIFT key as you draw the line defined by the last drawn point and the next one which complete the arc In this way the line can be rotate only under predefined angles related to the previous line prolongation line defined by the first and the second drawn point The rotation step is of 15 thus the angle will be only of 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 from the line determinate by the first and the second drawn point which helps to create the previous curve Hold down SHIFT as you draw for the next line defined by the second and the third drawn point to be directed under a precise angle from the previous line defined by the first and the second drawn point which defines the first curve Keep Alt key pressed
417. rom the point PA you draw a line that is parallel with the line PB PC on this new created parallel line you draw a new point Pn at a distance D The distance is calculated in the segment PB PC If the a S point PC is identical with the point PA then the new point is placed on the line extension In the near example from the point P3 it was drawn a parallel to the afi line P1 P2 on this line a new point P4 is created at a distance D D MRSS oe Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation From point F3 create a parallel to the line defined by point Pi and P2 and create on The function parameters are Reference point PA this parallel a new point P4 at 20 em a a the points that define the line between PB and PC the distance D between the point PA and PN 17 Point at intersection L aF You can draw a point at the intersection between the lines PA PB and PC PD a i In the near example the point P5 was placed at the intersection between P1 iii R JE P2 and P3 P4 i Pt Function parameters i Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point F19 at the intersection of the line defined by points P14 and FiS and The function parameters are the line defined by points Pl and Pils the points PA and PB that define the fist line the points PC and PD that define the second line 280 18 19 caD User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Poin
418. rt closure is not accurate the program allows either a manual shape change or a precise angles input so as the sum will be 180 This operation can be done in SHAPE mode see chapter 1 6 11 Finishing the sewing contour for a temporary closed dart f After temporary dart closure and overlapping dart edges the contour line is broken in the dart closure This contour line can be adjusted in SHAPE TOOL mode either by changing the Bezier curves shape After these changes the contour shape is continuous and smooth at the dart closure point see chapter 1 6 12 or by other changes that lead to a continuous contour point After checking and adjusting the dart can be reopened as follows select the dart click in the dart list on the newest opened dart the original dart has 0 degrees because it is closed while the new dart has assumed the angle of the original dart and click on Close dart button The temporary dart is now closed and the original dart is reopened at the same initial angle ATTENTION if during this operation instead reopening the original dart a new dart is created cancel the operation by click on UNDO button modify the check for rotation type from clockwise to anti clockwise re select the dart to be closed and click again on Close dart button 152 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Reopen a dart that is temporary closed for a check To reop
419. rt points were selected EuroCAD Pattern Designer marks the dart by circling the three points The dart cut line is marked This line represents the piece cleavage line for a new dart if current dart is closed or diminished Dart end points There are many possible operations for a defined dart These operations have two purposes to check the dart for a perfect edge overlapping regarding the sewing step and to insure a smooth contour the second purpose is to modify the dart by creating a new derived dart transforming the dart to fold or cutting the piece over the dart line 150 es User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 10 Check the piece temporary dart closure checking and adjusting of edges overlapping length reopening a dart To check and adjust the dart appearance after sewing the dart can be temporarily closed by opening another dart For temporary closure of a dart Select the dart set a 0 angle in the specific box on the right side menu then click on Rotate dart button The original dart will be closed and its angle will be reallocated to a new dart The new dart is obtained by cleavage over the cut line simulating the dart sewing Temporary dart closure In GARMENT TOOL mode click on piece to select it then click on the dart peak When the cursor is over the dart and the dart can be selected by clicking on it near the cursor appears DART Click on the dart to select it When
420. rul file 5a 5 ETA Ti Load multiple grading rules in a single file To load a multiple grading rules from a file for multiple selected points you must take care that the number of selected points must equal the number of saved grading rules the point selection order must correspond to the save order for the grading rules To load multiple grading rules saved in a file you must click the button Load and apply the grading rule file This button can be accessed from the button bar specific for GRADING mode or on the button bar in the grading table In the opened window you must select the file that contain the grading rules In the lower part of the window there is a description area for the file In this area you can find information as number of grading rules tables number of sizes per set size list selection type chain selection yes no and the grading tables To preview the grading tables in the file you must click on the buttons Prev table or Next table The tables will be loaded in the selected points in the order of point selection Between these buttons you can see the number of the displayed table from the total number of tables e g 2 3 means that you have displayed table no 2 from the 3 tables saved in the selected file After checking the tables saved into the file you must click on Accept button to load them 210 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Apply grading rule E
421. rve to the selected pattern cece ccc cece cece e nee e eee eeneeeeeeees 1 7 DRAW TOOL mode 1 7 1 Introduction Free drawing IC4D 1 7 3 1 7 4 1 7 5 PEGEL Co NI oO NI N N 1 7 9 1 7 10 1 7 11 1 7 12 1 7 13 1 7 14 1 7 15 1 7 16 1 7 17 1 7 18 1 7 19 1 7 20 1 7 21 1 7 22 1 7 23 1 7 24 1 7 25 1 7 26 1 7 27 1 7 28 1 7 29 ERECECECOGRECEEEEECEGEEE Econ User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Continue to draw a piece Use CTRL SHIFT and ALT keys for free drawing Draw a line using quotes and precise dimensions Draw with coercion to the next line Draw with coercion to the next point Draw curves Draw free or assisted with points and curves Use CTRL SHIFT and ALT keys for drawing free the curves Draw a curve using quotes and precise dimensions Draw a curve by constraining to the next line Draw a curve by constraining to the next point Add a French curve to a pattern Draw are DY IhV CS DOWNS accccsuesrencavndondoeassdadewdeueucuesenGundansssesietomenmdscamesetreanceeads Use CTRL SHIFT ALT keys to draw freely an arc by 3 points Draw arc by three points using precise quotas and dimensions cceeceeeeeeee Draw arc through three points by constraining to the next line Draw arc by three points by constrain to the next point Draw arc by two points and radius cccce cece cece eee cence eee ee eaee ee enaeeee
422. ry fast The results are instantly displayed You can grade multiple points simultaneously from keyboard arrows This method can be used together with the measurement table the watcher see chapter 1 11 MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode for a perfect match on all graded sizes for all pieces to be seam together 220 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 10 9 Modification of one size without modifying the other set sizes In the Grading Tool mode you can modify one size without modifying the other piece sizes In order to do that the size that will be modified must be set as base size and than can be pressed the Modify the shape f the piece on the base size without changing the other sizes button As long as this button is pressed the size can be modify exactly like in Shape Tool mode The piece shape can be changed by dragging with the mouse from the grading points curve points control points A precise modification of the piece shape can be done by using the keyboard arrows All the curve points and control points will not actualize automatic the grading table They will keep the grade table The modification of point position in Grade Tool mode can be done in the next way CTRL select and drag free with your mouse for coerce move only horizontally or vertically Keyboard arrow move point left right up down from centimeter to centimeter CTRL keyboard arrow move the point left right up do
423. s function works only as an automatic calculator for the X step and Y step values based on the applied geometrical transformations When you reopen the grading table for a graded point by this function the table will not keep any information that indicates the usage of this method the opened table is identical with any point with XY grading 1 10 12 Change the base size The base size is displayed filled with the base color The base size can be changed with any of the other sizes without any effective change of the size dimensions This way you will be able to modify the piece shape by working on different sizes You can also make marry and measurements verifications on each graded size To change the base size enter the GRADING mode and check the preferred base size in the right side menu The pieces will be displayed by the selected base size For the combined set sizes the base size can be changed on each set size Grade Drop Spec and Extra If the set size doesn t contain all the combined sizes when it is checked a base size will be unchecked the sizes that if would be checked would generate a size that is not checked in current checked set size or which it doesn t exist in the complete size set Under the set size it is a icon that gives information about the last base size used Attention If the base size is changed and afterward the user accrues to the last base size used the icon that shows the last base size used will not ch
424. s represented by the segment defined by the points PA and PB The circle C1 was defined by the diameter represented by the segment between the points P1 and P2 Function parameters D escription of the selected geometrical operation Create a new circle C3 having as diameter the segment defined by points P40 and P4e The function parameters are the point PA circle center the point PB on the contour 31 Circle defined by three points a You draw a new circle CN that crosses through PA PB and PC The circle C1 crosses through the points P1 P2 and P3 m E Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new circle Cl passing through the points F40 P42 and P43 The function parameters are the points PA PB and PC on the circle contour 286 32 33 ie B Circle defined by center and circumference o You draw a new circle CN with the center in the point PA and the circumference CIRC In the near example the circle C1 was defined with the center in the point P1 and with circumference CIRC User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new circle Ce having as center point F40 and a circumference of 23 cm The function parameters are The point PA that is the circle center The circle circumference CIRC Circle defined by contour points and radius You draw a new circle C
425. s reproducing the curve shape EuroCAD Pattern Designer has a unique useful function that transforms these imperfect curves formed by segments into perfectly smoothed curves called Bezier curves These Bezier curves can be easily modified to correct or change the pattern shape and insures a higher quality reproduction of the curved shapes IMPORTANT by interpolation the point number on a curve is reduced almost to zero reducing the space occupied by the project in the computer memory WARNING Do NOT apply the interpolation more than once on a pattern If you repeat the interpolations the original pattern shape may be seriously altered After digitizing the contour is formed by By interpolation the intermediate points straight lines that are inaccurately disappear and the curves become approximating a curve smoothed and precise Click on Button to interpolate pattern by Bezier curves 39 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 5 25 Pattern color change You can change the color for each pattern This operation is very useful for a project with many patterns made from various fabric types For example patterns for lining can be colored different from the cloth patterns making them easy to identify and manipulate To change a pattern color you must first select the pattern then click on Change pattern color button In the opened window you can choose a color after click on a color click on OK bu
426. s to the control point and a curve end curves on the 7 drag to modify point end points will curve shape be displayed 1 6 3 Select a point select multiple points select a segment 48 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer To select a point or segments on a pattern contour you must enter first in Shape tool mode and click on a pattern with the left mouse button The pattern will be selected While in Pattern mode you can simultaneously select multiple patterns in Shape tool mode you can only select a single pattern To select a point click on it with the left mouse button To select multiple point consecutively hold down the SHIFT key and then click on each of the multiple points to be selected To select multiple points simultaneously surround them by a click and drag a virtual rectangle around them with the left mouse button To select a segment or a curve on the pattern perimeter left click on the contour line Hold down SHIFT to select or deselect points one by one by clicking the left mouse button CLICK Unselected point Selected point Unselected curve Selected curve When the mouse cursor have get over a point and this one can be selected the point is marked by a red circle in order to confirm that the point is under the cursor action area Then you can realize the point selection and movement 1 6 4 Moving a point A pattern shape can be modified by changing
427. s window you can also export files in RS274D format when you click on the Export RS274D button these export files will have the CUT extension PLT files PLT files can have various extensions as plt hpgl or without extension These files can be used only to print markers or pieces A piece shape cannot be changed from such a file If the file contains a marker you cannot modify or change this marker When you print a HPGL PLT file you must check the piece dimensions together with their length and width If you click on Direct plot button you will obtain a PLT file that will be saved in the ACTIVE directory from which it will be automatically read by the EuroCAD PlotMaster application If you click on Export PLT button you can also obtain a PLT file that can be saved anywhere on the hard disk and that can be printed later or on another plotter 315 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer CUT or RS274D files CUT files can have the cut or gbr extension These files can be used only for automatic cutting machines or for printing CUT files for cutting machine contain only the cut line and the notches A piece shape cannot be changed from such a file If the file contains a marker you cannot modify or change this marker If you cut or print a CUT file you must check the piece dimensions together with their length and width 1 13 5 DXF Gerber Assyst Lectra or Investronica file type import a
428. sa map Measured distances are displayed with red color EEE The distance measured on the base size is displayed on black background while the distances measured for the other sizes are displayed on 248 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer white background If the model has many sizes measurements the current table will not be able to show all in the sizes in the upper side of the screen In order to see all the sizes measurements on the edge of the table click left mouse button depending of the situation in the right or left side in order to role all the size measurements For a faster view of all the sizes measurement keep pressed left mouse button and the sizes will role continually How to decrease one measurement from another measurement Click on the Measure perimeter button or on the Measure distance between click two points button from MEASURE AND CHECK TOO mode Click on the first point to start the distance measuring Move the cursor and click on the final point or notch to measure the distance click During cursor movement on the upper side menu there are displayed the distance from the starting point the horizontal and vertical displacement Will be automaticaly calculated and displayed in the upper menu the distances for all graded sizes ALT SHIFT click kT Hold SHIFT ALT keys pressed and click on the point to start the measurement that must be added to the preview
429. saved on disk for further usage in grading another model In the Save window type a name for the file that will represent the size set Save in 9 lucru man gradare Edit size set cm File name m Save the current size set F3 If you saved the file representing the size set you may re load the required set at any time To load a saved size set click on the Load a size set button in the Edit size set window or press F2 key ATTENTION by loading a size set no piece grading is loaded Only the list with size names and the quotes with the dimensions on sizes is loaded if they were previously m a E t saved Pall a i Load a size set F2 C oe 1 10 3 How to grade a point in EuroCAD Pattern Designer In EuroCAD Pattern Designer there are three grading modes for a point geometrical grading XY grading derived grading Point linked to the parametrical layer The point linked to the parametrical layer is defined on the base size on horizontal or vertical from a specific point on the parametrical layer On any size this point evolves after the parametrical point position A point linked to the parametrical layer has an only grading table Grade because in Made to measure mode cannot be obtained a grading with combined sizes XY grading This point has a position defined by horizontal and vertical coordinates from the system origin on the base size then using this position as ref
430. set the length and angle according to system coordinates or to a previous line Set properties for next line Or B For the next point you draw you will be able to set the X and Y coordinates according to piece origin or to the last point Set properties for next point A Draw a curve by constraining to the next line For a computer assisted drawing based on the parameters of the next line you must check the next line option in the right side menu Set properties for After you check this option the specific option boxes are activated and you can enter the length and angle for the next line which defines the curve that will be drawn Set the length for the segment defined by the first and the last point from the curve that will be Set the angle for the segment defined by the first and the last point from the curve that will be drawn Set properties for 7 next line O next point Le W Angle 23 Angle i Absolute degrees To the previous line Length fo cm Apply Check Angle then type the angle value and press ENTER If the angle is set according to system coordinates you must check Absolute while if the drawn Set properties for 0 nest line nest point Line Angle degrees f Absolute To the previous line J Length fi 35 cm Length App Check Length then type the length value and press ENTER When you go back with the Cursor on
431. sign line and the export settings regarding the contours the DXF files will include pieces according to the following tables Jf Export seam lines 332 IC4AD Us er manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Export for pieces designed on the seam line Cut line DXF separate pieces for each size on the cut line the Seam line exported pieces will include the seam line as auxiliary piece DXF AAMA graded pieces Seam line DXF separate pieces for each size on the seam line DXF AAMA graded pieces corresponding to the seam line Cut line DXF separate pieces for each size on the cut line DXF AAMA pieces will be exported on the seam line with the corresponding gradings Export for the pieces designed on the cut line The Export Seam line option is inactive s Check on export Resulted pieces Cut line DXF separate pieces for each size on the cut line DXF AAMA graded pieces To validate and to visualize the export settings you must always click on Apply button Attention If the exported file contains pieces designed on the cut line together with pieces designed on the seam line on the export step only the Export cut lines will be active DXF file profiles DXF profile There are many DXF file types according to the CAD j system that generates the file or depending on the general New profile user settings during the export step While these files are destined to be loaded als
432. size if you check this message only the piece size will be printed with the pieces Text added to piece name The text entered in this field will be displayed and printed together with the piece name Text added to piece name Jail jacket Export settings If Motches w Anes Only text for test axis w Internal points wv Cut line Seam line 314 A Unfolded folds w Synimetized lt 1 lt 1 lt 1 4 41 lt 1 lt 1 41 w Ausilary pece DCAD User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Notches if you check this message the notches will be printed Axes if you check this option all axes on the pieces will be printed grain axis text axis Only text for text axis if you check this message the text from the text axis will be displayed and printed without the corresponding axes If not checked the axes and the corresponding text will be printed only if the Axes message is checked Internal points if you check this option the internal technical points will be printed Cut line if you check this option the pieces will be printed on the cut line Seam line if the pieces to be printed are designed on the cut line this option is invalid if you check this option the piece will be printed on the seam line Unfolded folds if you check this option the pieces with folds will be displayed and printed unfolded Symmetrized if you check this option the symmetrical pieces
433. size will be automatically checked in Size name Many grading groups can include the same size V Generate automatically the Grou p 1 colum n as ma ki ng pa rt J7 Made to measure size Use separator from the current size set Description Size set name shirt size set Size set men clasic shirt description Accept Exit 4 xL Mew drop size l New Spec size New extra size Drop name Spec name Extra name Grade index Grade index m Drop index 40 Drop index i Drop index Grade index Spec index Spec index Spec index Estra index Extra index Extra index Ok Cancel K To have a complex size set you need to have grade sizes plus at least one type from the other grading types Drop sizes Spec sizes or Extra sizes Before adding a new size the user must click on the special size name to activate it For e g if you want to add a Drop size and you don t have this type of sizes in the size set yet make a click on the Drop button Before activating this button has a grey background and after activating it will be displayed on a blue background and it will have hook next to its name In this moment you can add a drop size When adding one of the special sizes the program will combine this size with the already existing size and it will generate new combined sizes as you will be able to see in the picture below 233 as B User manual EuroCAD Pa
434. sor appears a small menu in which mouse button on a free row in the watcher you must click on Add measurement compose option Measurement table cm Measurement table cm gefuseerd e a I No Curent measwemerlshon 44146 kie 5 54 l Ea 25 l Sl 275 28 21 22 23 23 5 24 5 21 i 9 2 i 5 21 5 21 5 21 1 05 band 81 ag 97 101 105 30 A f Subplancket 35 35 35 35 35 135 71 140 71 145 717 150 1 155 71 160 71 165 71 6 Man Troud I 135 71 140 71 145 71 150 71 155 71 160 71 165 71 Measurement expression ri 412413414415 Measurement expression fri 412413414415 In the table appears a new row colored in light blue To display values on this row you have to establish the equation In Measurement expression field in the lower After calculating and adding the measurement compose part of the table you will insert the calculus formula After you can insert the measurement name then press the you have inserted the calculus formula press ENTER ENTER key key and thus the new values will be automatically displayed on the row with measurement compose If you made a compose measurement with SHIFT increase or ALT SHIFT decrease and you want to add this measure in the watcher you must click with the right mouse button on a free row Near the mouse cursor appears a small menu in which you must click on Add measurement option In watcher will be added the simple measurements plus the compose measurement with the corre
435. sor is over an axis that can be used to create an intersection notch near the cursor appears OK Click on the contour of the piece When the cursor is over the contour that can be used to create an intersection notch near the cursor appears OK The intersection notch will be created at the intersection between the enlarged interior axis and selected contour If the internal line used to create the intersection notch is graded the notch will be created for each size according to the axis grading 138 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer intersection notch Type Notch Length fi cm Angle 260 degrees f Aligned angle Relative angle f Absolute angle W Notch f Cut on CNC machine Apply Operations Transtorm to paint Delete notch Edit intersection notch properties The properties menu for the intersection notch includes the following information the horizontal and vertical coordinates from the piece origin You cannot edit these coordinates the notch type can have the V or U shape outside or inside and also the shape inside the notch length notch width for V and U type Initially the intersection notch is aligned to the defined line However the angle under it will be placed from the seam line can be expressed as relative or absolute angle from the system coordinates To set the notch placement angle you must choose one of the options Aligned angle
436. sponding formula Add a measurement already compose in the watcher Measurement table cm Measurement table cm No Curent measwemerfShot a4 as eo so sz 5 l aa a A 25 255 26 26 5 27 275 28 es i 21 21 5 23 23 5 24 5 21 5 21 5 2 5 21 521 52l 5 21 181 85 gg 93 97 101 105 Load names Save names Measurement table cm a pepeni ii i E H 26 26 5 7 275 28 i 25 i 27 28 215 a 225 23 235 24 21 5 B 5 23 24 521 E 527 52 521 5 21 3 f 5 21 l 5 21 pa 93 97 101 105 AA band 81 3 97 105 Subplancket 35 i 35 35 35 6 Man Troud 135 71 140 71 145 71 150 71 155 71 160 71 165 71 Measurement expression r r2 r3 r4 r5 In the table will be automatically insert many rows with After adding the measurement compose you can simple measurements and another row colored in light insert the measurement name then press the ENTER 254 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer blue The compose measurement added is already key completed with corresponding formula in the free field from Measurement expression in accordance with the used keys SHIFT or ALT SHIFT This compose measurements will be added starting with the last row 1 11 9 Display increase differences from a size to another and quotes from table To check the grade or to calculate very easy the grade quotes you can visualize the increased differences from a size to another in the watcher These are calculated and automatically displayed if
437. st to update indexes see chapter 1 10 2 244 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 11 MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode gives you the possibility to R Measure the distance between two points on a straight line or along the sewing line Measure and Check Tool Binding or overlapping two pieces on the selected points Notch translation from a contour segment to another Area and angle measurement for different pieces To enter this mode click on MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL button This working mode provides 6 different functions for checking and measuring each of them with different cursors After you click on MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL button you will enter directly in the distance measurement function between the two points on the piece perimeter the cursor is 1 11 1 Distance measurement between two points on the piece perimeter To measure the distance of a piece perimeter enter the MEASURE AND CHECK TOOL mode and click on Measure perimeter button in Click to select the piece to be measured le Click on the start measurement point Follow the piece contour clockwise and click on the final point for the measurement The measured distance is displayed in the upper part of the screen either for the base size or for the graded sizes If you measure the distance starting from a point going along the contour and ending in the same initial point you will obtain the perimet
438. sualization and modification in the same table SHAPE TOOL mode Introduction What is a Bezier Curve o ccccccccccecccecccccccccccececccecececesctrssssresiusceusueeeeeececesececsecerererees Select a point select multiple points select a segment User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Moving a point Moving a point by mouse drag use ALT CTRL or SHIFT Move a point by the keyboard ArrOWS ccccceccecseuseeseerevereesesersesseneevnrevsnesaeeats Move points by exact coordinates setting Point properties Set pattern origin in a point 1 6 10 Convert a line into curve a curve into line BEIT I Sette POM LV DE sassinoro eemieed saandantacaubeeentoedmudeoatondet cusp smooth 90 defined cusp defined cusp angles defining restrictions related to neighbor segments Add new point delete a point 1 6 13 Change the Bezier curve shape 1 6 14 Point alignment vertical horizontal rectilinear Divide a segment in a given number of parts Smoothing a part of the pattern contour by Bezier curves Bezier interpolation for a part of a pattern contour Change a point status curve point or grade point 1 6 19 Open Close a pattern perimeter 1 6 20 Change Bezier curve length 1 6 21 Round a corner 1 6 22 Create a new point at a given distance from a selected point Rotate a group of points around a point Bulge Closing a bulge 1 6 27 Fullness 1 6 28 Add a French cu
439. t POT To display the grading table click Left mouse click to select on the Edit the grading table of the point the point button or right mouse click on the selected point The grading table of a point is displayed Switching from one grading table to another for a point In point grading table on first toolbar is located the menu O W at Se lie abn spie ate obese oh for the four tables grade drop spec and extra as Spec Extra At opening of point grading table will be active only the Group Beier Hindes latias inder Patios index Plates inden ator grading tables according to the size set If in the size set has size combinations for Grade and Drop in the point grading table will be active only Grade and Drop tables Also there is a correspondence between activation buttons from Grade toolbox and active table at opening point grading table if in Grade toolbox is pressed Grade button at opening of point grading table the active table will be Grade table if the Drop button is pressed at opening of point grading table active table will be Drop table Also is a correspondence between activation buttons from Grade toolbox and active table at opening og m EE point grading table if in Ei Grade toolbox is pressed mm TF Drop button at opening of pan s point grading table active Fle wie table will be Drop Table aut a
440. t at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x C s 1 2 1 5 and y 0 from the point P2 This point delimitates the front piece from the back piece on the MRR hip line eS er P6 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x 0 and y 21 from the point P5 P6 is the point that helps building the curves on the waist line P7 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x 2 5 and y 21 from the point P5 P7 represents the lateral front point from the waist line P8 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x 2 5 and y 21 from the point P5 P8 represents the lateral back point from the waist line P9 is designed by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x C t 4 and y 0 from the point P1 The point P9 represents the peak of the first dart on the front piece P10 designed by a click on the point in the middle of a segment This is created at the middle of the segment defined by the points P9 and P7 This point represents the peak of the second dart on the front piece P11 point created by a click on the point at XY from another point button This point is created at a distance x 0 and y 13 25 from the point P11 The point
441. t base sizes In EuroCAD Pattern Designer the designer can set for a model four categories of sizes More then that the program calculates automatically combination of sizes from those four categories resulting a combined Size Set The designer that uses EuroCAD Pattern Designer can load different predefined size sets that are included in the original distribution You can also define your own size set either as simple name list or more elaborated by adding dimensions with precise values for each size on the set these dimensions can be useful later in the design step Generally a new user of the EuroCAD Pattern Designer program will create some sets of sizes will save them on the hard disk and will use them for the most part of the designed models A user will rarely need to create a new size set To edit the size set of a model enter the GRADING mode and click on the Edit size button on the upper left corner menu Edit size set 197 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Edit size set cm NEW SIZE SET Example of a new size set that contains only the base size 3 To have a useful set size you may develop your ar Dimension step g i a Etse a aie own size set by adding sizes names and quotes Many grading groups can include the same size Generate automatically You may alternatively load an already saved size set We lanes See from a specific location computer hard disk CD
442. t can be done using this function are the following create change distance change mark points cut piece with a parallel to the contour create points on the intersection of the parallel to the contour with the piece contour and deleting the parallel to the contour Create parallel to the contour To create a parallel to the contour first click on the Create a parallel to the contour button This operation cursor i o gt ra ee r is available in GARMENT TOOL mode The cursor changes to selection cursor Click to select the two points E the contour that define a parallel to the contour The segment can be also selected by a click on a contour segment between its two ends CLICK In the upper example the parallel to the contour was created by click on two mark points In the left side example the parallel was created by selection of a contour segment After the parallel is created it is automatically placed at 10 mm from the piece contour atalia To set the distance between the parallel and the piece contour change n the values in the right side menu then A e click on Apply button The line will be moved correspondingly K ml ti pelos The piece can be cut in two or more Change mark points separate parts over the parallel to the contour First click on the parallel to Cubover parallel select it and then click on the Cut r l over parallel After cutting the new __ Create poin
443. t enter the GRADING mode 19 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Grading Size adjustment for each pattern in order to fit the size specifications of each size is an operation called GRADING To grade a project you have to individually grade each pattern in it To grade a pattern you must grade all significant points on its contour these points are called Grade points Grading a point point grading rule means to establish the coordinates for the point movement between sizes these coordinates are mentioned in the so called grading table You can set grading by setting the increase step from a size to another and by setting the total modifications from the base size The points with no grading are called simple points and are automatically graded by EuroCAD Pattern Designer according to neighbor graded points Grading can be done manually or automatically by applying the grading rules created and previously saved on the computer The points can be set as graded points or simple points in GRADING mode 1 4 The workspace what you need to know before starting a project Beside design grading and checking knowledge you will need basic knowledge on computer work open and save the projects undo operation mistakes display the patterns in a project page orientation Project Fie Shape Crew Gemet Gaig Check Settings indore Hap MENU RAR Og w t aaja H 7 APY SRT agaee lad
444. t is opened at the same initial angle by rotating a part of the piece See the dart before check with unequal sides and the broken See the dart after check and adjustments with sewing contour on the dart closure equal sides and a continuous sewing contour 153 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 11 Automatically create a dart using 4 points You can automatically create a dart using 4 points The 4 points used for the automatic dart creation can be used as follows One point for dart opening Two points used as hinges on dart opening These points are called fixed points A technical interior point that determines the depth and the direction of the dart To create such a dart you must click the Create dart using 4 points in GARMENT TOOL mode A dart created by this procedure must be checked and adjusted in order to fulfill the two conditions that define a dart see chapter 1 9 9 wR Create dart using 4 points Er Fl dart opening po The bulge type ts Dart Unprocessed contour V Automatic creation f Smooth contour E i Dart f Elockwise Folded dart Counterclockwise Bulge is done with jo degrees To automatically create a dart using 4 points you must first click on the Create dart using 4 points The cursor will change to point 7 selection cursor On the bottom bar you can m find the explanations for each point to be selected cursor The first point
445. t menson step Size nam Many grading groups can include the same size W Generate automatically Cai r e a alm lm lm ot alm m m 2 M M eM L Made to measure size W Use separator Description Size set name Size set description 1 10 16 Delete a size set from an existing size set In GRADING mode you can delete a size from a set that is already graded By deleting a size from an existing size set none of the existing gradings will be lost To delete a size from an already graded project in GRADING mode you must click on Edit size set button In the Edit size set window you will have to make a click on the size that you want to delete and then use the Delete the selected size from the size set button If you want to delete a size from a size set that is already graded enter the GRADING mode and click on Edit size set button 236 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Edit size set cm eee Delete the selected size from the size set Cutts a In Edit size set window select the size and then click on Delete a size at the beginning or ending of an existing size set button The selected size will be Saar En deleted from the size set without affecting ae Dimension step 0 e Edse i BA the other sizes Size name i After deleting all desired sizes click on Many grading groups
446. t on the perpendicular line on a line with given angle j APS You can draw a point P3 in the near example on the perpendicular on a line that is on placed at a defined angle from that perpendicular Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point F20 representing the dart edge with angle 30 created on the The function parameters are perpendicular line from point F19 on the the line angle the point to raise the perpendicular the points that define the line on which the perpendicular is raised line defined by points P1is and P14 on the lerr o Side Edge point of the dart angle lt lt You can draw a new point PN that represents the end edge of a dart that starts in the point PA the peak in the point PB and the angle U to the left or right In the near example in the point P1 you must draw a line at the angle U from the line P1 P2 on the left right side on choice You draw a point PN on this line so U as the distance P3 P2 to be equal with the distance P1 P2 po Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new piont Pel representing the dart edge beginning in point P9 having its peak The function parameters are PA the dart beginning edge in point FiS and the angle 20 on the the point PB the dart peak _left side the dart angle U left right option 281 20 B Two circles tangent points
447. t point of the second closing line and second point of the second closing line area After you select those four points the area between them will be eliminated and the remained parts of the piece will be joined in a new piece 1 6 27 Fullness In SHAPE TOOL mode you can change a piece by bending two of its edges from which one is bulged on a defined distance This function is very useful to design a waist band a belt a collar etc To realize this type of bulging you may use the following elements a segment on a line or on a curve on which you will apply the bulge process following bulging this segment will bend a segment on a line or on a curve that will be transformed to a curve but keeps the same initial length a segment on a line or on a curve that remain fixed To bulge a edge on a piece you must click on the Cursor Fullness button on the button bar in the SHAPE TOOL mode The mouse cursor will change into selection cursor You must select the edge to be lengthened This edge will bend following the bulging process You must move the mouse cursor over this edge and click on it while it becomes red and the OK appears near the cursor beck on the edge to be bend without lemghtening Then you must select the side to be bend without being lengthened You must move the mouse cursor over this edge and click on it while it becomes red and the OK appears near the cursor 67 es B Us
448. t the region from which you will copy the notches 261 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer On the first piece click on the mark point where the contour region chosen for notches transfer starts Click on the point that ends the region chosen for notches transfer Click on the contour of the piece where the notches will be copied between the two selected points The notches on the selected contour are extracted by the program by calculating the distance from the selection start point The you get the second piece the destination for the notch transfer Click on the starting point for notches translation Click on the ending point for the region destined to notches translation Click on the piece contour where the notches must be copied The program will automatically copy the notches from the region selected on the first piece and apply them on the selected contour on the second piece The notches on the second piece will be placed at the same distances from the first selection point Matching notches transfer between two contour segments CLICK Click on the mark point where the contour region chosen for notches transfer starts Click on the starting point for notches translation CLICK Click on the point that ends the region chosen for notches transfer CLICK Click on the ending point for the region destined to notches translation Click on the contour of the piece where the notches will
449. t the same time the Symmetry half option is automatically checked in the properties list of the piece If a piece has a declared symmetry axis and the Symmetry half option is checked you can display the complete symmetrized piece by definitive symmetrization of the original piece see chapters 1 5 7 si 1 5 8 Temporary symmetrization and definitive symmetrization o G E EJ If the piece is displayed symmetrized any change in the p Original piece will be applied on its show hide symmetrical piece twin The symmetrical piece can be In PIECE mode click to select the hidden by another click on the piece then click on Show hide Show hide symmetrical piece symmetrical piece button i button 193 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer A new piece is obtained by symmetrization of the original piece Symmetrize in a new piece This new piece has no symmetry properties changes on this piece will In PIECE mode click to select the not be automatically applied to the piece then click on Symmetrize in a original piece new piece button The properties menu for the symmetry axis Symmetry axis Proprietie To notches on piece You can choose to automatically add the notches that will mark the position for the symmetry axis If you don t want to create the notches you must uncheck the message Add notches on piece In this menu you
450. t to cancel the multi bulge operation The cursor of the 64 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer mouse changes to selection cursor Next you have to select the mobile and hinge points in the following way select first mobile breaking points point select first hinge point le 3 5 then select the second mobile a H point and the second hinge point as o then continue selecting the next Select the breaking point mobile points and hinge points the same way until the last mobile and hinge point the selection order in the given Ede example is from 1 to 4 After selecting all mobile and hinge points press the Apply button from the message window After you click on Bulge 41 button the Bulge settings TEDI irai window opens Here you can set Unprocessed contour if the bulge is done by an angle or a distance from the hinge Smooth contour point and if the bulge type is RET unprocessed or smoothed For TE as the unprocessed bulge type the Lee g ee contour between the selected points will be a line For the smoothed bulge type the contour between the selected points will be a Bezier curve Bulge settings Unprocessed contour So If you want to bulge with a certain angle check the Angle option If you enter one value this value will be splitted to all selected points 1 If the mobile points have different bulge values the values can be z
451. t will appear the user must enter the certain percentage that will give the position of the new pint and than button Accept must be pressed The distance is measured on the contour line always in cock wise This function doesn t allow to be introduced negative values In order to change the direction of adding the new point the selection must be done again but in reversed way Percert to ihe new crested pont Select the points from Press Create a new Enter the percentage that will give The new point was created at the which will be created the point at a certain the position of the new point given percentage measured on 6 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer new point Selection can percentage between e Negative values can t be entered the contour line be done by selection selected points window or by keeping pressed SHIFT key and click each point 1 6 23 Rotate a group of points around a point One or more points can be rotated around another point at a specific angle To perform this operation first select the points to be rotated then hold down SHIFT key and click to select the point for rotation Then click on Rotate a group of points around the last selected point button A small window opens here you must enter the rotation angle for the selected points then click on OK button If the angle value is positive the rotation will be clockwise if the angle value is ne
452. te frame ait E Save prolle The digitizing profiles can be of two FIESTAS ten types loaded from file or internal Cunerit peo ix EuroCAD Mred Bea ite The internal digitizer profile is used Serial put Load profile for the Calcomp binary digitizers The profiles loaded from files The Digitizer fast acce profiles loaded from files are FF The digtizer has a Burocad sliekas fer fast Iunctions Set sieker destined for the ASCII digitizers To set the sticker postion for fastBuncead Funsctions Push the 1 bution of the digitizer There are 4 predefined profiles on the top of the START button then push the third post of HOLE CalcompLectra pd Calcomp Investronica pd EuroCADWired pd and Numonics pd However you can edit save and create a new profile m Ute conlimalion couche messages at dighzing Sound files digitization path E 2009VEurecadPattemDesigner Sounda Browse by the buttons in the Settings Digitizer frame If you have performed changes in the digitizer settings and you want to get back to the default settings you must click on the Load settings Load defauil selbngs Qut button in the lower left part of the frame 129 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer The digitizer profile comprises profile info digitizer size point button codes and the settings for the serial communication port Edit digitizer profile Profile miicoemation Paint buttons cades Profile infor
453. ter to validate the given dimension When the cursor returns in the work space the segment length defined by the first and the second point which defines the next drawn arc will be constrained to given dimension The next point to be drawn will slide along the circle with a radius equal with the segment length p ii Ca z ii p Next point i 7 to be drawn N gt New segment length First drawn point Check both settings Angle and Length and complete the corresponding fields with the desired values for the segment defined by the first and second point which determinates the next drawn arc Because the angle and the length are defined it means that next segment implicit the next point is completely fixed Click on Apply button to draw the next point or return the cursor in the workspace in this case the point will be placed into a fixed position and you can make a click to create it Next point to be drawn Next segment rn length i a oe aN First drawn point 89 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 17 Draw arc by two points and radius by constraining to the next point Check the next point option from the right side menu to draw assisted by computer constraining to the next point When the next point setting is checked the fields where you can complete the x and y coordinates becomes active In this case the coordinates related to
454. tern Designer Select the first peak point of the fold Select the second peak point of the fold Select the first bottom pont of the current told the first peak point of the next fold Select the second bottom point of the current fold the second peak point of the next fold After selecting it the user must press Apply button The folds are completely declared and folding line become all visible 172 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 19 Straighten a piece Click on Click on In order to unfold a pattern the user must select Pattern tool mode Pieces with folds can be straightened as follows temporarily in order to be checked or definitively by creating a new piece To to show the to definitively temporary straighten a piece click to select the piece then press temporary straighten the piece Show hide straighten fold This button remains pressed while straightened piece in anew one the piece is shown straightened No change to the piece can be done at this time On straightening in the folding points of the material the program adds notches automatically Same way it can be used the function that unfolds definitively the pattern Folded piece Temporary straighten piece The piece is temporary or definitively straightened in a new piece The temporary piece cannot be modified It is displayed only for checking The new piece obtained by definitively straig
455. tersection points of this line with the pattern outline Each part will be digitized separately Following digitization the pattern parts are connected by Assembly see chapter 1 11 3 and are combined using Join pieces in a new piece see chapter 1 5 16 119 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer as B 1 8 3 How to use chord pointer buttons to digitize a piece H LON ANV i LNIOd savao XILNANDAYS GalddV SLNIOd SANND LNIOd JAANO Pa LNIOd LYVLS 1NIOd 3QAV J9 LYVLS NOLLNG LYVLS NO A919 NdasaLlivd JHL ONIZILISIG 340434 a LNIOd JAANO H LON ANV o LNIOd SAYND 7 4 LNIOd IVOINHOAL YOMMSLNI QO O 200 LNIOd dallddV SXV NIVEO NO MONO LSY Juv aaa ON x O00000 0000 OY LNIOd Ein LNIOd garon LNIOd Javyo LNIOd ANAND cilia GayyvVNN LSV1T OoOO o oo 120 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 8 4 Digitize a piece grading The pieces can be digitized together with their grading To digitize a piece grading first you must insert the size set If the size set contains mode grading bases before starting the digitization you must select the size group that corresponds to the piece to be digitized To digitize a graded piece you must follow the same steps required to digitize a piece without grading however for the grading that corresponds to the main points you must click on the
456. th and rotation for the specific technical element You can also set the precise coordinates for the point on the piece according to the original point of the piece e Fe Create technical interior point Apply an internal point to a piece In GARMENT TOOL mode click Click on the Create interior Click again on the piece there where in a piece to select it technical point button the internal point will de placed 179 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Select an internal point in order to be cut at cutting machine In order to cut an internal point at cutting machine must be followed the steps nee ng mac tennnnnnenn Delete intemal point Click on the internal point and check the Drill on the cutting machine box If the user don t want to cut the internal point than the Drill on the cutting machine box must be unchecked Set the parameters for an internal point technical element type position length rotation Example create a 12 cm width pocket Internal point Internal point Internal point Internal point Internal point Propertie Propertie Propertie Properties CLICK Type Internal point zl Ty pel Internal point T ype Pocket r Ty pe Pocket x p x TE ne Position _2nternal points list P Internal point x 8 59 em Xx Button hole Y 2 2 cm ai Length f2 cm Length f cm Length f cm Angle ma degrees Angle 360 degrees Angle
457. that define the line from which the parallel will be drawn the distance D left right option Attention To avoid confusions try first both variants then choose the correct direction 283 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point P32 at 3 cm on the tangent in point Pes to the circle Cl in the clockwise direction The function parameters are the circle CA the point PA the distance D to be measured on the tangent clockwise counterclockwise option 25 Point the center of a circle 26 amp You can draw a new point PN in the center of a circle CA ul The point P3 was placed in the center of the circle C1 Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point F33 in the center of the Circle Cl The function parameters are the circle CA Segment between two points e You can build a segment between two points PA and PB In the near example between the points P1 and P2 a segment was drawn Function parameters Fi Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new segment between points P40 and Paz The function parameters are the points that define the segment 284 28 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 27 Line between two points a n You can draw a line defined by two points PA and PB A line is defined by
458. the abbreviation for that quote then you must press the Enter key 2 you may click on the space marked by a red line where you want to input the quote and then you must select from the quote list area the desired quote then you must press the Enter key Attention The quotes used to edit a parameter must be of the same type with the parameters required for the geometrical operation For example if you are using an angle quote for a length type parameter you will be warned by a message that appears under the field that edits the parameters of the selected function Distance between two points The parameters for the design functions can be expressed as distance between two points You must select the space marked by red line where you want to enter the distance then you must edit the points name separated by commas and between square brackets The points name between which the distance will be calculated can be entered by selecting them from the script area E g the distance between two points P1 and P2 will be edited as follows P1 P2 If you want to display the distance between two points you must drag the mouse pointer over that parameter in the function and the value will be automatically displayed in a message Formulas The parameters in a function can be edited as complex formulas that may contain values quotes or distances between points To edit a formula you must use the brackets If you drag the mouse pointer over a
459. the message Distance then you must fill in the value Then you must click the Accept button For a faster procedure you can dispose of an interactive cursor to modify the dart opening distance By a simple click and drag on this cursor you can change the dart opening and shape Thus you can preview in real time the graphical changes A dart opening can be moved in another contour region or can be distributed on many smaller darts by rotating the dart To rotate a dart switch on the GARMENT TOOL mode click on the piece to select it then on the piece peak On the right side menu click in the dart list on the dart to be rotated In the box over the dart list enter the new angle value then click on Rotate dart The piece will be cleaved over the dart cut line and a new dart will appear The new dart assumes the angle difference of the original piece For a complete closure of the original dart instead of Rotate dart click on Close dart The dart will be completely closed by rotation up to 0 degrees and union of the edge points 157 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Dart rotation 1 Dart Properties Angle 178 7 degrees Operations Edit cut line Rotation type Clockwise C Anti clockwise Dart 0 178 7 bs CLICK Rotate dart Close dart Cut over dart Transform to folded dart Delete dart Dart Properties Angle 23 degrees Operations
460. the previous line Length i crm Apply Check the Angle setting and then fill with the angle value the corresponding field Press Enter after completing the angle Check the Absolute setting if the angle is defined related to the workspace coordinates When the cursor returns in the work space the line determinate by the first and the second drawn point which defines the current drawn curve will be constrained according to the given angle and the next point to be drawn slides along this direction Setting the length for the next segment defined by the first and the second drawn point of the current drawn arc Set properties fo f next line O next point fo degrees f Absolute To the previous line W Length fi 35 cm Apply Check the Length setting and then fill with the desired dimension for length the corresponding filed After this press Enter to validate the given dimension When the cursor returns in the work space the segment length defined by the first and the second drawn arc point will be constrained according to the inserted length The point that follows to be drawn next slides along a circle with the same radius Set properties fo f nest line at point Setting the length and the angle for the next segment defined by the first and the second drawn points of the current drawn arc Set properties fo f next line next point Lin W Angle 30 degrees
461. the sequence After selecting the corresponding range will appear Internal points sequence window and in this window you have to establish the parameters for the sequence You can set the order of the ends for selected element the type of the points that you want to add the offsets for the first and the last point of sequence and the number of points that you need to introduce In the next example it will be introduced the necessary parameters to create the signs for button holes on a front Shirt pattern the first button will be placed at a distance of 2 cm from top of the neck hole To obtain this you must introduced in the edit of Offset 1st end the value 2 It will be introduced 6 button holes at a distance of 10 centimeters For this you must introduce on Number of points the value 6 and on Distance between points edit the value 10 cm To create the internal points sequence must press Ok button if you dont want any more to create the sequence of internal points press Cancel button The program will create automatically the point sequence according the settings 1 The range can be deleted and on the piece will remain the created points 2 182 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 24 Declare a piece origin in an interior technical point In GARMENT TOOL mode a piece origin can be declared in a interior technical point You must select the interior technical po
462. the workspace Keep Space key pressed to transform the cursor shape into a little hand When the cursor has this shape you can move the work space by mouse drag Pattern duplication Copy cut paste To copy a pattern in the same project or between two projects you must use CUT or COPY and PASTE commands Usefully the operation order is as follows Click to select a pattern Click on COPY button the pattern is copied and temporary placed in a computer memory area called Clipboard If you want to copy the pattern in the same project click on PASTE button pattern is extracted from the computer memory and placed visibly in the same project If you want to copy the pattern in another model after copy you must open the other project and then to click on PASTE button Ep 1 a Select the pattern 2 Click on COPY button 3 Click on PASTE button E By using COPY button the original pattern is kept and a new pattern is created this new pattern is identical to the original pattern If you copy a pattern from a model to another and you want to copy the grading too the destination model must contain the same size set as in the original project see chapter 1 10 17 GRADING If you copy the pattern in the same project the copied pattern will be displayed initially overlapped on the original pattern and must be moved in order to avoid confusions If instead of COPY button you are using CUT button the original pattern is deleted and after c
463. this points will be equal distributed on the selected range After introducing necessary information in the Internal point sequence window you must press OK button The program will create automatically the point sequence according the settings If you don t want any more to create the sequence of internal points press Cancel button After the Internal points sequence was created the range can be removed the auxiliary piece can be detached from the main piece and the internal axes can be deleted Attention If the internal line or the auxiliary piece that give the sequence range of the points is graded the created internal points will take over this grading It is recommended to check the new technical points grading To create a internal points sequence you must enter in the Garment tool mode and you must select the piece You must press Create a sequence of internal points een button from the specific tool bar The cursor changes into selection cursor Create a sequence of internal points 181 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Internal points sequence Offset Ist end Offset 2rd end fo m fo m Internal point type Button hole Choi f Number of points with a specific distance between Number of points fe Distance beweer poinfi 0 em Number of points equally distributed Humiber of points fo You must select the internal line that gave the range to create
464. this points will be set as not graded cusp points mode 2 Pairs of points as X1 Y1 and X2 Y2 should be a even number of points The points must be declared in the same order as in mode 1 All this points should overlap over points from mode 1 If the pair of points will overlap than all the contour points between X1 Y1 and X2 Y2 will become smooth points The points that will not overlap will be ignored mode 3 Grading points as at the mode 2 the points must be overlapped over contour points The contour points become grading points when these are overlapping mode 4 Notches any graded point can be the notch mark point The notches are generated according default settings from EuroCAD Pattern Designer settings length width and type mode 5 Grain axes In this mode you have to define two ending points for the grain axes If there are more than 2 points only the first 2 points will be considered All the others will be ignored mode 6 Internal points in this mode the user will define the internal points mode 7 Darts it must be selected sequences of tree points which represent the begin the peak and the end of a dart These points must overlap on grading points from piece contour Before starting to use the Digi Pen device you must check the settings from EuroCAD Pattern Designer settings Digitizing tab 104 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer General Design Technical Co
465. ting options for product technical sheet for all pieces and for technical sheets of the selected pieces All technical sheets can be printed if you click on the upper main menu on Project and then on Print technical sheets in the opened submenu Then click on the sheet type and the Output Option window will be opened In ths window you can choose to print to preview or to save the technical sheets in PDF format Print project and piece technical sheets Print product technical sheet Print piece technical sheet Print pieces technical sheet CLICK To print the technical sheet click on Print project technical sheet button directly on the printer symbol To print the pieces technical sheets click on the small symbol on the right side of the Print project technical sheet button A small menu opens in which you can select three printing options for product technical sheet for all pieces and for technical sheets of the selected pieces QW git 4 rrp Print report Ctrl P TI WE ra Me AF Ec eS Cape el eek ee a Erare le eem eel seri SH al i4a rr E Exit viewer To preview the technical sheets In the preview window the technical If the technical sheet is correct before printing click on the upper main menu on Project and then on Print technical sheets in the opened submenu sheet appears identical to the printed form You can use the upper buttons to zoom in out the im
466. tions that can be done by the digitizer pointer For each of these actions you can use a different button on the pointer these buttons differs from one digitizer to another Thus you can define these button actions for each profile The 6 button actions that can be defined are digitize a graded point digitize a curve point digitize a notch digitize an internal point digitize grading and exit digitization Serial communication port settings Here you can define the parameters for the serial communication port number of bits per second data bits parity and number of stop bits 130 IC4D User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 9 GARMENT TOOL mode If EuroCAD Pattern Designer will contain the PIECE TOOL SHAPE TOOL and DIGITIZE modes then it cannot be defined as apparel industry CAD software while it has nothing specific for this domain The GARMENT TOOL mode comprises the specific functions for working with technical elements that are specific for apparel industry notches darts symmetry axis grain axis different inner technical points the seam allowance parallels on outline free axis and text axis etc All these elements are filling the drawing and the final piece ready for output To enter this mode click on GARMENT TOOL a i m s 1G ment Tool The cursor on the screen is a BjGan id F 1 9 1 Introduction In GARMENT TOOL mode the user can perform the following
467. ton on the right side of the temporary or permanent alignment button A submenu with the X and Y options will appear Thus you can select the alignment direction horizontal or vertical If you have chosen Y then the graded sizes will be translated to overlap vertically on the selected point The shape of the graded sizes remains unchanged vertically but was cancelled horizontally 224 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer If you have chosen X then the graded sizes will be translated to overlap horizontally on the selected point The shape of the graded sizes remains unchanged horizontally but was cancelled vertically Align permanently graded sizes to selected points The graded sizes are translated to overlap in the first point for alignment then rotated on a direction given by the second alignment point The shape of the graded sizes remains the same and the rotation angle is low Click on the first point for the alignment 1 Then hold down the SHIFT key and click on the second point for the alignment Click on the temporary alignment button or on the permanent alignment button If the alignment is done on a single point the graded sizes will be translated only for overlapping in that point If the alignment is done in two points the sizes will be translated AND rotated to overlap the first point and rotation direction toward the second point to be the same on all pieces Align graded sizes on two p
468. tour color Here you can select the contour color For this must check Implicit color or Fill color If Implicit color setting is checked the contour default fill color color will be the black and you won t be able to change it If you check the Fill color setting the contour color will be the same with the color set on Filling color for new pieces setting Interface colors Here you can change the color for labels and panels buttons and Color for labels editable controls For this click on the present color choose another default grey one and then click on OK to apply the new color Color for buttons default grey Color for editable controls default white Default colors When you want to return to the default colors press the Default colors button 340 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer e Settings for plotter printing oe Al Riesoluhorr Scale 7 fine TA Lett i Canti i Aigh Seale factors Paper ype Paper ae Lirit Across fioo fe peed Yidi 30 cm Botton j cm Along nooo sheet Lert jan om i Laberat fo cm l Export HPGL wih PEN spechcat n depending on the de Te PENT Dut line PENI F Hoiches F EM Seam re PENI Eat PENI mema pame PENI Add Delete plotter Print settings fi Split kext on mulipke rows Detali TEE fe Double imemak at pining Text b
469. ts pieces are overlapping the original D piece they have to be moved to be elete parallel seen separately Operation Change mark points Cut over parallel The mark points for a parallel to a contour can be changed Click on Change mark points button on the right side menu and then click on the Create paints first then on the second new mark point Delete parallel 147 as m User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer CLICK CLICK Create points at the intersection of the parallel to the contour with the piece contour Cut over parallel Create points Create points at the intersection with piece To create points on the intersection of a parallel to the contour with piece contour first click on the parallel to the contour to select it then the click on Create points button on the menu on the right side menu The points will appear automatically there where the parallel to the contour intersects the piece contour Delete the parallel to the contour Operation Chan ee To delete a parallel to the contour you ge mark points i must select the contour and then click Cut over parallel on the Delete parallel button in the 7 menu in the right side docker Instead teate poms you can press the Del key on the pelete parallel keyboard Differences between the translated contour and the parallel to the contour Translated contour Does not respect the exact dist
470. ts N The points between you want to place the division points 27 11 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Point on the perpendicular You can draw a new point PN at a distance D from the point PA on the perpendicular from this point to the line defined by the points PB and PC Thus you have defined the point P4 at a distance D form the point P3 on the D perpendicular from the point P4 to the line determined by P1 and P2 Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point P4 at 10 em from point The function parameters are F3 on the perpendicular from this point to The distance D rhe line denned by eins Pi and P l The point from which you calculate the Sead J distance The points that define the line on which the perpendicular is built 12 Point on the median line j PS You can draw a new point PN at a distance D on the normal line of the segment defined by points PA and PB A new point P3 is draw at a distance D on the normal line on the segment D defined by the P1 and P2 points The distance is calculated on the left side of the segment as looking from the first point toward the second point Function parameters _ ght Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point F19 at 5 ecm on the median line of the segment defined by points F15 The function parameters are the points that define the segment the distance D between the n
471. ttern Designer SLE 40 M gt SS XLE 40 L LE 40 LAXSS 4LE 40S LE 40S SS MLE Combined sizes Edit size set Many grading groups can include the same size M Generate automatically Made to measure size W Use separator After adding all desired sizes click on Accept button to save the last changes in the size set In this moment a warning window message appears on the screen This message informs you that new gradings will appear in the gradings table and asks for confirmation if to continue or not Click on Yes button if you want to continue and No to quit The new introduced sizes will be displayed in the right side menu Grading for the new sizes will appear near the existing grading and will have the grading step of the last size in the present set The grading steps for the intermediary sizes will be calculated proportionally according to the index of the new size 234 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Edit size set cm SIZES Grup 42 5 4652856 42 505 AME 42 5 455 44LE 42S AM SE 42 5 45M ASLE 42 5 A5L XSE 42 5 sl eME 42 5 4L ALE 427M 785 SE 42vM 485 ASME oe amp ot he ot abe Drop Spec Growi PN vcs bfai odon Besos Flato finder amp Edit size set k click Many grading groups can include the same size Made to measure size Dimension step fo
472. tton Basic colors Eel See Click on lols iol H EEEn TEE EERE EI cre tt oe in i a ae the color Custom colors Define Custom Colors gt gt a 1 5 26 The automatic creation of matching points In Piece tool mode the user can create automatically matching points using Click on the Create automatically matching points function To apply this function you must proceed like this arrange the patterns in the je sewing position select the patterns for which you want to create matching points and then apply the function for the selected patterns A new window will open on the screen after applying the function In this window you can choose the group dependency type horizontal or vertical and you can also type a name for this group Button to activate the Create automatically matching points function 40 es B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 5 27 Change a pattern name Fiece name platea Click on Fabric type Fabric to apply the pattern Rotation restrictor name fico o Flip restrictions E one Rotate entire bundle Modification Piece properties Pattern name appear in the product technical sheet in EuroCAD Spread amp Cut Planner program for planning the cutting operation in EuroCAD Automarker for marker planning Pattern name is printed on the plotter on each pattern together with the size This is why
473. two sizes the step will be wider or narrower The movement steps for Step X and Step Y can be changed to grade that point at will Any change of the grading steps in columns Step X and Step Y will induce the automatic recalculation of the movements from the base size dx and dy Reversely if you modify the dx and dy values the values for Step X The point position movement from the base size in X and Y axis is memorized on dx and dy columns The values in dx and dy columns can be changed by the user in order to modify the point grading The dl column is calculated automatically and represents the total distance between the position of the graded point and its position on the case size 207 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer and Step Y will be modified automatically Most frequently grading is the result of grading steps description that is obtained by editing the Step X and Step Y columns The advantage of this method is that if you want to change a grading step between two sizes the next sizes will be moved correspondently to the base size you don t have to make any manual modification Edit grading table Grade Drop Spec Exita o aw ap Kaeo vae at a O ATTENTION For the geometrical grading or for the derived grading the point grading E table cannot be edited a as 02 151075 o oze The grading rule can be visualized and saved AAA 2 28 93227 0 75 ON 0 78 on the disk see chapter 1 10 6 e
474. ty of the drawing from a pattern to another and is not necessary the drawing to be placed on a certain position A When the user wants to have the printed shape on a certain location on the garment For instance if the model has two parts termination and top the fabric is stamped with flowers and if you need the front flower to be continued on the two parts you must look for an accurate application of the matching points The face with the two parts P En ail E e The fabric for the designed model 183 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer How to place the flower on the model front To obtain such a model you must follow some steps 1 Choose an arbitrary matching point on the fabric for the flower fabric example you will choose the point where the stalk starts marked in red below 2 Match a piece on the fabric and look where the matching point is placed for the given example look for the place where the stalk starts on the front termination part By placing the matching point on the fabric face you will be able to set the coordinates of the matching point 184 as User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Xf Internal point M Properties Type Matching point j Internal point__ To add more matching points you must first add the interior technical points as described in chapter van 1 9 21 Packet Click on the interior technical point then in the right x _
475. type client command etc This information can be entered by accessing Project menu and the Edit product technical sheet submenu Check the selected patterns Show hide grading Show hide measurement Show hide distances on the patterns ail Edit patterns dependency groups Change the selection mode internal or contour L Edit product technical sheet Check the selected pieces B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Before finishing a project you must check the patterns If you click on the button Check the selected patterns the EuroCAD Pattern Designer program will automatically check the designed patterns and will display the check results see chapter 1 12 9 Check patterns ready to cut After you check the designed pattern you can make an automatically check for the patterns Check patterns ready to cut You must click on the button Check patterns ready to cut in order to check ready to cut automatically the patterns on the cut line for all sizes in the size set The results will be displayed in an Assistance window see chapter 1 12 8 m What is this When you click on this button in the toolbar you can open the help files associated to the current active state of EuroCAD Pattern Designer program You can obtain the same result by a click on Help in the Menu Bar and then selecting 7 the What is this option k After you click on this butto
476. u can decide to i Internal drawings Rearrange piece import all internal drawings these Import all internal drawings Reanangs automaticaly inponed pisces drawings can be selected for grain axis iF Granaris ae symmetry axis text line technical points Iv Symmetry axis import directly pieces with its own doubling settings interna figures mark lines or other internal MV Text line multiply pieces according to the original model drawings For the imported pieces arrangement you can choose an automatic rearrangement of the imported pieces Free lines Other internal drawings JV Internal points JV Internal figures In EuroCAD the pieces can be simple double or double mirror while in Assyst the 324 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer pieces can be multiple symmetrized horizontally vertically or both Thus you may choose either a direct piece import with the specific doubling options or to multiply pieces according to the specifications in the original project If you choose import directly pieces with their own doubling settings at file import you must define the piece type as simple double double mirrored in order to keep their number and position Example if in Assyst a piece was defined as triple with horizontal f according to deiautnotch settings in symmetry in EuroCAD this piece will be imported twice the first piece will iam ima lll 5 aca have the doub
477. u must define the left or right direction Attention To avoid confusions try first both variants then choose the correct direction If the reference points are already defined you may hold down the SHIFT key and click the left mouse button at the current position the DA and DB values and the placement are assigned from the screen and applied automatically in the operation text Dart edge point lt j You must draw a new point PN that represents the dart edge end that has the edge beginning in the point PA the peak in the point PB and the width D either on the left or right side The dart width must be a positive number and must not overpass the double of the distance between the points PA and PB The point P3 that represents the edge end was defined at a distance D from the point P1 and the distance P1 P2 equals the distance P2 P3 P2 219 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation Create a new point P42e representing the dart To draw aa point by this function you must a assign the following parameters Sega Bee a aH pelts Se eee eee eae the point PA the first dart edge beginning in point Peal and the width 4 cm oan the the point PB the dart peak _ieft side the distance D dart width left right option Attention To avoid confusions try first both variants then choose the correct direction Point on a parallel line F
478. ups can include the same size Generate automatically Made to measure size J Use separator various sizes this will be mentioned while importing the model in EuroCAD Spread amp Cut Planner application m 1 et multiple grading bases thus you will be able to eliminate Description Size set name Size set description Accept Exit 1 10 14 Change the grading group for a piece To change a grading group for a piece grading group from the right side menu Sizes CommonGrading kd Commontrading base40 based enter the GRADING mode click to select the piece then choose the eee Sizes based basei ag CommonGrading Commonbrading base40 basze40 hazed In the list with grading groups with different bases you can find the grading groups inserted in the size set and also a common set that contain all sizes When you move a piece from one grading group to another the base size of that piece is changed and the size list is active only for the sizes allocated to the specific group When a piece is moved from a com When a piece is moved from one partial the base size of the new group is not pa new size mon grading group to a partial one its size will be transferred correctly grading group to another its size cannot be recalculated accurately while rt of the old grading group Thus the piece cannot be graded to reach the 230 as User manual EuroCA
479. us function from Draw tool mode After activating this function make a click in the work area to draw a new point After this move the cursor in the place where you want to create the Draw arc by points and radius second point and make a click to create it A curve will be drawn between the two points and then move the cursor in the place where you want to create the next point and make a click there The third point will be placed on the arc between the first two points This point will give the arc depth The result is an arc defined by two points and a radius click lt 7 click Make a click on the Draw Make a click in Move the cursor to Move the cursor into arc by two points and radius the work area to the next point position the third point position button create the firs point and make a click to and make a click to which defines the create it An arc will be create it This point will arc drawn between the first give you the arc depth and the second created point Make a right click to end up drawing the arc and the piece contour will remain opened Select another function from the second tool bar in Draw tool mode to continue drawing the piece with no interruption The new function will keep the mouse cursor linked to the last drawn point and you can apply it 1 7 14 Use CTRL ALT keys to draw freely an arc by 2 points and radius To draw more precise an arc you can use the CTR
480. ust Lectra files vet iba choose the first option in the list h euE CE AAMA files dxf DXF AAMA dxf files After amp oe bee DEF TAUOCAD R 12 2000 fes selecting the file type it will open a small window similar to those that opens for PAT files Explore the folder list up to you get the file to be opened In the central window appears the file list in the selected folder Click on the file to be opened If you have selected the correct file in the right side window will be displayed the project content To open the selected project click on Accept button If the file content is not correct on screen appears Invalid file message together with a list of the encountered problems in the selected file 316 aes User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer import DXF files EA a Fom pA Erse ebs i Ehia Dea oe EHE ae o Fie DMF ASMA bel nl I Set pout eathout gradings bo cunee poids Sooke fia Inport onks base size FF lmpat gracing mules 7 Seach the agn of Bre gracing rules Set nes From maon fos T Facai nbena paiere Stand OF pating Fe Almanarege thar impotad pats Uber shandised OCF Format l Aligund the potters contour D Ube pattern reponstuction E Chk cree pinti PO Use detention naga r img i rei m ren When you import any DXF file you have the multiple file selection option you can also open them in a single PAT file To select multiple files h
481. ust insert the point names from which you will assume the grading Points obtained by i grading cumulation Grading of the points 1 and 2 Point gradin m geometrical grading c WY grading derived grading Derived grading Type of derived the rule identical with the point f cumulated fram the paints 1 2 proportional with the points clan SIU proportional with the points in this field you must insert the point names from which you will realize the grading proportional with the points The point numbers will be separated by commas Point with derived grading Grading proportional with those of the points Tmijl and Tlat Point grading geometrical grading XY grading derived grading Derived gading Type of derived the rule identical with the point cumulated from the points horizontal and vertical flip rotate by 90 180 degrees or by a custom angle Attention When you transform a derived grading rule by flip or rotation the flip must occur first and then the rotation 1 10 23 Copy a graded piece from one model to another To copy a piece from one model to another you must select the piece to be copied in another model then click on the Copy in clipboard button or press CTRL C For the destination model click on Paste from clipboard button or press CTRL V Select the piece to be copied in the new model After piece selection click
482. utomatically JV Made to measure size P Use separator ae eee After entering the size set you must mix the Size setname DIMENSIONS FOR LADIES l parametrical and the piece layers by the interactive P mix view cursor thus you must have the parametrical layer in front and you click the GEOMETRIC button Parametrical design for the front piece 1 You must create the free point P1 by a click on the Free point button this point will be defined as the front mid point from the waist 2 You must define the point P2 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the lateral point from the waist This point is created at a distance x Pt 4 and y 3 cm from the point P1 Pt waist length 3 You must define the point P3 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the slit point This point is created at a distance x 0 37 and y 6 22 cm from the point P1 4 You must define the point P4 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the hip point This point is created at a distance x Ps 4 1 and y 0 cm from the point P3 Ps hip length 5 You must define the point P5 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the edge point This point is created at a distance x 0 2 and y Lxp cm from the point P2 Lxp the pant out seam 6 You must define the point P6 by a clic
483. utton Edit size set n i 21 xl CE AE te D aE ee ___ Drop Spec a n l ream BT zes inder laias inder aias naor Jalas index alas _ Dimensior k ms 48 48 50 50 52 52 a z In the size set editor window click on Add new grading NVNINININESN Fe Fe group button In the size table will appear a new line called Group 2 On this new line no size is yet 4 Edit size set ee step p e Size nam Many grading groups can include the same size J7 Generate automatically pa rt of th e g rad in g g rou p 1 Made to measure size F Use separator a Description Size set name Size set description checked because all sizes are already selected as being 228 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Editszeset om OOOO OF Se onto ct ae The name of the new grading group can be changed for EIT x a fast further identification Click on the grey box where Sewnaunran the name group is displayed e g Group 2 in the i Base 50 former example A grading group name editing window A will appear you can introduce a new name for the new Fe a a REAN i created grading group Description Size set name Size set description J eeg poe e Ema Group2 Base 5 5izes index alias index alias_ index alias index alias r 44 To distribute sizes on grading groups check or uncheck by mouse click the table cells for each siz
484. utton in the watcher and from the displayed menu select Hide delta for measurement 255 es User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 11 10 Select the measurements to be printed in the product technical sheet In the watcher you can select which measurements will appear in the product technical sheet Click on the row header where the measurement is memorized If this header is checked marked by a star then the measurement will be printed on the product technical sheet Measurement table cm No Current measuremen Piece name 6 38 fan 42 i waist o Gi el fa FF 4 sa d2 10 aA 5 7 ia eck on the First column boxes to print the selected sizes on the product technical sheet back side T sleeve sleeve JT undersleeve undersleeve Top Sleeve If you want some values or quotes in the watcher to be printed in the product technical sheet click on the row header where the measurement is memorized A star will mark the rows that will be printed in the product technical sheet If the row was already marked and you click on it the star disappears and that row will not appear in the product technical sheet anymore 1 11 11 Save and load names measurement from the watcher In the watcher you can load a list of measurements from the disk For this you must first save this list Save the measurement names from the watcher Measurement table mm No Curentmeasuremen Short _ Piecename fae ae 50 E W
485. while you design the geometrical point another reason can be the ignorance of the seam allowance or of other technological adds The near examples show how the grading of trouser or skirt was transposed on the parametrical layer 291 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 12 7 1 How to adapt a direct designed pant for automatic grading To automatically grade a pant that was designed directly in EuroCAD Pattern Designer you must enter the PARAMETRICAL mode and create a rectangular structure from the center face mid face mid back lateral thigh and hip points together with the edge point on the pant Before starting the parametrical design you must declare the size set and the quotes required for this project see chapter 2 or you can load an already saved size set In the near example you can see how to adapt a pant obtained by direct design we have considered a size set from 42 to 48 with the following dimensions body length waist length hip length pant out seam pant inseam pant wide on edge ary ee eee ee ee See a i ee i a es a Grup Sizes Yfindex Blalias Dimensions gt body height I Chest Pb Waist Pt _ Hip Ps ___ hip lenathiLs 42 42 166 84 72 92 4 icc 88 76 96 16 1 2 46 3 46 92 80 100 16 4 5 48 96 84 104 16 mtm 96 84 104 16 2 Edit size set Dimension step jo e JV Hide unused grading sets Size na I Many grading groups can include the same size I Generate a
486. will be changed and the smaller sizes in the set becomes larger sizes If the Set name from annotation field setting is checked then the message from Piece information will be added next to the piece name in the piece name field If this option is unchecked then all the information are imported only in the Pattern information table Attention if in the window of preview pattern the patterns don t have name there is a possibility that the information referred to the name of the pattern to be found in the comments which are imported usually in Pattern information In this case is recommended to check the option Set name from annotation field When the Set points without grading to curve point setting is checked all grade points which don t have grading will be imported as curve points It is used in case if the are points set as graded points but don t have information about grading Using this setting you can decide if those points will be keep as graded points or will be converted in curve points so these points will be graded proportional to the grading of the nearest points This situation can be seen at the files which result from Lectra The checking of the option Smooth graded curve points will convert each curve point in smooth point It is recommended only in case if in the file are few points and the piece and the corners of the piece are cusp With the import function Files DXF AAMA dxf
487. will have the French curve shape on the indicated section You can continue drawing the piece by using other functions until closing the pattern contour Note It is not necessary for the current pattern to have the same dimension as the original one from which the French curve was extracted Before adding it on the selected piece the French curve will be resized proportionally with the distance between the indicated points The user can open the View French curves window from EuroCAD Pattern Reset tables position Designer settings if wants just to review or to take a look on the list Make a click on the Settings from the written menu to open the settings window and then on the View French curves button to open the View French curves window 82 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 7 10 Draw arc by three points In EuroCAD Pattern Designer you can create arcs by three points For this make a click on the Draw arc by 3 points function from Draw tool mode This point represents the first point form a new piece and also the piece origin After this move the cursor in the place where you want to create the second point and make a click to create it A curve will be drawn between the two points For Draw arc by 3 points the third point make a click in the work area where you want to pace it The result will be an arc defined by three points Draw a new pattern T CLICK
488. with the mouse or keyboard anymore now you will use the digitizer To supervise the correct piece conversion by digitization we recommend Place the monitor to be at least partially visible from the position the user takes while working on the digitizing table Computer speakers to be turned on in order to hear the messages from the EuroCAD Pattern Designer program during digitization 351 User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer as B How to use chord pointer buttons to digitize a piece H LON ANV x LNIOd Javas LNIOd JAAN AILNANDAYS Gal iddV a LNIOd LYVLS LNIOd 30VYD LYVLS NOLLNG LYVLS NO X319 N Y3LLVd JHL ONIZILIOIO 3HOASE SLNIOd SANND D P aJAYYN 1sv1 SIXV NIVUS NO MOIS LSYld SIXV NIVYS YOd t LNIOd SAND GOODOOO O OOO HILON HOLON ANY ANIOd 3AUND LNIOd OO O O o7 7 LNIOd IV INH JL YOIXILNI aaMNddY JYV SLNIOd ON INT 1NIOd 1NIOd aqvao SAND 352 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Appendix 02 EuroCAD Beta wired pointer usage Positioning cross Green led for functioning check Red led that is lit when the pointer gets close to the digitizer surface Button 0 for graded points technical elements letters and commands Button no 3 for internal technical points Button no 2 for notches Button no 1 for curve points Wired pointer IMPORTANT before use start the
489. wn from millimeter to millimeter ALT select and drag free with your mouse the point can be overlapped on the other points fee A crade w Drop y Spec Fa Ex First activate the Modify the shape of the piece on the base size without changing the other sizes function You can change the piece only for the base size from the size set for this you must check the size that you want to modify like base size 221 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer You must select the point that you want to modify and drag with your mouse from the selected point until the wanted position You can modify the position of curve points tangents control points and graded points If you will press CTRL key the point movement will be coerce This will be moved only horizontally 4 or vertically Positio n of selected point can be changed with the arrows from the keyboard if you press the arrows keys the point will be moved from centimeters to centimeters if you press CTRL arrows from keyboard the selected point will be moved from millimeters to millimeters If you press ALT when you move the point you can overlap the selected point on the other points You can overlap the point on the other point from another grade 222 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer Grade rule of modification point Edit grading table cm a E Gade Deap ip Extra La IL ILI The g
490. y and click the left mouse button at the current position the X and Y values are assigned from the screen and applied automatically in the operation text Horizontal triangulation point Fi By this function you can draw a point Pn from the point PA at a distance on horizontal X and diagonal either upper or lower In the near example on the horizontal from P1 point at a distance X it was raised the perpendicular line On this perpendicular it was drawn the P2 point so as the distance between P1 n P2 will have the value D Function parameters Description of the selected geometrical operation To draw a new point by this function you must assign Create a new point P49 from point P46 at the following parameters 0 89 cm horizontally and 4 55 cm reference point diagonally on the down side horizontal distance X diagonal distance D You must also assign the placement direction for the new point up or down If the reference point is already defined you may hold down the SHIFT key and click the left mouse button at the current position the X and D values and the placement are assigned from the screen and applied automatically in the operation text 274 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 4 Vertical triangulation point d By this function you can draw a new point Pn from an existing point PA la at a distance on vertical Y and on diagonal D In the near example on the perpendicular from the P1 point you choos
491. yed Moreover on each button there is an icon that illustrates the specific function for each button The geometrical elements used by these functions are Point Line Circle Control point 1 12 4 The design script 1 12 4 1 What is the design script The design script is a list in which you can see chronologically ordered all the steps used for the parametrical design The design script for a product is displayed in the PARAMETRICAL DESIGN mode in the Script Area The buttons for all the operations in the script are located on the button bar in the PARAMETRICAL DESIGN mode 1 12 4 2 How to add a new step To add a new step operation you must select one of the buttons that define the corresponding design functions or you must click on the Insert operation button located in the script area When you click on Insert operation button a new step is added to the list and it will appear on the next position after the previously selected step The new step will appear in black in the list and will mi contain the message insert a new operation here To insert a new operation you must choose and click the button that represents the desired function If you click a button in the geometrical design functions area a new step operation will be added at the end of the list in the script area 1 12 4 3 How to delete a step in the script list To delete a step in the script list you must select the oper
492. yer design thus the manual grading procedure is completely eliminated Why the Grading Table for a point anchored to a parametrical point is no longer available for edit First of all we must understand how the computer builds the pattern for the base size it reads the quotes from the dimensions table that corresponds to the base size based on these values it builds the parametrical points see the example for designing a skirt Then in order to obtain the pattern for another size the computer IS NOT grading a base size but it redesigns the whole pattern from the beginning for the specific size by reading the sizes quotes form the dimensions table Designing of a new measure is not different from designing the base size all measures are designed from scratch based on the quotes in the dimensions table for the each size IMPORTANT As seen in the previous paragraph the quotes inserted in the measurement table are used directly for the pattern design so it is very important that the dimensions table will contain all required quotes the quote values must accurate and must respect the measurement units 263 B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 12 2 Developing a new project by parametrical design We describe here the steps to be followed in order to develop a set of patterns by parametrical design prepare the size set with the quotes required for design develop the parametrical layer design patterns and ancho
493. you can pick up the Edit the grading table of the point function After grading the piece the AB segment is rotated on the extreme sizes The designer needs that the fabric texture will be aligned to the AB segment for all sizes The grain axis remains horizontal even if the AB segment become more rotated The two points that defines the grain axis can be graded like any other point thus the grain axis can remain parallel to the AB segment for all graded sizes for the base size and for the extremes in this grading 40 and 54 238 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer 1 10 19 Grading a notch Beside the possibility to grade some technical elements as axis and technical interior points EuroCAD Pattern Designer allows the grading of the distance notches To grade a distance notch set the active table for which you want to grade the notch and then in Grading tool mode pick up the Edit the grading table of the point function After activating the function the steps window appears on the screen and you can select the notch to be graded This window appears on the screen only if it was set in settings to be displayed To select a distance notch placed in a point you must hold down CTRL key when you click on the distance notch to be graded To grade a distance notch click to select the piece then enter the GRADING mode and click to select the notch On notch selection the cursor becomes similar w
494. you must select each point on the piece while in the right side menu on the Point definition field you must check the geom point message in the field under this message you must enter the name of the geometrical point on which you will anchor the piece point After the main points in a piece were anchored on the parametrical layer the piece will be automatically graded and the grading will be displayed if you click on the Show hide grading Parametrical design for the back piece 1 You must create the free point P10 by a click on the Free point button this point will be defined as the back mid point from the waist 2 You must create the point P11 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the point on the hemline from center back This point is created at a distance x 0 and y Lpr cm from the point P10 Lpr product length 3 You must create the point P12 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the point on the hemline from lateral This point is created at a distance x Ps 4 3 5 and y 1 cm from the point P11 Ps hip length 4 You must create the point P13 by a click on the point at XY from another point button and represents the waist point from lateral This point is created at a distance x Pt 4 1 5 and y 0 5 cm from the point P10 Pt waist length 5 You must create the point P14 by a click on the point at XY f
495. ze a curve you start by digitizing the curve starting point as grade point using 0 pointer button then follow the curve outline marking points one by one using the 1 al pointer button Curve outline is marked by points separated by approximately 1 5 cm on the edge The distance between points can be lesser 5 mm for a pronounced camber or larger 3 4 cm for a broaden curve Button 1 for curve points 118 as B User manual EuroCAD Pattern Designer For an easier outline follow up it is recommended to rotate the pointer so as one of the match cross lines to be tangent to the contour For an accurate pattern digitization some simple rules must be followed The pattern must be perfectly laid down and fastened on the Digitizer The positioning cross on the pointer window must be accurately superposed on the marked point or on the digitizing outline Even if the pointer rotate is not important it is recommended that while following the outline one of the cross lines to be tangent to the edge Thus contour overlapping can be easily eye checked After digitization it is recommended to use the interpolation function see chapter 1 5 24 For digitizing patterns larger than the table workspace the pattern must be divided in two or more parts that can be digitized separately Pattern partition does not suppose cutting It can be done by tracing a division line between the two parts and marking the in
496. ze into a simple size set containing a single grading type you will have to use one of the following functions Add a new size or Add a new grade size After activating one of these two buttons a new window called New combined size becomes displayed on the screen Here you can establish the new size name by typing in the Combined name field The program adds automatically an index for the new size and this index will always place the size at the end of the size set If you want to place it in another position in the size set you can do this by changing the size index If you want the new size to be added at the size set beginning the index must be smaller than 1 and if you want to add it between two sizes you will have to input an index having the value between the two indexes values of the sizes between which you want to add the new one If you want to add the new size in a combined size set you have the possibility to add new sizes for all sizes types For this you will have to make a click on one of the Add a new Grade size in the size set Add a new Drop size in the size set Add a new Spec size in the size set or Add a new Extra size in the size set functions After activating one of these functions a new window will become displayed on the screen Here you will be able to type the new sizes names in the Grade name Drop name Spec name or Extra name fields depending on t

USER MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents